Emotron VFX 2.0 AC drive

Emotron VFX 2.0AC driveInstruction manualEnglishSoftware version 4.3X

Emotron VFX 2.0INSTRUCTION MANUAL - ENGLISHSoftware version 4.3XDocument number: 01-5326-01Edition: r1Date of release: 02-07-2012© Copyright CG Drives & Automation Sweden AB 2005 - 2012CG Drives & Automation Sweden AB retains the right to changespecifications and illustrations in the text, without prior notification. Thecontents of this document may not be copied without the explicitpermission of CG Drives & Automation Sweden AB.

Safety InstructionsCongratulations for choosing a product from CG Drives &Automation!Before you begin with installation, commissioning orpowering up the unit for the first time it is very importantthat you carefully study this Instruction manual.Following symbols can appear in this manual. Always readthese first before continuing:NOTE: Additional information as an aid to avoidproblems.!CAUTION!Failure to follow these instructions can resultin malfunction or damage to the AC drive.Warning!Failure to follow these instructions can resultin serious injury to the user in addition toserious damage to the AC drive.HOT SURFACE!Failure to follow these instructions can resultin injury to the user.Handling the AC driveInstallation, commissioning, demounting, takingmeasurements, etc, of or on the AC drive may only becarried out by personnel technically qualified for the task.A number of national, regional and local regulations governhandling, storage and installation of the equipment. Alwaysobserve current rules and legislation.Opening the AC driveWARNING!Always switch off the mains voltage beforeopening the AC drive and wait at least7minutes to allow the buffer capacitors todischarge.Always take adequate precautions before opening the ACdrive. Although the connections for the control signals andthe switches are isolated from the main voltage, do nottouch the control board when the AC drive is switched on.Precautions to be taken with aconnected motorIf work must be carried out on a connected motor or on thedriven machine, the mains voltage must always bedisconnected from the AC drive first. Wait at least 7 minutesbefore starting work.EarthingThe AC drive must always be earthed via the mains safetyearth connection.Earth leakage currentCAUTION!This AC drive has an earth leakage current! which does exceed 3.5 mA AC. Therefore theminimum size of the protective earthconductor must comply with the local safety regulationsfor high leakage current equipment which means thataccording the standard IEC61800-5-1 the protectiveearth connection must be assured by one of followingconditions:PE conductor cross-sectional area shall for cable size< 16mm 2 be equal to the used phase conductors, forcable size above 16mm 2 but smaller or equal to 35mm 2the PE conductor cross-sectional area shall be at least16mm2 . For cables >35mm 2 the PE conductor crosssectionalarea should be at least 50% of the used phaseconductor.When the PE conductor in the used cable type is not inaccordance with the above mentioned cross-sectionalarea requirements, a separate PE conductor should beused to establish this.Residual current device (RCD)compatibilityThis product cause a DC current in the protectiveconductor. Where a residual current device (RCD) is usedfor protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only aType B RCD is allowed on the supply side of this product.Use RCD of 300 mA minimum.EMC RegulationsIn order to comply with the EMC Directive, it is absolutelynecessary to follow the installation instructions. Allinstallation descriptions in this manual follow the EMCDirective.Mains voltage selectionThe AC drive may be ordered for use with the mains voltagerange listed below.VFX48: 230-480 VVFX52: 440-525 VVFX69: 500-690 VVoltage tests (Megger)Do not carry out voltage tests (Megger) on the motor, beforeall the motor cables have been disconnected from the ACdrive.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

9.7 Programming example............................................ 5410. Serial communication ................................. 5510.1 Modbus RTU ............................................................ 5510.2 Parameter sets........................................................ 5510.3 Motor data ............................................................... 5610.4 Start and stop commands...................................... 5610.5 Reference signal ..................................................... 5610.5.1 Process value .......................................................... 5610.6 Description of the EInt formats .............................. 5711. Functional Description ............................... 5911.1 Preferred View [100]............................................... 5911.1.1 1st Line [110].......................................................... 5911.1.2 2nd Line [120] ........................................................ 6011.2 Main Setup [200].................................................... 6011.2.1 Operation [210]....................................................... 6011.2.2 Remote Signal Level/Edge [21A]........................... 6511.2.3 Mains supply voltage [21B].................................... 6511.2.4 Motor Data [220] .................................................... 6611.2.5 Motor Protection [230] ........................................... 7111.2.6 Parameter Set Handling [240]............................... 7411.2.7 Trip Autoreset/Trip Conditions [250]..................... 7711.2.8 Serial Communication [260] .................................. 8511.3 Process and Application Parameters [300] .......... 8911.3.1 Set/View Reference Value [310] ........................... 8911.3.2 Process Settings [320] ........................................... 8911.3.3 Start/Stop settings [330] ....................................... 9411.3.4 Mechanical brake control....................................... 9811.3.5 Speed [340]........................................................... 10311.3.6 Torques [350]........................................................ 10611.3.7 Preset References [360] ...................................... 10811.3.8 PI Speed Control [370] ......................................... 10911.3.9 PID Process Control [380] .................................... 11011.3.10 Pump/Fan Control [390] ...................................... 11411.3.11 Crane Option [3A0] ............................................... 12111.4 Load Monitor and Process Protection [400]....... 12411.4.1 Load Monitor [410]............................................... 12411.4.2 Process Protection [420]...................................... 12811.5 I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]..................... 13011.5.1 Analogue Inputs [510] .......................................... 13011.5.2 Digital Inputs [520] ............................................... 13711.5.3 Analogue Outputs [530] ....................................... 13911.5.4 Digital Outputs [540] ............................................ 14311.5.5 Relays [550] .......................................................... 14511.5.6 Virtual Connections [560]..................................... 14611.6 Logical Functions and Timers [600] .................... 14711.6.1 Comparators [610] ............................................... 14711.6.2 Logic Output Y [620]............................................. 15811.6.3 Logic Output Z [630]............................................. 16011.6.4 Timer1 [640] ......................................................... 16111.6.5 Timer2 [650] ......................................................... 16311.6.6 Counters [660] ...................................................... 16411.7 View Operation/Status [700] ............................... 16711.7.1 Operation [710]..................................................... 16711.7.2 Status [720] .......................................................... 17011.7.3 Stored values [730] .............................................. 17311.8 View Trip Log [800] ............................................... 17511.8.1 Trip Message log [810]......................................... 17511.8.2 Trip Messages [820] - [890] ................................ 17611.8.3 Reset Trip Log [8A0] ............................................. 17611.9 System Data [900]................................................ 17711.9.1 VSD Data [920] ..................................................... 17712. Troubleshooting, Diagnoses andMaintenance .............................................. 17912.1 Trips, warnings and limits..................................... 17912.2 Trip conditions, causes and remedial action ...... 18012.2.1 Technically qualified personnel............................ 18112.2.2 Opening the AC drive ............................................ 18112.2.3 Precautions to take with a connected motor ...... 18112.2.4 Autoreset Trip ........................................................ 18112.3 Maintenance ......................................................... 18513. Options........................................................ 18713.1 Options for the control panel................................ 18713.2 Handheld Control Panel 2.0................................. 18713.3 EmoSoftCom.......................................................... 18713.4 Brake chopper....................................................... 18813.5 I/O Board ............................................................... 18913.6 Encoder.................................................................. 18913.7 PTC/PT100 ............................................................ 18913.8 Crane option board ............................................... 18913.9 Serial communication and fieldbus..................... 19013.10 Standby supply board option................................ 19013.11 Safe Stop option.................................................... 19113.12 Output chokes ....................................................... 19313.13 AFE - Active Front End........................................... 19314. Technical Data ........................................... 19514.1 Electrical specifications related to model ........... 19514.2 General electrical specifications.......................... 20014.3 Operation at higher temperatures ....................... 20114.4 Dimensions and Weights...................................... 20214.5 Environmental conditions..................................... 20314.6 Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands.............. 20414.6.1 According to IEC ratings........................................ 20414.6.2 Fuses and cable dimensions according toNEMA ratings......................................................... 20614.7 Control signals....................................................... 20815. Menu List ................................................... 209Index ........................................................... 2156 CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

1.7 Glossary1.7.1 Abbreviations and symbolsIn this manual the following abbreviations are used:Table 2AbbreviationsAbbreviation/symbolDSPAC drivePEBBIGBTCPHCPEIntUIntIntLongDescriptionDigital signals processorFrequency converterPower Electronic Building BlockInsulated Gate Bipolar TransistorControl panel, the programming andpresentation unit on the AC driveHandheld control panel (option)Communication formatCommunication format (Unsigned integer)Communication format (Integer)Communication formatThe function cannot be changed in run mode1.7.2 DefinitionsIn this manual the following definitions for current, torqueand frequency are used:Table 3DefinitionsName Description QuantityI IN Nominal input current of AC drive A RMSI NOM Nominal output current of AC drive A RMSI MOT Nominal motor current A RMSP NOM Nominal power of AC drive kWP MOT Motor power kWT NOM Nominal torque of motor NmT MOT Motor torque Nmf OUT Output frequency of AC drive Hzf MOT Nominal frequency of motor Hzn MOT Nominal speed of motor rpmI CL Maximum output current A RMSSpeed Actual motor speed rpmTorque Actual motor torque NmSyncspeedSynchronous speed of the motorrpm10 Introduction CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

2.2 Stand-alone unitsThe AC drive must be mounted in a vertical position againsta flat surface. Use the template (in the File archive on ourhomepage) to mark out the position of the fixing holes.2.2.2 Mounting schemes128.5 3710Ø13 (2x)416396Fig. 4AC drive mounting model 003 to 3K0202.6Ø7 (4x)2.2.1 CoolingFig. 4 shows the minimum free space required around theAC drive for the models 003 to 3K0 in order to guaranteeadequate cooling. Because the fans blow the air from thebottom to the top it is advisable not to position an air inletimmediately above an air outlet.Fig. 5GlandsM20VFX48/52: Model 003 to 018 (B)GlandM16The following minimum separation between two AC drives,or a AC drive and a non-dissipating wall must bemaintained. Valid if free space on opposite side.Table 4VFX-VFX,side-by-side(mm)VFX-wall,wall-oneside(mm)Mounting and cooling003-018 026-074 090-250 300-3K0cabineta 200 200 200 100b 200 200 200 0c 0 0 0 0d 0 0 0 0a 100 100 100 100b 100 100 100 0c 0 0 0 0d 0 0 0 0Fig. 6GlandsM32GlandM25Cable interface for mains, motor and communication,VFX48/52:Model 003 to 018 (B)NOTE: When a 300 to 3K0 model is placed between twowalls, a minimum distance at each side of 200 mm mustbe maintained.Fig. 7VFX48/52: Model 003 to 018 (B), with optionalgland plate12 Mounting CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

RITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTAL2.3.3 Mounting schemes10022502000150600600VFX48: Model 300 to 500 (G and H)VFX69: Model 250 to 400 (H69)VFX48: Model 600 to 750 (I)VFX69: Model 430 to 595 (I69)2250200015010022502000150100900 6001200600VFX48: Model 860 to 1K 0(J)VFX69: Model 650 to 800 (J69)VFX48: Model 1K15 to 1K25 (KA)VFX69: Model 905 to 995 (KA69)Fig. 1516 Mounting CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

RITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTALRITTAL150150225020002250200018006002100600VFX48: Model 1K35 to 1K5 (K)VFX69: Model 1K2 (K69)VFX48: Model 1K75 (L)VFX69: Model 1K4 (L69)150150225020002250200024006002700600VFX48: Model 2K0(M)VFX69: Model 1K6 (M69)VFX48: Model 2K25 (N)VFX69: Model 1K8 (N69)150225020003000600VFX48: Model 2K5(O)VFX69: Model 2K0 (O69)Fig. 16CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Mounting 17

3. InstallationThe description of installation in this chapter complies withthe EMC standards and the Machine Directive.Select cable type and screening according to the EMCrequirements valid for the environment where the AC driveis installed.3.1 Before installationRead the following checklist and prepare for yourapplication before installation.• Local or remote control.• Long motor cables (>100m), refer to section Long motorcables page 22.• Motors in parallel, refer to menu §Drive Mode [213],page 61.• Functions used.• Suitable AC drive size in proportion to themotor/application.If the AC drive is temporarily stored before being connected,please check the technical data for environmentalconditions. If the AC drive is moved from a cold storageroom to the room where it is to be installed, condensationcan form on it. Allow the AC drive to become fullyacclimatised and wait until any visible condensation hasevaporated before connecting the mains voltage.3.2 Cable connections formodel 003 to 0743.2.1 Mains cablesDimension the mains and motor cables according to localregulations. The cable must be able to carry the AC driveload current.Recommendations for selecting mainscables• To fulfil EMC purposes it is not necessary to usescreened mains cables.• Use heat-resistant cables, +60C or higher.• Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with localregulations and the nominal current of the motor. Seetable 49, page 204.• PE conductor cross-sectional area shall for cable size< 16mm 2 be equal to the used phase conductors, forcable size above 16mm 2 but smaller or equal to 35mm 2the PE conductor cross-sectional area shall be at least16mm 2 . For cables >35mm 2 the PE conductor cross-sectionalarea should be at least 50% of the used phase conductor.When the PE conductor in the used cable type is not inaccordance with the above mentioned cross-sectionalarea requirements, a separate PE conductor should beused to establish this.• The litz ground connection see fig. 21, is only necessaryif the mounting plate is painted. All the AC drives havean unpainted back side and are therefore suitable formounting on an unpainted mounting plate.Connect the mains cables according to fig. 17 or 18. TheAC drive has as standard a built-in RFI mains filter thatcomplies with category C3 which suits the SecondEnvironment standard.PEFig. 17 Mains and motor connections, model 003-018PEL1 L2 L3 DC- DC+ RL1 L2 L3 DC-DC+ R U V WU V WFig. 18 Mains and motor connections, 026-046Screen connectionof motor cablesScreen connectionof motor cablesCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Installation 19

L1L2L3PE DC- DC+ R U V W3.2.2 Motor cablesTo comply with the EMC emission standards the AC driveis provided with a RFI mains filter. The motor cables mustalso be screened and connected on both sides. In this way aso-called “Faraday cage” is created around the AC drive,motor cables and motor. The RFI currents are now fed backto their source (the IGBTs) so the system stays within theemission levels.PEFig. 19 Mains and motor connection, model 061 - 074Table 5L1,L2,L3PEU, V, WDC-,DC+,RScreen connectionof motor cablesMains and motor connectionsMains supply, 3 -phaseSafety earth (protected earth)Motor earthMotor output, 3-phaseBrake resistor, DC-linkconnections (optional)NOTE: The Brake and DC-link Terminals are only fitted ifthe DC+/DC- option or Brake Chopper Option is built-in.WARNING!The Brake Resistor must be connectedbetween terminals DC+ and R.WARNING!In order to work safely, the mains earth mustbe connected to PE and the motor earthto .Recommendations for selecting motorcables• Use screened cables according to specification in table 6.Use symmetrical shielded cable; three phase conductorsand a concentric or otherwise symmetrically constructedPE conductor, and a shield.• PE conductor cross-sectional area shall for cable size< 16mm 2 be equal to the used phase conductors, forcable size above 16mm 2 but smaller or equal to 35mm 2the PE conductor cross-sectional area shall be at least16mm2 . For cables >35mm 2 the PE conductor crosssectionalarea should be at least 50% of the used phaseconductor.When the PE conductor in the used cable type is not inaccordance with the above mentioned cross-sectionalarea requirements, a separate PE conductor should beused to establish this.• Use heat-resistant cables, +60C or higher.• Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with thenominal output current of the motor. See table 49, page204.• Keep the motor cable between AC drive and motor asshort as possible.• The screening must be connected with a large contactsurface of preferable 360 and always at both ends, tothe motor housing and the AC drive housing. Whenpainted mounting plates are used, do not be afraid toscrape away the paint to obtain as large contact surface aspossible at all mounting points for items such as saddlesand the bare cable screening. Relying just on theconnection made by the screw thread is not sufficient.NOTE: It is important that the motor housing has thesame earth potential as the other parts of the machine.• The litz ground connection, see fig. 21, is only necessaryif the mounting plate is painted. All the AC drives havean unpainted back side and are therefore suitable formounting on an unpainted mounting plate.Connect the motor cables according to U - U, V - V andW - W, see Fig. 17, Fig. 18 and Fig. 19 .NOTE: The terminals DC-, DC+ and R are options.20 Installation CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Switches between the motor and theAC driveIf the motor cables are to be interrupted by maintenanceswitches, output coils, etc., it is necessary that the screeningis continued by using metal housing, metal mounting plates,etc. as shown in the Fig. 21.AC drive built into cabinetRFI-FilterMainsAC driveMotorScreen connectionof signal cablesLitzMetal EMC cable glandsOutput coil (option)Screened cablesUnpainted mounting plateMetal connector housingPEMains(L1,L2,L3,PE)Metal EMCcoupling nutBrake resistor(option)MotorFig. 20 Screen connection of cables.Motor cableshield connectionFig. 21 AC drive in a cabinet on a mounting plateFig. 22 shows an example when there is no metal mountingplate used (e.g. if IP54 AC drives are used). It is importantto keep the “circuit” closed, by using metal housing andcable glands.Pay special attention to the following points:• If paint must be removed, steps must be taken to preventsubsequent corrosion. Repaint after making connections!• The fastening of the whole AC drive housing must beelectrically connected with the mounting plate over anarea which is as large as possible. For this purpose theremoval of paint is necessary. An alternative method is toconnect the AC drive housing to the mounting platewith as short a length of litz wire as possible.• Try to avoid interruptions in the screening whereverpossible.• If the AC drive is mounted in a standard cabinet, theinternal wiring must comply with the EMC standard.Fig. 21 shows an example of a AC drive built into acabinet.RFI-FilterMainsAC driveBrakeresistor(option)Outputcoils(option)Metal EMC cableglandsScreened cablesMetal housingMetal connector housingMetal cable glandMotorMainsFig. 22 AC drive as stand aloneCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Installation 21

3.5.1 Dimension of cables and fusesPlease refer to the chapter Technical data, section 14.6, page204.3.5.2 Tightening torque for mainsand motor cablesTable 8 Model VFX48/52 003 to 046Brake chopperMains/motorTightening torque, Nm 1.2-1.4 1.2-1.4Table 9 Model VFX48/52 061 to 074All cables 60 AAll cables 73 ATightening torque, Nm 2.8 5.0Table 10 Model VFX48 090 to 109Brake chopperMains/motorBlock, mm 2 95 95Cable diameter, mm 2 16-95 16-95Tightening torque, Nm 14 14Table 11 Model VFX48 146 to 175Brake chopperMains/motorBlock, mm 2 95 150Cable diameter, mm 2 16-95 35-95 120-150Tightening torque, Nm 14 14 24Table 12Model VFX48 210 to 250 andVFX69 090 to 200Brake chopperMains/motorBlock, mm 2 150 240Cable diameter, mm 2 35-95 120-150 35-70 95-240Tightening torque, Nm 14 24 14 243.6 Thermal protection on themotorStandard motors are normally fitted with an internal fan.The cooling capacity of this built-in fan is dependent on thefrequency of the motor. At low frequency, the coolingcapacity will be insufficient for nominal loads. Pleasecontact the motor supplier for the cooling characteristics ofthe motor at lower frequency.WARNING!Depending on the cooling characteristics ofthe motor, the application, the speed and theload, it may be necessary to use forcedcooling on the motor.Motor thermistors offer better thermal protection for themotor. Depending on the type of motor thermistor fitted,the optional PTC input may be used. The motor thermistorgives a thermal protection independent of the speed of themotor, thus of the speed of the motor fan. See the functions,Motor I 2 t type [231] and Motor I 2 t current [232].3.7 Motors in parallelIt is possible to have motors in parallel as long as the totalcurrent does not exceed the nominal value of the AC drive.The following has to be taken into account when setting themotor data:Menu [221]Motor Voltage:Menu [222]Motor Frequency:Menu [223]Motor Power:Menu [224]Motor Current:Menu [225]Motor Speed:Menu [227]Motor Cos PHI:The motors in parallel must have thesame motor voltage.The motors in parallel must have thesame motor frequency.Add the motor power values for themotors in parallel.Add the current for the motors in parallel.Set the average speed for the motors inparallel.Set the average Cos PHI value for themotors in parallel.NOTE: The shafts of the motors in parallel must bephysically connected to obtain correct torque and speedcontrol.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Installation 25

26 Installation CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

4. Control Connections4.1 Control boardFig. 28 shows the layout of the control board which is wherethe parts most important to the user are located. Althoughthe control board is galvanically isolated from the mains, forsafety reasons do not make changes while the mains supplyis on!WARNING!Always switch off the mains voltage and waitat least 7 minutes to allow the DC capacitorsto discharge before connecting the controlsignals or changing position of any switches. If theoption External supply is used, switch of the mains tothe option. This is done to prevent damage on thecontrol board.X5X6X7X41Option23CommunicationCX8ControlPanelSwitchesS1 S2 S3 S4I U I U I U I U12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22X11ControlsignalsAO1 AO2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DO1 DO2 DI82 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011R0241 42 43Relay outputsNC C NOX2 31 32 33 51 52+10V AI1AI2AI3AI4-10VDI1DI2DI3 +24VNCCR01NOX3NOCR03Fig. 28 Control board layoutCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Control Connections 27

4.2 Terminal connectionsThe terminal strip for connecting the control signals isaccessible after opening the front panel.The table describes the default functions for the signals. Theinputs and outputs are programmable for other functions asdescribed in chapter 11. page 59. For signal specificationsrefer to chapter 14. page 195.NOTE: The maximum total combined current for outputs11, 20 and 21 is 100mA.NOTE: It is possible to use external 24V DC if connectionto Common (15).Table 13Control signalsTerminal Name Function (Default)Outputs1 +10 V +10 VDC supply voltage6 -10 V -10 VDC supply voltage7 Common Signal ground11 +24 V +24 VDC supply voltage12 Common Signal ground15 Common Signal groundDigital inputs8 DigIn 1 RunL (reverse)9 DigIn 2 RunR (forward)10 DigIn 3 Off16 DigIn 4 Off17 DigIn 5 Off18 DigIn 6 Off19 DigIn 7 Off22 DigIn 8 RESETDigital outputs20 DigOut 1 Ready21 DigOut 2 BrakeAnalogue inputs2 AnIn 1 Process Ref3 AnIn 2 Off4 AnIn 3 Off5 AnIn 4 OffAnalogue outputs13 AnOut 1 Min speed to max speed14 AnOut 2 0 to max torqueTable 13Relay outputs31 N/C 132 COM 133 N/O 141 N/C 242 COM 243 N/O 251 COM 3 Relay 3 output52 N/O 3 OffRelay 1 outputTrip, active when the AC drive isin a TRIP condition.Relay 2 outputRun, active when the AC drive isstarted.NOTE: N/C is opened when the relay is active and N/O isclosed when the relay is active.4.3 Inputs configurationwith the switchesThe switches S1 to S4 are used to set the input configurationfor the 4 analogue inputs AnIn1, AnIn2, AnIn3 and AnIn4as described in table 14. See Fig. 28 for the location of theswitches.Table 14Switch settingsInput Signal type SwitchAnIn1AnIn2AnIn3AnIn4Control signalsTerminal Name Function (Default)VoltageCurrent (default)VoltageCurrent (default)VoltageCurrent (default)VoltageCurrent (default)S1S1S2S2S3S3S4S4NOTE: Scaling and offset of AnIn1 - AnIn4 can beconfigured using the software. See menus [512], [515],[518] and [51B] in section 11.5, page 130.NOTE: the 2 analogue outputs AnOut 1 and AnOut 2 canbe configured using the software. See menu [530]section 11.5.3, page 139IIIIIIIIUUUUUUUU28 Control Connections CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

4.4 Connection exampleFig. 29 gives an overall view of a AC drive connectionexample.RFIfilterMotorAlternative forpotentiometer control**12345670 - 10 V4 - 20 mAOptional ***Motor PTC+10 VDCAnIn 1: ReferenceAnIn 2OptionalAnIn 3AnIn 4Common-10 VDCAnOut 1CommonAnOut 2DigIn 1:RunL*DigOut 2DigIn 2:RunR*DigOut 1DigIn3+24 VDCCommonRelay 1DigIn 4DigIn 5DigIn 6DigIn 7Relay 2DigIn 8:Reset*CE"FTKXGRelay 3TGUGVNQE1TGORTGX PGZV GUEComm. optionsOther optionsGPVGT* Default setting** The switch S1 is set to U*** = Optional terminals X1: 78 - 79for connection of Motor-PTC onsizes B, C and D.Fig. 29 Connection exampleFieldbus optionor PCOption boardCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Control Connections 29

4.5 Connecting the ControlSignals4.5.1 CablesThe standard control signal connections are suitable forstranded flexible wire up to 1.5 mm 2 and for solid wire up to2.5 mm 2 .Terminal 78 & 79 forconnection of MotorPTC optionTerminal A- & B+ forconnection ofStand by supplyoption boardTerminal 78 & 79 forconnection of MotorPTC optionL1L2L3PEDC- DC+ R U VControl signalsFig. 32 Connecting the control signals, 061 to 074Control signalsFig. 30 Connecting the control signals, 003 to 018Terminal 78 & 79 forconnection of MotorPTC optionControl signalsControl signalsFig. 31 Connecting the control signals, 026 to 046Fig. 33 Connecting the control signals, 090 to 25030 Control Connections CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

NOTE: The screening of control signal cables isnecessary to comply with the immunity levels given inthe EMC Directive (it reduces the noise level).NOTE: Control cables must be separated from motor andmains cables.4.5.2 Types of control signalsAlways make a distinction between the different types ofsignals. Because the different types of signals can adverselyaffect each other, use a separate cable for each type. This isoften more practical because, for example, the cable from apressure sensor may be connected directly to the AC drive.We can distinguish between the following types of controlsignals:Analogue inputsVoltage or current signals, (0-10 V, 0/4-20 mA) normallyused as control signals for speed, torque and PID feedbacksignals.Analogue outputsVoltage or current signals, (0-10 V, 0/4-20 mA) whichchange slowly or only occasionally in value. In general, theseare control or measurement signals.DigitalVoltage or current signals (0-10 V, 0-24 V, 0/4-20 mA)which can have only two values (high or low) and onlyoccasionally change in value.DataUsually voltage signals (0-5 V, 0-10 V) which change rapidlyand at a high frequency, generally data signals such asRS232, RS485, Profibus, etc.RelayRelay contacts (0-250 VAC) can switch highly inductiveloads (auxiliary relay, lamp, valve, brake, etc.).SignaltypeMaximum wire sizeTighteningtorque0.5 NmAnalogue Rigid cable:Digital0.14-2.5 mm 2Flexible cable:Data 0.14-1.5 mm 2Relay 0.25-1.5 mm 2Cable with ferrule:Cable typeScreenedScreenedScreenedNot screenedExample:The relay output from a AC drive which controls anauxiliary relay can, at the moment of switching, form asource of interference (emission) for a measurement signalfrom, for example, a pressure sensor. Therefore it is advisedto separate wiring and screening to reduce disturbances.4.5.3 ScreeningFor all signal cables the best results are obtained if thescreening is connected to both ends: the AC drive side andat the source (e.g. PLC, or computer). See Fig. 34.It is strongly recommended that the signal cables be allowedto cross mains and motor cables at a 90 angle. Do not letthe signal cable go in parallel with the mains and motorcable.4.5.4 Single-ended or double-endedconnection?In principle, the same measures applied to motor cablesmust be applied to all control signal cables, in accordancewith the EMC-Directives.For all signal cables as mentioned in section 4.5.2 the bestresults are obtained if the screening is connected to bothends. See Fig. 34.NOTE: Each installation must be examined carefullybefore applying the proper EMC measurements.Control boardPressuresensor(example)External control(e.g. in metal housing)Control consolFig. 34 Electro Magnetic (EM) screening of control signalcables.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Control Connections 31

4.5.5 Current signals ((0)4-20 mA)A current signal like (0)4-20 mA is less sensitive todisturbances than a 0-10 V signal, because it is connected toan input which has a lower impedance (250 ) than avoltage signal (20 k). It is therefore strongly advised to usecurrent control signals if the cables are longer than a fewmetres.4.6 Connecting optionsThe option cards are connected by the optional connectorsX4 or X5 on the control board see Fig. 28, page 27 andmounted above the control board. The inputs and outputsof the option cards are connected in the same way as othercontrol signals.4.5.6 Twisted cablesAnalogue and digital signals are less sensitive to interferenceif the cables carrying them are “twisted”. This is certainly tobe recommended if screening cannot be used. By twistingthe wires the exposed areas are minimised. This means thatin the current circuit for any possible High Frequency (HF)interference fields, no voltage can be induced. For a PLC itis therefore important that the return wire remains inproximity to the signal wire. It is important that the pair ofwires is fully twisted over 360°.32 Control Connections CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

5.3 Remote controlIn this example external signals are used to control the ACdrive/motor.A standard 4-pole motor for 400 V, an external start buttonand a reference value will also be used.5.3.1 Connect control cablesHere you will make up the minimum wiring for starting. Inthis example the motor/AC drive will run with right rotation.To comply with the EMC standard, use screened controlcables with plaited flexible wire up to 1.5 mm 2 or solid wireup to 2.5 mm 2 .3. Connect a reference value between terminals 7 (Common)and 2 (AnIn 1) as in Fig. 37.4. Connect an external start button between terminal 11(+24 VDC) and 9 (DigIn2, RUNR) as in Fig. 37.Reference4-20 mAStartFig. 37 Wiring+0VX35.3.2 Switch on the mainsOnce the mains is switched on, the internal fan in the ACdrive will run for 5 seconds.X11234567891011X2313233515212131415161718192021224142435.3.3 Set the Motor DataEnter correct motor data for the connected motor. Themotor data is used in the calculation of complete operationaldata in the AC drive.Change settings using the keys on the control panel. Forfurther information about the control panel and menustructure, see the chapter 9. page 49.Menu [100], “Preferred View” is displayed when started.1. Press NEXT to display menu [200], “Main Setup”.2. Press and then NEXT to display menu [220], “MotorData”.3. Press to display menu [221] and set motor voltage.4. Change the value using the and keys. Confirmwith .5. Set motor frequency [222].6. Set motor power [223].7. Set motor current [224].8. Set motor speed [225].9. Set power factor (cos ) [227].10. Select supply voltage level used [21B]11. [229] Motor ID run: Choose Short, confirm withand give start command .The AC drive will now measure some motor parameters.The motor makes some beeping sounds but the shaftdoes not rotate. When the ID run is finished after aboutone minute ("Test Run OK!" is displayed), press tocontinue.12. Use AnIn1 as input for the reference value. The defaultrange is 4-20 mA. If you need a 0-10 V reference value,change switch (S1) on control board.13. Switch off power supply.14. Connect digital and analogue inputs/outputs as inFig. 37.15. Ready!16. Switch on power supply.5.3.4 Run the AC driveNow the installation is finished, and you can press theexternal start button to start the motor.When the motor is running the main connections are OK.34 Getting Started CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

5.4 Local controlManual control via the control panel can be used to carryout a test run.Use a 400 V motor and the control panel.5.4.1 Switch on the mainsOnce the mains is switched on, the AC drive is started andthe internal fan will run for 5 seconds.5.4.2 Select manual controlMenu [100], “Preferred View” is displayed when started.1. Press to display menu [200], “Main Setup”.NEXT2. Press to display menu [210], “Operation”.3. Press to display menu [211], “Language”.4. Press to display menu [214], “Reference Control”.NEXT5. Select Keyboard using the key and press toconfirm.6. Press to get to menu [215], “Run/Stop Control”.NEXT7. Select Keyboard using the key and press toconfirm.8. Press to get to previous menu level and then toESCNEXTdisplay menu [220], “Motor Data”.5.4.3 Set the Motor DataEnter correct motor data for the connected motor.9. Press to display menu [221].10. Change the value using the and keys. Confirmwith .11. Press NEXT to display menu [222].12. Repeat step 9 and 10 until all motor data is entered.13. Press ESC twice and then to display menu [100],Preferred View.5.4.4 Enter a Reference ValueEnter a reference value.14. Press until menu [300], “Process” is displayed.NEXT15. Press to display menu [310], “Set/View reference”value.16. Use the and keys to enter, for example, 300rpm. We select a low value to check the rotationdirection without damaging the application.5.4.5 Run the AC drivePress the key on the control panel to run the motorforward.If the motor is running the main connections are OK.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Getting Started 35

36 Getting Started CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

6. ApplicationsThis chapter contains tables giving an overview of many differentapplications/duties in which it is suitable to use ACdrives from CG Drives & Automation. Further on you willfind application examples of the most common applicationsand solutions.6.1 Application overview6.1.1CranesChallenge Emotron VFX solution MenuStarting with heavy load is difficult and risky. Canlead to jerks causing swinging load.Jerky movements can cause load to be dropped,jeopardizing safety of people and goods.Direct torque control, fast motor premagnetizationand precise brake control givesinstant yet soft start with heavy load.Deviation control immediately detects loadchange. Signals to parallel safety system toactivate mechanical brakes.331–338, 339, 3513AB, 3ACCrane is driven slowly when returning empty or withlight load. Valuable time is lost.Speed can be increased by field weakening. 343, 3AA, 3AD, 713Braking with heavy load is difficult and risky. Canlead to jerks causing swinging load.Operator starts braking long before end position toavoid jerks. Valuable time is lost.Direct torque control and vector brake graduallyreduce speed to zero before mechanical brake isactivated.System automatically stops crane at endposition. Operator can safely drive at full speed.213, 33E,33F, 33G3A2–3AA6.1.2CrushersChallenge Emotron VFX solution MenuHigh start currents require larger fuses and cables,or for mobile crushers larger diesel generators.Difficult to start with heavy load.Material that could cause damage gets into thecrusher.Process inefficiency due to e.g. broken feeder orworn jaw. Wasted energy, mechanical stress, andrisk of process failure.Direct torque control reduces start current. Samefuses as those for the motor, or smallergenerator.Possible to boost torque at start to overcomeinitial torque peak.Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation.Warning is sent or safety stop activated.Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviationfrom normal load. Warning is sent or safety stopactivated.331-338, 351351–353411–41C9411–41B, 41C1–41C9CG Drives & Automation, 01--5326-01r1 Applications 37

6.1.3MillsChallenge Emotron VFX solution MenuHigh start currents require larger fuses and cables.Cause stress on equipment and higher energy cost.Difficult to start with heavy load.Material that could cause damage gets into themill.Process inefficiency due to broken or worn equipment.Energy wasted and risk of process failure.Direct torque control reduces start current. Samefuses can be used as those required for themotor.Possible to boost torque at start to overcomeinitial torque peak.Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation.Warning is sent or safety stop activated.Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation.Warning is sent or safety stop activated.331-338, 350351–353411–41C9411–41B, 41C1–41C96.1.4MixersChallenge Emotron VFX solution MenuHigh start currents require larger fuses and cables.Cause stress on equipment and higher energy cost.Difficult to determine when mixing process is ready.Process inefficiency due to e.g. a damaged or brokenblade. Energy wasted and risk of processfailure.Direct torque control reduces start current. Samefuses can be used as those required for themotor.Built-in shaft power monitor determines whenviscosity is right.Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation.Warning is sent or safety stop activated.331-338, 350411–41B411–41B, 41C1 –41C938 Applications CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

7. Main FeaturesThis chapter contains descriptions of the main features ofthe AC drive.7.1 Parameter setsOnly valid if the option HCP - Handheld Control Panel isused.Parameter sets are used if an application requires differentsettings for different modes. For example, a machine can beused for producing different products and thus requires twoor more maximum speeds and acceleration/decelerationtimes. With the four parameter sets different control optionscan be configured with respect to quickly changing thebehaviour of the AC drive. It is possible to adapt the ACdrive online to altered machine behaviour. This is based onthe fact that at any desired moment any one of the fourparameter sets can be activated during Run or Stop, via thedigital inputs or the control panel and menu [241].Each parameter set can be selected externally via a digitalinput. Parameter sets can be changed during operation andstored in the control panel.NOTE: The only data not included in the parameter set isMotor data 1-4, (entered separately), language,communication settings, selected set, local remote, andkeyboard locked.Define parameter setsWhen using parameter sets you first decide how to selectdifferent parameter sets. The parameter sets can be selectedvia the control panel, via digital inputs or via serialcommunication. All digital inputs and virtual inputs can beconfigured to select parameter set. The function of thedigital inputs is defined in the menu [520].Fig. 38 shows the way the parameter sets are activated viaany digital input configured to Set Ctrl 1 or Set Ctrl 2.Fig. 38 Selecting the parameter setsSelect and copy parameter setThe parameter set selection is done in menu [241], “SelectSet”. First select the main set in menu [241], normally A.Adjust all settings for the application. Usually mostparameters are common and therefore it saves a lot of workby copying set A>B in menu [242]. When parameter set A iscopied to set B you only change the parameters in the setthat need to be changed. Repeat for C and D if used.With menu [242], Copy Set, it is easy to copy the completecontents of a single parameter set to another parameter set.If, for example, the parameter sets are selected via digitalinputs, DigIn 3 is set to Set Ctrl 1 in menu [523] and DigIn4 is set to Set Ctrl 2 in menu [524], they are activated as inTable 16.Activate the parameter changes via digital input by settingmenu [241], “Select Set” to DigIn.Table 1611 +24 V10 Set Ctrl116 Set Ctrl2Parameter set{Parameter Set ARun/Stop--Torques--Controllers--Limits/Prot.--Max AlarmSet BSet CSet D(NG06-F03_1)Parameter set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2A 0 0B 1 0C 0 1D 1 1NOTE: The selection via the digital inputs is immediatelyactivated. The new parameter settings will be activatedon-line, also during Run.NOTE: The default parameter set is parameter set A.CG Drives & Automation, 01--5326-01r1 Main Features 39

ExamplesDifferent parameter sets can be used to easily change thesetup of a AC drive to adapt quickly to different applicationrequirements. For example when• a process needs optimized settings in different stages ofthe process, to- increase the process quality- increase control accuracy- lower maintenance costs- increase operator safetyWith these settings a large number of options are available.Some ideas are given here:Multi frequency selectionWithin a single parameter set the 7 preset references can beselected via the digital inputs. In combination with theparameter sets, 28 preset references can be selected using all5 digital inputs: DigIn1, 2 and 3 for selecting presetreference within one parameter set and DigIn 4 and DigIn 5for selecting the parameter sets.Bottling machine with 3 different productsUse 3 parameter sets for 3 different Jog reference speedswhen the machine needs to be set up. The 4th parameter setcan be used for “normal” remote control when the machineis running at full production.Product changing on winding machinesIf a machine has to change between 2 or 3 different productse.g. winding machine with different gauges of thread, it isimportant that acceleration, deceleration times, Max Speedand Max Torque are adapted. For each thread size a differentparameter set can be used.Manual - automatic controlIf in an application something is filled up manually and thenthe level is automatically controlled using PID regulation,this is solved using one parameter set for the manual controland one for the automatic control.7.1.1 One motor and one parametersetThis is the most common application for pumps and fans.Once default motor M1 and parameter set A have beenselected:1. Enter the settings for motor data.2. Enter the settings for other parameters e.g. inputs andoutputs7.1.2 One motor and two parametersetsThis application is useful if you for example have a machinerunning at two different speeds for different products.Once default motor M1 is selected:1. Select parameter set A in menu [241].2. Enter motor data in menu [220].3. Enter the settings for other parameters e.g. inputs andoutputs.4. If there are only minor differences between the settingsin the parameter sets, you can copy parameter set A toparameter set B, menu [242].5. Enter the settings for parameters e.g. inputs and outputs.Note: Do not change motor data in parameter set B.7.1.3 Two motors and two parametersetsThis is useful if you have a machine with two motors thatcan not run at the same time, such as a cable windingmachine that lifts up the reel with one motor and then turnsthe wheel with the other motor.One motor must stop before changing to an other motor.1. Select parameter set A in menu [241].2. Select motor M1 in menu [212].3. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters e.g.inputs and outputs.4. Select parameter set B in menu [241].5. Select M2 in menu [212].6. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters e.g.inputs and outputs.7.1.4 Autoreset at tripFor several non-critical application-related failureconditions, it is possible to automatically generate a resetcommand to overcome the fault condition. The selectioncan be made in menu [250]. In this menu the maximumnumber of automatically generated restarts allowed can beset, see menu [251], after this the AC drive will stay in faultcondition because external assistance is required.40 Main Features CG Drives & Automation, 01--5326-01r1

ExampleThe motor is protected by an internal protection for thermaloverload. When this protection is activated, the AC driveshould wait until the motor is cooled down enough beforeresuming normal operation. When this problem occursthree times in a short period of time, external assistance isrequired.The following settings should be applied:• Insert maximum number of restarts; set menu [251] to3.• Activate Motor I 2 t to be automatically reset; set menu[25A] to 300 s.• Set relay 1, menu [551] to “AutoRst Trip”; a signal willbe available when the maximum number of restarts isreached and the AC drive stays in fault condition.• The reset input must be constantly activated.7.1.5 Reference priorityThe active speed reference signal can be programmed fromseveral sources and functions. The table below shows thepriority of the different functions with regards to the speedreference.Table 17JogModeReference priorityPresetReferenceMotor PotRef. SignalOn/Off On/Off On/Off Option cardsOn On/Off On/Off Jog RefOff On On/Off Preset RefOff Off On Motor pot commands7.1.6 Preset referencesThe AC drive is able to select fixed speeds via the control ofdigital inputs. This can be used for situations where therequired motor speed needs to be adapted to fixed values,according to certain process conditions. Up to 7 presetreferences can be set for each parameter set, which can beselected via all digital inputs that are set to Preset Ctrl1,Preset Ctrl2 or Preset Ctrl3. The amount digital inputs usedthat are set to Preset Ctrl determines the number of PresetReferences available; using 1 input gives 1 speed, using 2inputs gives 3 speeds and using 3 inputs gives 7 speeds.ExampleThe use of four fixed speeds, at 50 / 100 / 300 / 800 rpm,requires the following settings:• Set DigIn 5 as first selection input; set [525] to PresetCtrl1.• Set DigIn 6 as second selection input; set [526] to PresetCtrl2.• Set menu [341] “Min Speed” to 50 rpm.• Set menu [362] “Preset Ref 1” to 100 rpm.• Set menu [363] “Preset Ref 2” to 300 rpm.• Set menu [364] “Preset Ref 3” to 800 rpm.With these settings, the AC drive switched on and a RUNcommand given, the speed will be:• 50 rpm, when both DigIn 5 and DigIn 6 are low.• 100 rpm, when DigIn 5 is high and DigIn 6 is low.• 300 rpm, when DigIn 5 is low and DigIn 6 is high.• 800 rpm, when both DigIn 5 and DigIn 6 are high.CG Drives & Automation, 01--5326-01r1 Main Features 41

7.2 Remote control functionsOperation of the Run/Stop/Enable/Reset functionsAs default, all the run/stop/reset related commands areprogrammed for remote operation via the inputs on theterminal strip (terminals 1-22) on the control board. Withthe function “Run/Stp Ctrl” [215] and “Reset Control”[216], this can be selected for keyboard or serial communicationcontrol.NOTE: The examples in this paragraph do not cover allpossibilities. Only the most relevant combinations aregiven. The starting point is always the default setting(factory) of the AC drive.Default settings of the Run/Stop/Enable/Reset functionsThe default settings are shown in Fig. 39. In this examplethe AC drive is started and stopped with DigIn 2 and a resetafter trip can be given with DigIn 8.RunRReset+24 VX112345678910111213141516171819202122Enable and Stop functionsBoth functions can be used separately or simultaneously.The choice of which function is to be used depends on theapplication and the control mode of the inputs (Level/Edge[21A]).NOTE: In Edge mode, at least one digital input must beprogrammed to “stop”, because the Run commands areonly able to start the AC drive.EnableInput must be active (HI) to allow any Run signal. If theinput is made LOW, the output of the AC drive isimmediately disabled and the motor will coast.!CAUTION!If the Enable function is not programmed to adigital input, it is considered to be activeinternally.StopIf the input is low then the AC drive will stop according tothe selected stop mode set in menu [33B] “Stop Mode”. Fig.40 shows the function of the Enable and the Stop input andthe Stop Mode=Decel [33B].To run the input must be high.NOTE: Stop Mode=Coast [33B] will give the samebehaviour as the Enable input.STOP(STOP=DECEL)Fig. 39 Default setting Run/Reset commandsThe inputs are default set for level-control. The rotation isdetermined by the setting of the digital inputs.XOUTPUTSPEEDtENABLEOUTPUTSPEED(06-F104_NG)(or if Spinstart is selected)tFig. 40 Functionality of the Stop and Enable input42 Main Features CG Drives & Automation, 01--5326-01r1

Reset and Autoreset operationIf the AC drive is in Stop Mode due to a trip condition, theAC drive can be remotely reset by a pulse (“low” to “high”transition) on the Reset input, default on DigIn 8.Depending on the selected control method, a restart takesplace as follows:Level-controlIf the Run inputs remain in their position the AC drive willstart immediately after the Reset command is given.Edge-controlAfter the Reset command is given a new Run commandmust be applied to start the AC drive again.Autoreset is enabled if the Reset input is continuously active.The Autoreset functions are programmed in menu “Autoreset[240]”.NOTE: If the control commands are programmed forKeyboard control or Com, Autoreset is not possible.INPUTSENABLESTOPRUN RRUN LOUTPUTSTATUSRight rotationLeft rotationStandstill(06-F103new_1)Run Inputs Level-controlled.The inputs are set as default for level-control. This meansthat an input is activated by making the input continuously“High”. This method is commonly used if, for example,PLCs are used to operate the AC drive.!CAUTION!Level-controlled inputs DO NOT comply with theMachine Directive, if the inputs are directlyused to start and stop the machine.The examples given in this and the following paragraphsfollow the input selection shown in Fig. 41.StopRunLRunREnableReset+24 VX112345678910111213141516171819202122Fig. 42 Input and output status for level-controlRun Inputs Edge-controlledMenu “[21A] Start signal” Level/Edge must be set to Edgeto activate edge control. This means that an input is activatedby a “low” to “high” transition or vice versa.NOTE: Edge-controlled inputs comply with the MachineDirective (see Chapter 8. page 47), if the inputs aredirectly used for starting and stopping the machine.See Fig. 41. The Enable and Stop input must be activecontinuously in order to accept any run-right or run-leftcommand. The last edge (RunR or RunL) is valid. Fig. 43gives an example of a possible sequence.Fig. 41 Example of wiring for Run/Stop/Enable/Reset inputsThe Enable input must be continuously active in order toaccept any run-right or run-left command. If both RunRand RunL inputs are active, then the AC drive stopsaccording to the selected Stop Mode. Fig. 42 gives anexample of a possible sequence.CG Drives & Automation, 01--5326-01r1 Main Features 43

INPUTSENABLESTOPRUN RRUN L7.3 Performing anIdentification RunTo get the optimum performance out of your AC drive/motor combination, the AC drive must measure theelectrical parameters (resistance of stator winding, etc.) ofthe connected motor. See menu [269] “Motor ID-Run”.It is recommended that the extended ID run is used beforethe motor is installed in the application.If this is not possible, the short ID run should be used.OUTPUTSTATUSWARNING!During the extended ID RUN, the motor shaftwill rotate. Take safety measures to avoidunforeseen dangerous situations.Right rotationLeft rotationStandstillFig. 43 Input and output status for edge-control(06-F94new_1)7.4 Using the Control PanelMemoryData can be copied from the AC drive to the memory in thecontrol panel and vice versa. To copy all data (includingparameter set A-D and motor data) from the AC drive to thecontrol panel, select Copy to CP[234], Copy to CP.To copy data from the control panel to the AC drive, enterthe menu [235], Load from CP and select what you want tocopy.The memory in the control panel is useful in applicationswith AC drives without a control panel and in applicationswhere several AC drives have the same setup. It can also beused for temporary storage of settings. Use a control panel toupload the settings from one AC drive and then move thecontrol panel to another AC drive and download the settings.NOTE: Load from and copy to the AC drive is onlypossible when the AC drive is in stop mode.44 Main Features CG Drives & Automation, 01--5326-01r1

AC driveFig. 44 Copy and load parameters between AC drive andcontrol panel7.5 Load Monitor and ProcessProtection [400]7.5.1 Load Monitor [410]The monitor functions enable the AC drive to be used as aload monitor. Load monitors are used to protect machinesand processes against mechanical overload and underload,such as a conveyer belt or screw conveyer jamming, beltfailure on a fan or a pump dry running. The load ismeasured in the AC drive by the calculated motor shafttorque. There is an overload alarm (Max Alarm and MaxPre-Alarm) and an underload alarm (Min Alarm and MinPre-Alarm).The Basic Monitor type uses fixed levels for overload andunderload (pre-)alarms over the whole speed range. Thisfunction can be used in constant load applications where thetorque is not dependent on the speed, e.g. conveyor belt,displacement pump, screw pump, etc.For applications with a torque that is dependent on thespeed, the Load Curve monitor type is preferred. Bymeasuring the actual load curve of the process,characteristically over the range of minimum speed tomaximum speed, an accurate protection at any speed can beestablished.The max and min alarm can be set for a trip condition. Thepre-alarms act as a warning condition. All the alarms can bemonitored on the digital or relay outputs.The autoset function automatically sets the 4 alarm levelswhilst running: maximum alarm, maximum pre-alarm,minimum alarm and minimum pre-alarm.Fig. 45 gives an example of the monitor functions forconstant torque applicationsCG Drives & Automation, 01--5326-01r1 Main Features 45

.Torque [%][4161] MaxAlarmMar (15%)[4171] MaxPreAlMar (10%)[41B]100%Default: T NOM orAutoset: T MOMENTARY[4181] MinPreAlMar (10%)[4191] MinAlarmMar (15%)Max AlarmMax PreAlarmMin AlarmMin PreAlarmRamp-up phase[413] Ramp Alarm=On[411] Alarm Select=Max or Max+Min[4162] MaxAlarmDel (0.1s)[4172] MaxPreAlDel (0.1s)[414] Start Delay (0.2s)Stationary phaseStationary phaseRamp-down phase[413] Ramp Alarm=On or Off[413] Ramp Alarm=On or Off [413] Ramp Alarm=On[411] Alarm Select=Max or Max+Min [411] Alarm Select=Max or Max+Min [411] Alarm Select=Max or Max+Min[4162] MaxAlarmDel (0.1s)t [s][4172] MaxPreAlDel (0.1s)Must be

8. EMC and standards8.1 EMC standardsThe AC drive complies with the following standards:EN(IEC)61800-3:2004 Adjustable speed electronic powerdrive systems, part 3, EMC product standards:Standard: category C3, for systems of rated supply voltage

48 EMC and standards CG Drives & Automation, 01-26-01r1

9. Operation via the Control PanelThis chapter describes how to use the control panel. The ACdrive can be delivered with a control panel or a blank panel.-9.1 GeneralThe control panel displays the status of the AC drive and isused to set all the parameters. It is also possible to controlthe motor directly from the control panel. The control panelcan be built-in or located externally via serialcommunication. The AC drive can be ordered without thecontrol panel. Instead of the control panel there will be ablank panel.NOTE: The AC drive can run without the control panelbeing connected. However the settings must be suchthat all control signals are set for external use.9.2 The control panelFig. 46 Control panelLC DisplayLEDsControl KeysToggle KeyFunction Keys9.2.1 The displayThe display is back lit and consists of 2 rows, each withspace for 16 characters. The display is divided into six areas.The different areas in the display are described below:A221TMotor VoltStpAM1: 400VDBEFig. 47 The displayCFArea A: Shows the actual menu number (3 or 4digits).Area B Shows if the menu is in the toggle loop or theAC drive is set for Local operation.Area C: Shows the heading of the active menu.Area D: Shows the status of the AC drive (3 digits).The following status indications are possible:Acc : AccelerationDec : DecelerationI 2 t : Active I 2 t protectionRun : Motor runsTrp : TrippedStp : Motor is stoppedVL : Operating at Voltage limitslp : Sleep modeSL : Operating at Speed limitCL : Operating at Current limitTL : Operating at Torque limitOT : Operating at Temperature LimitLV : Operating at Low VoltageSby : Operating from Standby power supplySST : Operating Safe Stop, is flashing whenactivatedLCL : Operating with low cooling liquid levelArea E: Shows active parameter set and if it is a motorparameter.Area F: Shows the setting or selection in the active menu.This area is empty at the 1st level and 2nd levelmenu. This area also shows warnings and alarmmessages. In some situations this area couldindicate“+++” or ” - - -” please see further information inchapter 9.2.2 page 50CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1Operation via the Control Panel 49

300 ProcessStpA9.2.3 LED indicatorsThe symbols on the control panel have the followingfunctions:Fig. 48 Example 1st level menu220 Motor DataStpAFig. 49 Example 2nd level menu221 Motor VoltStp M1: 400VARunGreenFig. 52 LED indicationsTable 18SymbolLED indicationTripRedFunctionPowerGreenON FLASHING OFFFig. 50 Example 3d level menuPOWER(green)Power on ---------------- Power off4161MaxAlarm MarStp 15%AFig. 51 Example 4th level menu9.2.2 Indications on the displayThe display can indicate “+++” or “- - -” if a parameter is outof range. In the AC drive there are parameters which aredependent on other parameters. For example, if the speedreference is 500 and the maximum speed value is set to avalue below 500, this will be indicated with “+++” on thedisplay. If the minimum speed value is set over 500, “- - -”is displayed.TRIP (red)RUN(green)AC drivetrippedMotor shaftrotatesWarning/LimitMotor speedincrease/decreaseNo tripMotorstopped9.2.4 Control keysThe control keys are used to give the Run, Stop or Resetcommands directly. As default these keys are disabled, set forremote control. Activate the control keys by selectingKeyboard in the menus “Ref Control [214]”,“Run/Stop Control [215]” and “Reset Ctrl [216]”.If the Enable function is programmed on one of the digitalinputs, this input must be active to allow Run/Stopcommands from the control panel.Table 19Control keysRUN L:gives a start withleft rotationSTOP/RESET:stops the motor or resetsthe AC drive after a tripRUN R:gives a start withright rotationNOTE: It is not possible to simultaneously activate theRun/Stop commands from the keyboard and remotelyfrom the terminal strip (terminals 1-22). Exception is theJOG-function which can give start command, see “JogSpeed [348]” on page 10550 Operation via the Control Panel CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

9.2.5 The Toggle and Loc/Rem KeyThis key has two functions: Toggle andswitching between Loc/Rem function.Press one second to use the toggle functionPress and hold the toggle key for more thanfive seconds to switch between Local and Remote function,depending on the settings in [2171] and [2172].When editing values, the toggle key can be used to changethe sign of the value, see section 9.5, page 53.100213212Sub menusNEXTToggle functionUsing the toggle function makes it possible to easily stepthrough selected menus in a loop. The toggle loop cancontain a maximum of ten menus. As default the toggle loopcontains the menus needed for Quick Setup. You can use thetoggle loop to create a quick-menu for the parameters thatare most importance to your specific application.511 Toggle loop 211341221331222Sub menusNOTE: Do not keep the Toggle key pressed for more thanfive seconds without pressing either the +, - or Esc key,as this may activate the Loc/Rem function of this keyinstead. See menu [217].Add a menu to the toggle loop1. Go to the menu you want to add to the loop.2. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressingthe + key.Delete a menu from the toggle loop1. Go to the menu you want to delete using the toggle key.2. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressingthe - key.Delete all menus from the toggle loop1. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressingthe Esc key.2. Confirm with Enter.Default toggle loopFig. 53 shows the default toggle loop. This loop contains thenecessary menus that need to be set before starting. PressToggle to enter menu [211] then use the Next key to enterthe sub menus [212] to [21A] and enter the parameters.When you press the Toggle key again, menu [221] isdisplayed.Fig. 53 Default toggle loopIndication of menus in toggle loopMenus included in the toggle loop are indicated with ain area B in the display.Loc/Rem functionThe Loc/Rem function of this key is disabled as default.Enable the function in menu [2171] and/or [2172].With the function Loc/Rem you can change between localand remote control of the AC drive from the control panel.The function Loc/Rem can also be changed via the DigIn,see menu “Digital inputs [520]”.Change control mode1. Press the Loc/Rem key for five seconds, until Local? orRemote? is displayed.2. Confirm with Enter.3. Cancel with Esc.NEXT228Local modeLocal mode is used for temporary operation. When switchedto LOCAL operation, the AC drive is controlled via thedefined Local operation mode, i.e. [2171] and [2172]. Theactual status of the AC drive will not change, e.g. Run/Stopconditions and the actual speed will remain exactly thesame. When the AC drive is set to Local operation, thedisplay will show in area B in the display.LTCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1Operation via the Control Panel 51

Remote modeWhen the AC drive is switched to REMOTE operation, theAC drive will be controlled according to selected controlmethods in the menu’s “Reference Control [214]”, “Run/Stop Control [215]” and “Reset Control [216]”.To monitor the actual Local or Remote status of the ACdrive control, a “Loc/Rem” signal is available on theDigital Outputs or Relays. When the AC drive is set toLocal, the signal on the DigOut or Relay will be active/high,in Remote the signal will be inactive/low. See menu “DigitalOutputs [540]” and “Relays [550]”.This structure is consequently independent of the numberof menus per level.For instance, a menu can have one selectable menu (Set/View Reference Value [310]), or it can have 17 selectablemenus (menu Speeds [340]).NOTE: If there are more than 10 menus within one level,the numbering continues in alphabetic order.9.2.6 Function keysThe function keys operate the menus and are also used forprogramming and read-outs of all the menu settings.Table 20Function keysENTER key:- step to a lower menulevel- confirm a changedsettingESCNEXTFig. 54 Menu structure9.3 The menu structureThe menu structure consists of 4 levels:Main Menu1st level2nd level3rd level4th levelESCAPE key:PREVIOUS key:NEXT key:- key:+ key:- step to a highermenu level- ignore a changedsetting, withoutconfirming- step to a previousmenu within the samelevel- go to more significantdigit in edit mode- step to a next menuwithin the same level- go to less significantdigit in edit mode- decrease a value- change a selection- increase a value- change a selectionThe first character in the menu number.The second character in the menu number.The third character in the menu number.The fourth character in the menu number.41614162Fig. 55 Menu structureNG_06-F289.3.1 The main menuThis section gives you a short description of the functions inthe Main Menu.100 Preferred ViewDisplayed at power-up. It displays the actual process value asdefault. Programmable for many other read-outs.200 Main SetupMain settings to get the AC drive operable. The motor datasettings are the most important. Also option utility andsettings.300 Process and Application ParametersSettings more relevant to the application such as ReferenceSpeed, torque limitations, PID control settings, etc.400 Shaft Power Monitor and ProcessProtectionThe monitor function enables the AC drive to be used as aload monitor to protect machines and processes againstmechanical overload and underload.52 Operation via the Control Panel CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

500 Inputs/Outputs and VirtualConnectionsAll settings for inputs and outputs are entered here.600 Logical Functions and TimersAll settings for conditional signals are entered here.700 View Operation and StatusViewing all the operational data like frequency, load, power,current, etc.800 View Trip LogViewing the last 10 trips in the trip memory.900 Service Information and AC drive DataElectronic type label for viewing the software version andAC drive type.9.4 Programming duringoperationMost of the parameters can be changed during operationwithout stopping the AC drive. Parameters that can not bechanged are marked with a lock symbol in the display.NOTE: If you try to change a function during operationthat only can be changed when the motor is stopped, themessage “Stop First” is displayed.9.5 Editing values in a menuMost values in the second row in a menu can be changed intwo different ways. Enumerated values like the baud rate canonly be changed with alternative 1.Alternative 2Press the + or - key to enter edit mode. Then press the Prevor Next key to move the cursor to the right most position ofthe value that should be changed. The cursor will make theselected character flashes. Move the cursor using the Prev orNext keys. When you press the + or - keys, the character atthe cursor position will increase or decrease. This alternativeis suitable when you want to make large changes, i.e. from 2s to 400 s.To change the sign of the value, press the toggle key. Thismakes it possible to enter negative values (Only valid forcertain parameters).Example: When you press Next the 4 will flash.331 Acc TimeStpA4.00sFlashingPress Enter to save the setting and Esc to leave the editmode.9.6 Copy current parameter toall setsWhen a parameter is displayed, press the Enter key for5 seconds. Now the text To all sets? is displayed. Press Enterto copy the setting for current parameter to all sets.2621 BaudrateStp 38400Alternative 1When you press the + or - keys to change a value, the cursoris flashing to the left in the display and the value is increasedor decreased when you press the appropriate key. If you keepthe + or - keys pressed, the value will increase or decreasecontinuously. When you keep the key pressed the changespeed will increase. The Toggle key is used to change thesign of the entered value. The sign of the value will alsochange when zero is passed. Press Enter to confirm the value.331 Acc TimeStp A 2.00sFlashingCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1Operation via the Control Panel 53

9.7 Programming exampleThis example shows how to program a change of the Acc.Time set from 2.0 s to 4.0 s.The flashing cursor indicates that a change has taken placebut is not saved yet. If at this moment, the power fails, thechange will not be saved.Use the ESC, Prev, Next or the Toggle keys to proceed andto go to other menus.100 0rpmStp A 0.0ANEXT200 MAIN SETUPStpAMenu 100 appearsafter power-up.Press Next for menu[200].NEXT300 ProcessStpAPress Next for menu[300].310 Set/View RefStpAPress Enter for menu[310].NEXT330 Run/StopStpAPress Next two timesfor menu [330].331 Acc TimeStpA2.00sPress Enter for menu[331].331 Acc TimeStp A 2.00sFlashingKeep key presseduntil desired value hasbeen reached.331 Acc TimeStpA4.00sFig. 56 Programming exampleSave the changedvalue by pressingEnter.54 Operation via the Control Panel CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

10. Serial communicationThe AC drive provides possibility for different types of serialcommunication.• Modbus RTU via RS232/485• Fieldbuses as Profibus DP and DeviceNet• Industrial Ethernet as Modbus/TCP, Profinet IO andEtherCAT10.1 Modbus RTUThe AC drive has an asynchronous serial communicationinterface behind the control panel. It is also possible to usethe isolated RS232/485 option board (if installed).The protocol used for data exchange is based on the ModbusRTU protocol, originally developed by Modicon. Thephysical connection is RS232. The AC drive acts as a slavewith address 1 in a master-slave configuration. Thecommunication is half-duplex. It has a standard non returnzero (NRZ) format.The baud rate is fixed to 9600 (Control panel RS232 port).The character frame format (always 11 bits) has:• one start bit• eight data bits• two stop bits• no parityIt is possible to temporarily connect a personal computerwith for example the software EmoSoftCom (programmingand monitoring software) to the RS232 connector on thecontrol panel . This can be useful when copying parametersbetween AC drives etc. For permanent connection of apersonal computer you have to use one of thecommunication option boards.NOTE: This RS232 port is not isolated.WARNING!Correct and safe use of a RS232 connectiondepends on the ground pins of both portsbeing the same potential. Problems canoccur when connecting two ports of e.g. machinery andcomputers where both ground pins are not the samepotential. This may cause hazardous ground loops thatcan destroy the RS232 ports.Fig. 57 RS232 connector behind the control panel10.2 Parameter setsCommunication information for the different parametersets.The different parameter sets in the AC drive have thefollowing DeviceNet instance numbers, Profibus slot/indexnumbers, Profinet IO index and EtherCAT index numbers:ABCDParam.setModbus/DeviceNetInstancenumber43001–4389944001–4489945001–4589946001–46899ProfibusSlot/Index168/160 to172/38172/140 to176/18176/120 to179/253180/100 to183/233Profinet IOindex19385 -2028320385 -2128321385 -2228322385 -23283EtherCATindex(hex)4bb9 - 4f3b4fa1 - 53235389 - 57065771 - 5af3Parameter set A contains parameters 43001 to 43899. Theparameter sets B, C and D contains the same type ofinformation. For example parameter 43123 in parameter setA contain the same type of information as 44123 inparameter set B.The control panel RS232 connection is not galvanicallyisolated.The RS232/485 option board from CG Drives &Automation is galvanically isolated.Note that the control panel RS232 connection cansafely be used in combination with commercial availableisolated USB to RS232 converters.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Serial communication 55

10.3 Motor dataCommunication information for the different motors.MotorM1M2M3M4Modbus/DeviceNetInstancenumber43041–4304844041–4404845041–4504846041–46048ProfibusSlot/Index168/200to168/207172/180to174/187176/160to176/167180/140to180/147Profinet IOindex19425 -1943220425 -2043221425 -2143222425 -22432EtherCATindex(hex)4be1 - 4be84fc9 - 4fd053b1 - 53b85799 - 57a0M1 contains parameters 43041 to 43048. The M2, M3, andM4 contains the same type of information. For exampleparameter 43043 in motor M1 contain the same type ofinformation as 44043 in M2.10.4 Start and stop commandsSet start and stop commands via serial communication.Modbus/DeviceNetInstance number42901 Reset4290242903 RunR42904 RunLFunctionRun, active together with eitherRunR or RunL toperform start.Note! Bipolar reference mode is activated if both RunRand RunL is active.10.5 Reference signalWhen menu “Reference Control [214 ]” is set to “Com” thefollowing parameter data should be used:Default 0Range -16384 to 16384Corresponding to-100% to 100% refCommunication informationModbus /DeviceNet Instance number 42905Profibus slot /Index 168/64EtherCAT index (hex)4b59Profinet IO index 19289Fieldbus formatIntModbus formatInt10.5.1 Process valueIt is also possible to send the Process value feedbacksignal over a bus (e.g. from a process or temperature sensor)for use with PID Process controller [380].Set menu “Process Source [321 ]” to F(Bus). Use followingparameter data for the process value:Default 0Range -16384 to 16384Corresponding toCommunication informationModbus /DeviceNet Instance number 42906Profibus slot /Index 168/65EtherCAT index (hex)4b5aProfinet IO index 19290Fieldbus formatIntModbus formatInt-100% to 100% process valueExample:(See Emotron Fielbus manual for detailed information)We would like to control the AC drive over a bus systemusing the first two bytes of the Basic Control Message bysetting menu “[2661 ] FB Signal 1” to 49972. Further, wealso want to transmit a 16 bit signed reference and a 16 bitprocess value. This is done by setting menu“[2662 ] FB Signal 2” to 42905 and menu “[2663 ] FBSignal 3” to 42906.NOTE! It is possible to view the transmitted processvalue in control panel menu Operation [710 ]. Thepresented value is depending on settings in menus“Process Min [324 ]” and “Process Max [325 ]”.56 Serial communication CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

10.6 Description of the EIntformatsA parameter with Eint format can be represented in twodifferent formats (F). Either as a 15 bit unsigned integerformat (F= 0) or a Emotron floating point format (F=1).The most significant bit (B15) indicates the format used.See detailed description below.All parameters written to a register may be rounded to thenumber of significant digits used in the internal system.The matrix below describes the contents of the 16-bit wordfor the two different EInt formats:B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0F=1 e3 e2 e1 e0 m10 m9 m8 m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0F=0 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0If the format bit (B15) is 0, then all bits may be treated as astandard unsigned integer (UInt)If the format bit is 1, then is the number interpreted as this:Value = M * 10^E, where M=m10..m0 represents atwo- complement signed mantissa and E= e3..e0 represents atwo- complement signed exponent.NOTE: Parameters with EInt format may return valuesboth as 15 bit unsigned int (F=0) or in Emotron floatingpoint (F=1).Example, resolutionIf you write the value 1004 to a register and this register has3 significant digits, it will be stored as 1000.In the Emotron floating point format (F=1), one 16-bitword is used to represent large (or very small numbers) with3 significant digits.If data is read or written as a fixed point (i.e. no decimals)number between 0-32767, the 15 bit Unsigned integerformat (F=0) may be used.Detailed description of Emotron floating pointformate3-e0 4-bit signed exponent. Gives a valuerange:-8..+7 (binary 1000 .. 0111)m10-m0 11-bit signed mantissa.Gives a valuerange:-1024..+1023 (binary10000000000..01111111111)Value Binary-8 1000-7 1001..-2 1110-1 11110 00001 00012 0010..6 01107 0111The value represented by the Emotron floating point formatis m·10e.To convert a value from the Emotron floating point formatto a floating point value, use the formula above.To convert a floating point value to the Emotron floatingpoint format, see the C-code example below.Example, floating point formatThe number 1.23 would be represented by this in Emotronfloating point format,F EEEE MMMMMMMMMMM1 1110 00001111011F=1 -> floating point format usedE=-2M=123The value is then 123x10 -2 = 1.23Example 15bit unsigned int formatThe value 72.0 can be represented as the fixed point number72. It is within the range 0-32767, which means that the15-bit fixed point format may be used.The value will then be represented as:B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0Where bit 15 indicates that we are using the fixed pointformat (F=0).A signed number should be represented as a twocomplement binary number, like below:CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Serial communication 57

Programming example:typedef struct{int m:11; // mantissa, -1024..1023int e: 4; // exponent -8..7unsigned int f: 1; // format, 1->special emoint format} eint16;//---------------------------------------------------------------------------unsigned short int float_to_eint16(float value){eint16 etmp;int dec=0;while (floor(value) != value && dec=0 && value=-1000 && value=0)etmp.m=1; // Set signelseetmp.m=-1; // Set signvalue=fabs(value);while (value>1000){etmp.e++; // increase exponentvalue=value/10;}value+=0.5; // roundetmp.m=etmp.m*value; // make signed}Rreturn (*(unsigned short int *)&etmp);}//---------------------------------------------------------------------------float eint16_to_float(unsigned short int value){float f;eint16 evalue;evalue=*(eint16 *)&value;if (evalue.f){if (evalue.e>=0)f=(int)evalue.m*pow10(evalue.e);elsef=(int)evalue.m/pow10(abs(evalue.e));}elsef=value;return f;}//---------------------------------------------------------------------------58 Serial communication CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

11. Functional DescriptionThis chapter describes the menus and parameters in thesoftware. You will find a short description of each functionand information about default values, ranges, etc. There arealso tables containing communication information. You willfind the parameter number for all available fieldbus optionsas well as the enumeration for the data.On our home page in the download area, you could find a"Communication information" list and a list to note“Parameter set” information.NOTE: Functions marked with the signchanged during Run Mode.Description of table layoutDefault:Selection orrangecannot beResolution of settingsThe resolution for all range settings described in this chapteris 3 significant digits. Exceptions are speed values which arepresented with 4 significant digits. Table 21 shows theresolutions for 3 significant digits.Table 21Integer value ofselectionDescription3 Digit Resolution0.01-9.99 0.0110.0-99.9 0.1100-999 11000-9990 1010000-99900 100Menu no. Menu nameStatus Selected value11.1 Preferred View [100]This menu is displayed at every power-up. Duringoperation, the menu [100] will automatically be displayedwhen the keyboard is not operated for 5 minutes. Theautomatic return function will be switched off when theToggle and Stop key is pressed simultaneously. As default itdisplays the reference and torque values.100 0rpmStp A0.0NmMenu “[100] Preferred View” displays the settings made inmenu “[110], 1st line”, and “[120], 2nd line”. See Fig. 58.100 (1st Line)Stp A (2nd Line)Fig. 58 Display functions11.1.1 1st Line [110]Sets the content of the upper row in the menu“[100] Preferred View.”Default:Dependent on menuProcess ValProcess Val 0 Process valueSpeed 1 SpeedTorque 2 TorqueProcess Ref 3 Process referenceShaft Power 4 Shaft powerEl Power 5 Electrical powerCurrent 6 CurrentOutput volt 7 Output voltageFrequency 8 FrequencyDC Voltage 9 DC voltageHeatsink Tmp 10 Heatsink temperatureMotor Temp * 11 Motor temperatureAC drive Status 12 AC drive statusRun Time 13 Run TimeEnergy 14 EnergyMains Time 15 Mains time110 1st LineStp Process ValA* The “Motor temp” is only visible if you have the optionPTC/PT100 card installed and a PT100 input isselected in menu[ 236].CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 59

Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43001Profibus slot/index 168/160EtherCAT index (hex)4bb9Profinet IO index 19385Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt11.1.2 2nd Line [120]Sets the content of the lower row in the menu“[100] Preferred View”. Same selection as in menu [110].Default:120 2nd LineStpTorqueCommunication informationTorqueModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43002Profibus slot/index 168/161EtherCAT index (hex)4bbaProfinet IO index 19386Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntA11.2 Main Setup [200]The Main Setup menu contains the most important settingsto get the AC drive operational and set up for theapplication. It includes different sub menus concerning thecontrol of the unit, motor data and protection, utilities andautomatic resetting of faults. This menu will instantaneouslybe adapted to build in options and show the requiredsettings.11.2.1 Operation [210]Selections concerning the used motor, AC drive mode,control signals and serial communication are described inthis submenu and is used to set the AC drive up for theapplication.Language [211]Select the language used on the LC Display. Once thelanguage is set, this selection will not be affected by the LoadDefault command.Default:EnglishEnglish 0 English selectedSvenska 1 Swedish selectedNederlands 2Dutch selectedDeutsch 3 German selectedFrançais 4 French selectedEspañol 5 Spanish selectedРуccкий 6 Russian selectedItaliano 7 Italian selectedCesky 8 Czech selectedTurkish 9 Turkish selected211 LanguageStpEnglishACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43011Profibus slot/index 168/170EtherCAT index (hex)4bc3Profinet IO index 19395Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt60 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Select Motor [212]This menu is used if you have more than one motor in yourapplication. Select the motor to define. It is possible todefine up to four different motors, M1 to M4, in the ACdrive. For parameter set handling including Motor setsM1 - M4 see Chapter 11.2.6 page 74Default:M1 0M2 1M3 2M4 3212 Select MotorStpM1M1Motor Data is connected to selectedmotor.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43012Profibus slot/index 168/171EtherCAT index (hex)4bc4Profinet IO index 19396Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntADrive Mode [213]This menu is used to set the control mode for the motor.Settings for the reference signals and read-outs is made inmenu “Process source, [321]”.• Speed Mode offers an accurate control of the motorspeed independently of the load. The Speed mode alsoincreases the accuracy of the different analogue outputsignals that are related to the motor speed. Speed modecan also be used if several motors of same type and sizeare connected in parallel. Requires all motors to bemechanically connected to the load.• Torque Mode can be selected for applications where themotor shaft torque needs to be controlled independentlyof the speed.• V/Hz Mode (output speed [712] in rpm) is used whenseveral motors in parallel of different type or size are connectedor if parallel motors are not mechanically connectedto the load.Default:Speed 0Torque 1V/Hz 2213 Drive ModeStpSpeedSpeedAThe AC drive is speed controlled.Reference given=speed reference withramp. Speed and torque limits can be set.Using “direct torque control” as motorcontrol method.The AC drive is torque controlled.Reference given=torque reference withoutramp. Speed and torque limit can be set.Using “direct torque control” as motorcontrol method.NOTE: No ramps active in the AC drive.Care must be taken.All control loops are related to frequencycontrol.NOTE: All the functions and menuread-outs with regard to speed and rpm(e.g. Max Speed = 1500 rpm, MinSpeed=0 rpm, etc.) remain speed andrpm, although they represent the outputfrequency.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43013Profibus slot/index 168/172EtherCAT index (hex)4bc5Profinet IO index 19397Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 61

Reference control [214]To control the speed of the motor, the AC drive needs areference signal. This reference signal can be controlled by aremote source from the installation, the keyboard of the ACdrive, or by serial or fieldbus communication. Select therequired reference control for the application in this menu.Default:Remote 0Keyboard 1Com 2Option 3214 Ref ControlStpRemoteARemoteThe reference signal comes from theanalogue inputs of the terminal strip(terminals 1-22).Reference is set with the + and - keys onthe Control Panel. Can only be done inmenu “Set/View reference [310]”.The reference is set via the serialcommunication (RS 485, Fieldbus.)See section 10.5, page 56 for furtherinformation.The reference is set via an option. Onlyavailable if the option can control thereference value.NOTE: If the reference is switched from Remote toKeyboard, the last remote reference value will be thedefault value for the control panel.Run/Stop Control [215]This function is used to select the source for run and stopcommands. This is described on page 103.Start/stop via analogue signals can be achieved by usingfunction “Stp

Reset Control [216]When the AC drive is stopped due to a failure, a resetcommand is required to make it possible to restart the ACdrive. Use this function to select the source of the resetsignal.Default:Remote 0Keyboard 1Com 2Remote +KeybCom +KeybRem+Keyb+Com345Option 6RemoteCommunication information216 Reset CtrlStpRemoteAThe command comes from the inputs ofthe terminal strip (terminals 1-22).The command comes from the commandkeys of the Control Panel.The command comes from the serialcommunication (RS 485, Fieldbus).The command comes from the inputs ofthe terminal strip (terminals 1-22) or thekeyboard.The command comes from the serialcommunication (RS485, Fieldbus) or thekeyboard.The command comes from the inputs ofthe terminal strip (terminals 1-22), thekeyboard or the serial communication(RS485, Fieldbus).The command comes from an option.Only available if the option can controlthe reset command.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43016Profibus slot/index 168/175EtherCAT index (hex)4bc8Profinet IO index 19400Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntLocal/Remote key function [217]The Toggle key on the keyboard, see section 9.2.5, page 51,has two functions and is activated in this menu. As defaultthe key is just set to operate as a Toggle key that moves youeasily through the menus in the toggle loop. The secondfunction of the key allows you to easily swap between Localand normal operation (set up via [214] and [215]) of the ACdrive. Local mode can also be activated via a digital input. Ifboth [2171] and [2172] is set to Standard, the function isdisabled.Default:StandardStandard 0 Local reference control set via [214]Remote 1 Local reference control via remoteKeyboard 2 Local reference control via keyboardCom 3 Local reference control via communicationCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43009Profibus slot/index 168/168EtherCAT index (hex) 4bc1Profinet IO index 19393Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntDefault:2171 LocRefCtrlStpStandardA2172 LocRunCtrlStpStandardAStandardStandard 0 Local Run/Stop control set via [215]Remote 1 Local Run/Stop control via remoteKeyboard 2 Local Run/Stop control via keyboardCom 3 Local Run/Stop control via communicationCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43010Profibus slot/index 168/169EtherCAT index (hex)4bc2Profinet IO index 19394Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 63

Lock Code? [218]To prevent the keyboard being used or to change the setupof the AC drive and/or process control, the keyboard can belocked with a password. This menu, “Lock Code [218]”, isused to lock and unlock the keyboard. Enter the password“291” to lock/unlock the keyboard operation. If thekeyboard is not locked (default) the selection “Lock Code?”will appear. If the keyboard is already locked, the selection“Unlock Code?” will appear.When the keyboard is locked, parameters can be viewed butnot changed. The reference value can be changed and theAC drive can be started, stopped and reversed if thesefunctions are set to be controlled from the keyboard.Default: 0Range: 0–9999Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43018Profibus slot/index 168/177EtherCAT index (hex)4bcaProfinet IO index 19402Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatUIntRotation [219]218 Lock Code?Stp 0AOverall limitation of motor rotation directionThis function limits the overall rotation, either to left orright or both directions. This limit is prior to all otherselections, e.g.: if the rotation is limited to right, a Run-Leftcommand will be ignored. To define left and right rotationwe assume that the motor is connected U-U, V-V and W-W.Speed Direction and RotationThe speed direction can be controlled by:• RunR/RunL commands on the control panel.• RunR/RunL commands on the terminal strip(terminals 1-22).• Via the serial interface options.• The parameter sets.Fig. 59 RotationIn this menu you set the general rotation for the motor.Default:R 1L 2219 RotationStpR + LASpeed direction is limited to rightrotation. The input and key RunL aredisabled.Speed direction is limited to left rotation.The input and key RunR are disabled.R+L 3 Both speed directions allowed.RightLeftR+LCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43019Profibus slot/index 168/178EtherCAT index (hex)4bcbProfinet IO index 19403Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt64 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

11.2.2 Remote Signal Level/Edge[21A]In this menu you select the way to control the inputs forRunR, RunL and Reset that are operated via the digitalinputs on the terminal strip. The inputs are default set forlevel-control, and will be active as long as the input is madeand kept high. When edge-control is selected, the input willbe activated by the low to high transition of the input. SeeChapter 7.2 page 42 for more information.Brake chopper activation level is adjusted using the settingof [21B].NOTE: The setting is affected by the “Load from CP”command [245] and if loading parameter file viaEmoSoftCom.21B Supply VoltsStp Not definedADefault:Level 0Edge 121A Level/EdgeStpLevelLevelAThe inputs are activated or deactivatedby a continuous high or low signal. Iscommonly used if, for example, a PLC isused to operate the AC drive.The inputs are activated by a transition;for Run and Reset from “low” to “high”and for Stop from "high" to "low".Default:Not Defined 0Not definedInverter default value used. Only valid ifthis parameter is never set.220-240 V 1 Only valid for VFX48/52380-415 V 3 Only valid for VFX48/52/69440-480 V 4 Only valid for VFX48/52/69500-525 V 5 Only valid for VFX52/69550-600 V 6 Only valid for VFX69660-690 V 7 Only valid for VFX69Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43020Profibus slot/index 168/179EtherCAT index (hex)4bccProfinet IO index 19404Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43381Profibus slot/index 170/30EtherCAT index (hex)4d35Profinet IO index 19765Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt!CAUTION!Level controlled inputs DO NOT comply with theMachine Directive if the inputs are directlyused to start and stop the machine.NOTE: Edge controlled inputs can comply with theMachine Directive (see the Chapter 8. page 47) if theinputs are directly used to start and stop the machine.11.2.3 Mains supply voltage [21B]WARNING!This menu must be set according to the ACdrive product lable and the supply voltageused. Wrong setting might damage the ACdrive or brake resistor.In this menu the nominal mains supply voltage connected tothe AC drive can be selected. The setting will be valid for allparameter sets. The default setting, Not defined, is neverselectable and is only visible until a new value is selected.Once the supply voltage is set, this selection will not beaffected by the Load Default command [243].CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 65

11.2.4 Motor Data [220]In this menu you enter the motor data to adapt the AC driveto the connected motor. This will increase the controlaccuracy as well as different read-outs and analogue outputsignals.Motor M1 is selected as default and motor data entered willbe valid for motor M1. If you have more than one motoryou need to select the correct motor in menu [212] beforeentering motor data.NOTE 1: The parameters for motor data cannot bechanged during run mode.NOTE 2: The default settings are for a standard 4-polemotor according to the nominal power of the AC drive.NOTE 3: Parameter set cannot be changed during run ifthe sets is set for different motors.NOTE 4: Motor Data in the different sets M1 to M4 canbe revert to default setting in menu “[243] Default>Set”.Motor Frequency [222]Set the nominal motor frequency.Default:Range:Resolution222 Motor FreqStp M1: 50HzA50 Hz24-300 Hz1 HzCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43042Profibus slot/index 168/201EtherCAT index (hex)4be2Profinet IO index 19426Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 HzModbus formatEIntMotor Power [223]Set the nominal motor power. If parallel motors, set thevalue as sum of motors power.WARNING!Enter the correct motor data to preventdangerous situations and assure correctcontrol.Default:223 Motor PowerStp M1: (P NOM )kWAP NOM AC driveMotor Voltage [221]Set the nominal motor voltage.Range:Resolution1W-150% x P NOM3 significant digits221 Motor VoltsStp M1: 400VANOTE: The Motor Power value will always be stored as a3 digit value in W up to 999 W and in kW for all higherpowers.Default:Range:Resolution400 V for VFX 48500 V for VFX 52690 V for VFX 69100-700 V1 VNOTE: The Motor Volts value will always be stored as a 3digit value with a resolution of 1 V.Communication informationCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43043Profibus slot/index 168/202EtherCAT index (hex)4be3Profinet IO index 19427Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 WModbus formatEIntP NOM is the nominal AC drive power.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43041Profibus slot/index 168/200EtherCAT index (hex)4be1Profinet IO index 19425Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.1 VModbus formatEInt66 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Motor Current [224]Set the nominal motor current. If parallel motors, set thevalue as sum of motors current.Default: I MOT (see Note 2 page 66)Range:224 Motor CurrStp M1: (IMOT)AA25 - 150% x I NOMCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43044Profibus slot/index 168/203EtherCAT index (hex)4be4Profinet IO index 19428Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.1 AModbus formatEIntNOTE: The default settings are for a standard 4-polemotor according to the nominal power of the AC drive.WARNING!Do not connect motors with less than 25% ofthe nominal power of the AC drive. This maydisrupt the control of the motor.Motor Speed [225]Set the nominal asynchronous motor speed.225 Motor SpeedStp M1: (n MOT )rpmADefault: n MOT (see Note 2 page 66)Range: 50 - 18000 rpmResolution 1 rpm, 4 sign digitsWARNING!Do NOT enter a synchronous (no-load) motorspeed.NOTE: Maximum speed [343] is not automaticallychanged when the motor speed is changed.NOTE: Entering a wrong, too low value can cause adangerous situation for the driven application due tohigh speeds.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43045Profibus slot/index 168/204EtherCAT index (hex)4be5Profinet IO index 19429Fieldbus formatUInt. 1=1 rpmModbus formatUIntMotor Poles [226]When the nominal speed of the motor is 500 rpm, theadditional menu for entering the number of poles, [226],appears automatically. In this menu the actual pole numbercan be set which will increase the control accuracy of the ACdrive.Default: 4Range: 2-144Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43046Profibus slot/index 168/205EtherCAT index (hex)4be6Profinet IO index 19430Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 poleModbus formatEIntMotor Cos [227]Set the nominal Motor cosphi (power factor).Default: Cosφ NOM (see Note 2 page 66)Range: 0.50 - 1.00226 Motor PolesStp M1: 4A227 Motor CosStp M1:CosφNOMACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43047Profibus slot/index 168/206EtherCAT index (hex)4be7Profinet IO index 19431Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01Modbus formatEIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 67

Motor ventilation [228]Parameter for setting the type of motor ventilation. Affectsthe characteristics of the I 2 t motor protection by loweringthe actual overload current at lower speeds.Default:SelfNone 0 Limited I 2 t overload curve.Self 1 Normal I2 t overload curve. Means that themotor stands lower current at low speed.Forced 2Communication information228 Motor VentStp M1: SelfAExpanded I 2 t overload curve. Means that themotor stands almost the whole current alsoat lower speed.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43048Profibus slot/index 168/207EtherCAT index (hex)4be8Profinet IO index 19432Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntWhen the motor has no cooling fan, None is selected andthe current level is limited to 55% of rated motor current.With a motor with a shaft mounted fan, Self is selected andthe current for overload is limited to 87% from 20% ofsynchronous speed. At lower speed, the overload currentallowed will be smaller.When the motor has an external cooling fan, Forced isselected and the overload current allowed starts at 90% fromrated motor current at zero speed, up to nominal motorcurrent at 70% of synchronous speed.Fig. 60 shows the characteristics with respect for NominalCurrent and Speed in relation to the motor ventilation typeselected.xI nom for I 2 t1.000.900.870.55ForcedSelfNoneMotor Identification Run [229]This function is used when the AC drive is put intooperation for the first time. To achieve an optimal controlperformance, fine tuning of the motor parameters using amotor ID run is needed. During the test run the displayshows “Test Run” flashing.To activate the Motor ID run, select either “Short” or“Extended” and press Enter. Then press RunL or RunR onthe control panel to start the ID run. If menu“[219] Rotation” is set to L the RunR key is inactive andvice versa. The ID run can be aborted by giving a Stopcommand via the control panel or Enable input. Theparameter will automatically return to OFF when the test iscompleted. The message “Test Run OK!” is displayed.Before the AC drive can be operated normally again, pressthe STOP/RESET key on the control panel.During the Short ID run the motor shaft does not rotate.The AC drive measures the rotor and stator resistance.During the Extended ID run the motor is powered on androtates. The AC drive measures the rotor and statorresistance as well as the induction and the inertia for themotor.Default:Off, see NoteOff 0 Not activeShort 1Extended 2Communication information229 Motor ID-RunStp M1: OffAParameters are measured with injected DCcurrent. No rotation of the shaft will occur.Additional measurements, not possible toperform with DC current, are done directlyafter a short ID run. The shaft will rotateand must be disconnected from the load.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43049Profibus slot/index 168/208EtherCAT index (hex)4be9Profinet IO index 19433Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntWARNING!During the extended ID RUN, the motor willrotate. Take safety measures to avoidunforeseen dangerous situations.0.20 0.70 2.00xSync SpeedNOTE: To run the AC drive it is not mandatory for the IDRUN to be executed, but without it the performance willnot be optimal.Fig. 60 I 2 t curves68 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

NOTE: If the ID Run is aborted or not completed themessage “Interrupted!” will be displayed. The previousdata do not need to be changed in this case. Check thatthe motor data are correct.encoder is correctly installed, set Encoder Feedback [22B] toOff, run the AC drive at any speed and compare with thevalue in this menu. The value in this menu [22D] should beabout the same as the motor speed [230]. If you get thewrong sign for the value, swap encoder input A and B.Encoder Feedback [22B]NOTE: If the heat sink temperature gets too high theswitching frequency is decreased to avoid tripping. Thisis done automatically in the AC drive. The defaultswitching frequency is 3 kHz.Unit:Resolution:22D Enc SpeedStp M1: XXrpmArpmspeed measured via the encoderOnly visible if the Encoder option board is installed. Thisparameter enables or disables the encoder feedback from themotor to the AC drive.Default: OffOff 0 Encoder feedback disabledOn 1 Encoder feedback enabledCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43051Profibus slot/index 168/210EtherCAT index (hex)4bebProfinet IO index 19435Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntEncoder Pulses [22C]Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed. Thisparameter describes the number of pulses per rotation foryour encoder, i.e. it is encoder specific. For moreinformation please see the encoder manual.Default: 1024Range: 5–16384Communication information22B EncoderStp M1: OffA22C Enc PulsesStp M1: 1024AModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43052Profibus slot/index 168/211EtherCAT index (hex)4becProfinet IO index 19436Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 pulseModbus formatEIntEncoder Speed [22D]Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed. Thisparameter shows the measured motor speed. To check if theCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42911Profibus slot/index 168/70EtherCAT index (hex)4b5fProfinet IO index 19295Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatIntEncoder Pulse counter [22F]Note: Menus [22E1] - [22E3] are only visible if [22A] isset to “Advanced”.Only visible if the Encoder option is installed. Added menu/parameter for accumulated QEP (Quadrature EncoderPulse) encoder pulses. Can be preset to any value within busformat used (Int = 2 byte, Long = 4 byte).Default: 0Resolution 1Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42912Profibus slot/index 168/71EtherCAT index (hex)4b60Profinet IO index 19296Fieldbus formatModbus format22F Enc Puls CtrStp 0ALong, 1=1 quadencoder pulseIntNote: For a 1024 pulse encoder [22F] will count1024 * 4= 4096 pulses per turn.Encoder fault and speed monitoring[22G]Parameters for encoder fault monitoring and speedsupervision by use of the encoder feedback for detectingspeed deviation compared to internal speed reference signal.Similar speed deviation functionality is also available in theCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 69

Crane option, with parameters for speed bandwidth anddelay time.Encoder fault trip conditions:1. No encoder board detected after power up and AC driveis setup to use encoder.2. Lost communication to encoder board for more than 2seconds.3. If no pulses detected for set delay time [22G1] and drivein Torque Limit (TL) or Current Limit (CL).Note: If encoder signals are missing or encoder cabledisconnected, the measured speed will then be 0 rpmand the AC drive will run with Torque Limit (TL) at verylow speed.Note: Other likely scenarios when encoder signals arelost during operation are tripped drive due to“Overcurrent Fast” or “Desat”.Encoder speed deviation trip condition:Encoder speed outside set speed deviation band [22G2] forset delay time [22G1].Note: Encoder speed deviation trip re-uses “Deviation 2”trip message with ID = 2.Encoder fault delay time [22G1]Define the encoder fault and speed deviation delay time.22G1 Enc F DelayStp M1:OffACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43057Profibus slot/index 168/216EtherCAT index (hex)4bf1Profinet IO index 19441Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 %Modbus formatEIntEncoder max fault counter [22G3]This parameter shows the maximum time that speeddeviation exceeds the allowed deviation band set in [22G2].The parameter is intended to be used during commissioningfor setting up [22G1] and [22G2] to avoid nuisance tripsand can be cleared by setting to 0.Default: 0.000sRange22G3 Max EncFCtrStp 0.000s0.00 - 10.00 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42913Profibus slot/index 168/78EtherCAT index (hex)4b61Profinet IO index 19297Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.001sModbus formatEIntNOTE: The value is volatile and lost at power down. It ispossible to reset the value by clearing the parameter.Default:OffRange Off, 0.01 - 10.00 s where Off = 0Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43056Profibus slot/index 168/215EtherCAT index (hex)4bf0Profinet IO index 19440Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.01 sModbus formatEIntEncoder fault speed deviation band [22G2]Defines the max allowed speed deviation band = differencebetween measured encoder speed and speed ramp output.Default: 10%Range 0 - 400 %22G2 Enc F BandStp M1:10%A70 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

11.2.5 Motor Protection [230]This function protects the motor against overload based onthe standard IEC 60947-4-2.Motor I 2 t Type [231]The motor protection function makes it possible to protectthe motor from overload as published in the standard IEC60947-4-2. It does this using Motor I2t Current, [232] as areference. The Motor I2t Time [233] is used to define thetime behaviour of the function. The current set in [232] canbe delivered infinite in time. If for instance in [233] a timeof 1000 s is chosen the upper curve of Fig. 61 is valid. Thevalue on the x-axis is the multiple of the current chosen in[232]. The time [233] is the time that an overloaded motoris switched off or is reduced in power at 1.2 times thecurrent set in [232].Default: TripOff 0 I 2 t motor protection is not active.Trip 1Limit 2Communication information231 Mot I 2 t TypeStpTripAWhen the I 2 t time is exceeded, the ACdrive will trip on “Motor I 2 t”.This mode helps to keep the inverterrunning when the Motor I2t function is justbefore tripping the AC drive. The trip isreplaced by current limiting with amaximum current level set by the valueout of the menu [232]. In this way, if thereduced current can drive the load, the ACdrive continues running. If there is noreduction in thermal load, the drive willtrip.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43061Profibus slot/index 168/220EtherCAT index (hex)4bf5Profinet IO index 19445Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: When Mot I2t Type=Limit, the AC drive can controlthe speed < MinSpeed to reduce the motor current.Motor I 2 t Current [232]Sets the current limit for the motor I 2 t protection.Default: 100% of I MOTRange: 0–150% of I M OT ( set in menu [224])Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43062Profibus slot/index 168/221EtherCAT index (hex)4bf6Profinet IO index 19446Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntNOTE: When the selection Limit is set in menu [231], thevalue must be above the no-load current of the motor.Motor I 2 t Time [233]Sets the time of the I 2 t function. After this time the limit forthe I 2 t is reached if operating with 120% of the I 2 t currentvalue. Valid when start from 0 rpm.NOTE: Not the time constant of the motor.Default:Range:232 Mot I 2 t CurrStp 100%A233 Mot I 2 t TimeStp60s60 sA60–1200 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43063Profibus slot/index 168/222EtherCAT index (hex)4bf7Profinet IO index 19447Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 71

10000010000t [s]10001000 s (120%)100240 s (120%)480 s (120%)60 s (120%)120 s (120%)10Fig. 61 I 2 t function1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2Actual output current/ I 2 t-currenti / I2t-currentFig. 61 shows how the function integrates the square of themotor current according to the “Mot I 2 t Curr [232]” andthe “Mot I 2 t Time [233]”.When the selection Trip is set in menu [231] the AC drivetrips if this limit is exceeded.When the selection Limit is set in menu [231] the AC drivereduces the torque if the integrated value is 95% or closer tothe limit, so that the limit cannot be exceeded.NOTE: If it is not possible to reduce the current, the ACdrive will trip after exceeding 110% of the limit.ExampleIn Fig. 61 the thick grey line shows the following example.• Menu “[232] Mot I 2 t Curr” is set to 100%.1.2 x 100% = 120%• Menu “[233] Mot I 2 t Time” is set to 1000 s.This means that the AC drive will trip or reduce after 1000 sif the current is 1.2 times of 100% nominal motor current.Thermal Protection [234]Only visible if the PTC/PT100 option board is installed. Setthe PTC input for thermal protection of the motor. Themotor thermistors (PTC) must comply with DIN 44081/44082. Please refer to the manual for the PTC/PT100option board.Menu [234] Thermal Prot” contains functions to enable ordisable the PTC input. Here you can select and activatePTC and/or PT100.Default:Off 0PTC 1PT100 2PTC+PT100 3OffCommunication information234 Thermal ProtStpOffAPTC and PT100 motor protection aredisabled.Enables the PTC protection of the motorvia the insulated option board.Enables the PT100 protection for themotor via the insulated option board.Enables the PTC protection as well as thePT100 protection for the motor via theinsulated option board.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43064Profibus slot/index 168/223EtherCAT index (hex)4bf8Profinet IO index 19448Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: PTC option and PT100 selections can only beselected in menu [234] if the option board is mounted.72 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

NOTE: If you select the PTC option, the PT100 inputs asmotor protection are ignored.Motor Class [235]Only visible if the PTC/PT100 option board is installed. Setthe class of motor used. The trip levels for the PT100 sensorwill automatically be set according to the setting in thismenu.Default:A 100C 0E 115C 1B 120C 2F 140C 3F Nema 145C 4H 165C 5235 Mot ClassStpF 140CF 140CCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43065Profibus slot/index 168/224EtherCAT index (hex)4bf9Profinet IO index 19449Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: This menu is only valid for PT 100.APT100 Inputs [236]Sets which of PT100 inputs that should be used for thermalprotection. Deselecting not used PT100 inputs on the PTC/PT100 option board in order to ignore those inputs, i.e.extra external wiring is not needed if port is not used.Default: PT100 1+2+3Selection:Communication informationPT100 1, PT100 2, PT100 1+2, PT1003, PT100 1+3, PT100 2+3, PT1001+2+3PT100 1 1 Channel 1 used for PT100 protectionPT100 2 2 Channel 2 used for PT100 protectionPT100 1+2 3 Channel 1+2 used for PT100 protectionPT100 3 4 Channel 3 used for PT100 protectionPT100 1+3 5 Channel 1+3 used for PT100 protectionPT100 2+3 6 Channel 2+3 used for PT100 protectionPT100 1+2+3 7236 PT100 InputsStp PT100 1+2+3AChannel 1+2+3 used for PT100protectionModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43066Profibus slot/index 168/225EtherCAT index (hex)4bfaProfinet IO index 19450Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: This menu is only valid for PT 100 thermalprotection if PT100 is enabled in menu [234].CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 73

Motor PTC [237]For AC drive sizes B to D (VFX48/52-003-074) there isoptional possibility to directly connect motor PTC (not tobe mixed up with PTC/PT100 option board, see Chapter13.7 page 189).In this menu the internal motor PTC hardware option isenabled. This PTC input complies with DIN 44081/44082.For electrical specification please refer to the separatemanual for the PTC/PT100 option board, same data applies(could be found on www.emotron.com/www.cgglobal.com).This menu is only visible if a PTC (or resistor

Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43022Profibus slot/index 168/181EtherCAT index (hex)4bceProfinet IO index 19406Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntThe active set can be viewed with function[721] VSD status.NOTE: Parameter set cannot be changed during run ifthe parameter set includes change of the motor set(M2-M4). In this case always stop the motor beforechanging parameter set.Prepare parameter Set when different Motor dataM1 - M4:1. Select desired parameter Set to be set in [241] A - D.2. Select “Motor Set [212]” if other than the default SetM1.3. Set relevant motor data in the Menu group [220].4. Set other desired parameter settings to belong to thisparameter Set.To prepare a Set for another motor, repeat these steps.Copy Set [242]This function copies the content of a parameter set intoanother parameter set.242 Copy SetStpADefault: A>BA>B 0 Copy set A to set BA>C 1 Copy set A to set CA>D 2 Copy set A to set DB>A 3 Copy set B to set AB>C 4 Copy set B to set CB>D 5 Copy set B to set DC>A 6 Copy set C to set AC>B 7 Copy set C to set BC>D 8 Copy set C to set DD>A 9 Copy set D to set AD>B 10 Copy set D to set BD>C 11 Copy set D to set CA>BCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43021Profibus slot/index 168/180EtherCAT index (hex)4bcdProfinet IO index 19405Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: The actual value of menu [310] will not be copiedinto the other set.A>B means that the content of parameter set A is copiedinto parameter set B.Load Default Values Into Set [243]With this function three different levels (factory settings)can be selected for the four parameter sets. When loadingthe default settings, all changes made in the software are setto factory settings. This function also includes selections forloading default settings to the four different Motor DataSets.Default:A 0B 1C 2D 3ABCD 4Factory 5M1 6M2 7M3 8M4 9M1234 10Communication information243 Default>SetStpAAOnly the selected parameter set will revertto its default settings.All four parameter sets will revert to thedefault settings.All settings, except [211], [221]-[22D],[261], [3A1] and [923], will revert to thedefault settings.Only the selected motor set will revert to itsdefault settings.All four motor sets will revert to defaultsettings.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43023Profibus slot/index 168/182EtherCAT index (hex)4bcfProfinet IO index 19407Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntANOTE: Trip log hour counter and other VIEW ONLY menusare not regarded as settings and will be unaffected.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 75

NOTE: If “Factory” is selected, the message “Sure?” isdisplayed. Press the + key to display “Yes” and thenEnter to confirm.NOTE: The parameters in menu “[220] Motor data”, arenot affected by loading defaults when restoringparameter sets A–D.Copy All Settings to Control Panel [244]All the settings can be copied into the control panelincluding the motor data. Start commands will be ignoredduring copying.Default:No CopyNo Copy 0 Nothing will be copiedCopy 1 Copy all settings244 Copy to CPStpNo CopyACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43024Profibus slot/index 168/183EtherCAT index (hex)4bd0Profinet IO index 19408Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: The actual value of menu [310] will not be copiedinto control panel memory set.Load Settings from Control Panel [245]This function can load all four parameter sets from thecontrol panel to the AC drive. Parameter sets from thesource AC drive are copied to all parameter sets in the targetAC drive, i.e. A to A, B to B, C to C and D to D.Start commands will be ignored during loading.Default:No CopyNo Copy 0 Nothing will be loaded.A 1 Data from parameter set A is loaded.B 2 Data from parameter set B is loaded.C 3 Data from parameter set C is loaded.D 4 Data from parameter set D is loaded.ABCD 5A+Mot 6B+Mot 7C+Mot 8D+Mot 9ABCD+Mot 10245 Load from CPStpNo CopyAData from parameter sets A, B, C and D areloaded.Parameter set A and Motor data areloaded.Parameter set B and Motor data areloaded.Parameter set C and Motor data areloaded.Parameter set D and Motor data areloaded.Parameter sets A, B, C, D and Motor dataare loaded.M1 11 Data from motor 1 is loaded.M2 12 Data from motor 2 is loaded.M3 13 Data from motor 3 is loaded.M4 14 Data from motor 4 is loaded.M1M2M3M415 Data from motor 1, 2, 3 and 4 are loaded.All 16 All data is loaded from the control panel.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43025Profibus slot/index 168/184EtherCAT index (hex)4bd1Profinet IO index 19409Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: Loading from the control panel will not affect thevalue in menu [310].76 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

11.2.7 Trip Autoreset/Trip Conditions[250]The benefit of this feature is that occasional trips that do notaffect the process will be automatically reset. Only when thefailure keeps on coming back, recurring at defined times andtherefore cannot be solved by the AC drive, will the unit givean alarm to inform the operator that attention is required.For all trip functions that can be activated by the user youcan select to control the motor down to zero speed accordingto set deceleration ramp to avoid water hammer.Also see section 12.2, page 180.Autoreset example:In an application it is known that the main supply voltagesometimes disappears for a very short time, a so-called “dip”.That will cause the AC drive to trip an “Undervoltagealarm”. Using the Autoreset function, this trip will beacknowledged automatically.• Enable the Autoreset function by making the reset inputcontinuously high.• Activate the Autoreset function in the menu [251],Number of trips.• Select in menus [252] to [25N] the Trip condition thatare allowed to be automatically reset by the Autoresetfunction after the set delay time has expired.Number of Trips [251]Any number set above 0 activates the Autoreset. This meansthat after a trip, the AC drive will restart automaticallyaccording to the number of attempts selected. No restartattempts will take place unless all conditions are normal.If the Autoreset counter (not visible) contains more tripsthan the selected number of attempts, the Autoreset cyclewill be interrupted. No Autoreset will then take place.If there are no trips for more than 10 minutes, the Autoresetcounter decreases by one.If the maximum number of trips has been reached, the tripmessage hour counter is marked with an “A”.If the Autoreset is full then the AC drive must be reset by anormal Reset.Example:• Autoreset = 5• Within 10 minutes 6 trips occur• At the 6th trip there is no Autoreset, because theAutoreset trip log contains 5 trips already.• To reset, apply a normal reset: set the reset input high tolow and high again to maintain the Autoreset function.The Autoreset counter is reset (not visible).Default:Range:0 (no Autoreset)0–10 attemptsCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43071Profibus slot/index 168/230EtherCAT index (hex)4bffProfinet IO index 19455Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatUIntNOTE: An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramptime.Over temperature [252]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.Default:OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s251 No of TripsStp 0A252 OvertempStpAOffCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43072Profibus slot/index 168/231EtherCAT index (hex)4c00Profinet IO index 19456Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntNOTE: An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramptime.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 77

Overvolt D [253]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.Overvolt [255]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.253 Overvolt DStpAOff255 OvervoltStpAOffDefault:OffDefault:OffOff 0 OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43075Profibus slot/index 168/234EtherCAT index (hex)4c03Profinet IO index 19459Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntNOTE: An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramptime.Overvolt G [254]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43077Profibus slot/index 168/236EtherCAT index (hex)4c05Profinet IO index 19461Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntMotor Lost [256]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.256 Motor LostStpAOffDefault:OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s254 Overvolt GStpAOffDefault:OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 sNOTE: Only visible when Motor Lost is selected in menu[423].Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43076Profibus slot/index 168/235EtherCAT index (hex)4c04Profinet IO index 19460Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43083Profibus slot/index 168/242EtherCAT index (hex)4c0bProfinet IO index 19467Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEInt78 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Locked Rotor [257]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.Default:OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43086Profibus slot/index 168/245EtherCAT index (hex)4c0eProfinet IO index 19470Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntPower Fault [258]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.Default:OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 sCommunication information257 Locked RotorStpOffModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43087Profibus slot/index 168/246EtherCAT index (hex)4c0fProfinet IO index 19471Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntA258 Power FaultStpAOffUndervoltage [259]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.Default:OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43088Profibus slot/index 168/247EtherCAT index (hex)4c10Profinet IO index 19472Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntMotor I 2 t [25A]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.Default:OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s259 UndervoltageStpOffCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43073Profibus slot/index 168/232EtherCAT index (hex)4c01Profinet IO index 19457Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntA25A Motor I 2 tStpAOffCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 79

Motor I 2 t Trip Type [25B]Select the preferred way to react to a Motor I 2 t trip.Default:TripTrip 0 The motor will tripDeceleration 1 The motor will decelerateCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43074Profibus slot/index 168/233EtherCAT index (hex)4c02Profinet IO index 19458Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntPT100 [25C]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.Default:OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s25B Motor I 2 t TTStpTripCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43078Profibus slot/index 168/237EtherCAT index (hex)4c06Profinet IO index 19462Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntA25C PT100StpAOffPT100 Trip Type [25D]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.25D PT100 TTStpATripCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43079Profibus slot/index 168/238EtherCAT index (hex)4c07Profinet IO index 19463Fieldbus formatUintModbus formatUIntPTC [25E]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.Default:OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43084Profibus slot/index 168/243EtherCAT index (hex)4c0cProfinet IO index 19468Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntPTC Trip Type [25F]Select the preferred way to react to a PTC trip.Default:Selection:Trip25E PTCStpSame as menu [25B]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43085Profibus slot/index 168/244EtherCAT index (hex)4c0dProfinet IO index 19469Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntA25F PTC TTStpATripOffDefault:Selection:TripSame as menu [25B]80 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

External Trip [25G]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.Communication Error [25I]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.25G Ext TripStpAOff25I Com ErrorStpAOffDefault:OffDefault:OffOff 0 OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43080Profibus slot/index 168/239EtherCAT index (hex)4c08Profinet IO index 19464Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntExternal Trip Type [25H]Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43089Profibus slot/index 168/248EtherCAT index (hex)4c11Profinet IO index 19473Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntCommunication Error Trip Type [25J]Select the preferred way to react to a communication trip.25H Ext Trip TTStpATrip25J Com Error TTStpTripADefault:TripDefault:TripSelection:Same as menu [25B]Selection:Same as menu [25B]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43081Profibus slot/index 168/240EtherCAT index (hex)4c09Profinet IO index 19465Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43090Profibus slot/index 168/249EtherCAT index (hex)4c12Profinet IO index 19474Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 81

Min Alarm [25K]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.Max Alarm [25M]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.25K Min AlarmStpAOff25M Max AlarmStpAOffDefault:OffDefault:OffOff 0 OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43091Profibus slot/index 168/250EtherCAT index (hex)4c13Profinet IO index 19475Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntMin Alarm Trip Type [25L]Select the preferred way to react to a min alarm trip.25L Min Alarm TTStpTripACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43093Profibus slot/index 168/252EtherCAT index (hex)4c15Profinet IO index 19477Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntMax Alarm Trip Type [25N]Select the preferred way to react to a max alarm trip.25N Max Alarm TTStpTripADefault:TripDefault:TripSelection:Same as menu [25B]Selection:Same as menu [25B]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43092Profibus slot/index 168/251EtherCAT index (hex)4c14Profinet IO index 19476Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43094Profibus slot/index 168/253EtherCAT index (hex)4c16Profinet IO index 19478Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntOver current F [25O]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.25O Over curr FStpAOffDefault:OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s82 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43082Profibus slot/index 168/241EtherCAT index (hex)4c0aProfinet IO index 19466Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntOver Speed [25Q]Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When thetime delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the functionis active.Default:OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43096Profibus slot/index 169/0EtherCAT index (hex)4c18Profinet IO index 19480Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntExternal Motor Temperature [25R]Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears. Whenthe time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if thefunction is active.Default:OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s25Q Over speedStpOffCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43097Profibus slot/index 168/239EtherCAT index (hex)4c19Profinet IO index 19481Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntA25R Ext Mot TempStpOffAExternal Motor Trip Type [25S]Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip.Default:Selection:TripSame as menu [25B]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43098Profibus slot/index 168/240EtherCAT index (hex)4c1aProfinet IO index 19482Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntLiquid cooling low level [25T]Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears. Whenthe time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if thefunction is active.Default:OffOff 0 Off1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43099Profibus slot/index 169/3EtherCAT index (hex)4c1bProfinet IO index 19483Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntLiquid Cooling Low level Trip Type [25U]Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip.Default:Selection:25S Ext Mot TTStpTripA25T LC LevelStpSame as menu [25B]TripCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43100Profibus slot/index 169/4EtherCAT index (hex)4c1cProfinet IO index 19484Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntA25U LC Level TTStpTripAOffCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 83

Brake Fault [25V]Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears. Whenthe time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if thefunction is active.Deviation [25X]Deviation delay time, starts counting when the fault is gone.When the time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset ifthe function is active.Default Off25V Brk FaultStp OffAOff 0 Autoreset not activated.1 - 3600s 1 - 3600s Brake fault auto reset delay time.Default:OffOff 0 Off1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s25X DeviationStpAOffCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43070Profibus slot/index 168/229EtherCAT index (hex)4bfeProfinet IO index 19454Fieldbus format Long, 1=1sModbus formatEIntCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43562Profibus slot/index 170/211EtherCAT index (hex)4deaProfinet IO index 19946Fieldbus format Long, 1=1sModbus formatEIntEncoder [25W]Encoder delay time, starts counting when the faultdisappears. When the time delay has elapsed, the alarm willbe reset if the function is active.25W EncoderStpAOffDefault:OffOff 0 Off1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43561Profibus slot/index 170/210EtherCAT index (hex)4de9Profinet IO index 19945Fieldbus format Long, 1=1sModbus formatEInt84 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

11.2.8 Serial Communication [260]This function is to define the communication parameters forserial communication. There are two types of optionsavailable for serial communication, RS232/485 (Modbus/RTU) and fieldbus modules (Profibus, DeviceNet,Modbus/TCP, Profinet IO and EtherCAT).For more information see Chapter 10. page 55 andrespective option manual.Comm Type [261]Select RS232/485 [262] or Fieldbus [263].Default:RS232/485 0Fieldbus 1RS232/485Communication information261 Com TypeStp RS232/485RS232/485 selectedFieldbus selected (Profibus, DeviceNet,Modbus/TCP, Profinet IO or EtherCAT)Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43031Profibus slot/index 168/190EtherCAT index (hex)4bd7Profinet IO index 19415Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: Toggling the setting in this menu will perform asoft reset (re-boot) of the Fieldbus module.RS232/485 [262]Press Enter to set up the parameters for RS232/485(Modbus/RTU) communication.Baud rate [2621]Set the baud rate for the communication.A262 RS232/485Stp ANOTE: This baud rate is only used for the isolatedRS232/485 option.Default: 96002400 04800 19600 219200 338400 4Selected baud rateCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43032Profibus slot/index 168/191EtherCAT index (hex)4bd8Profinet IO index 19416Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAddress [2622]Enter the unit address for the AC drive.NOTE: This address is only used for the isolated RS232/485 option.Default: 1Selection: 1–247Communication information2621 BaudrateStp 9600A2622 AddressStp 1AModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43033Profibus slot/index 168/192EtherCAT index (hex)4bd9Profinet IO index 19417Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatUIntFieldbus [263]Press Enter to set up the parameters for fieldbuscommunication.263 FieldbusStp ACG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 85

Address [2631]Enter/view the unit/node address of the AC drive. Read &write access for Profibus, DeviceNet. Read - only forEtherCAT.Read/Write [2633]Select read/write to control the inverter over a fieldbusnetwork. For further information, see the Fieldbus optionmanual.2631 AddressStp A622633 Read/WriteStpARWDefault: 62Range: Profibus 0–126, DeviceNet 0–63Node address valid for Profibus(RW), DeviceNet (RW) andEtherCAT (RO).Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43034Profibus slot/index 168/199EtherCAT index (hex)4bdaProfinet IO index 19418Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatUIntProcess Data Mode [2632]Enter the mode of process data (cyclic data). For furtherinformation, see the Fieldbus option manual.Default:BasicNone 0 Control/status information is not used.Basic 4Extended 8Communication information2632 PrData ModeStpBasicA4 byte process data control/statusinformation is used.4 byte process data (same as Basicsetting) + additional proprietary protocolfor advanced users is used.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43035Profibus slot/index 168/194EtherCAT index (hex)4bdbProfinet IO index 19419Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntDefault:RW 0Read 1RWValid for process data. Select R (read only) for loggingprocess without writing process data. Select RW in normalcases to control inverter.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43036Profibus slot/index 168/195EtherCAT index (hex)4bdcProfinet IO index 19420Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAdditional Process Values [2634]Define the number of additional process values sent in cyclicmessages.Default: 0Range: 0-82634 AddPrValuesStp 0ACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43039Profibus slot/index 168/198EtherCAT index (hex)4bdfProfinet IO index 19423Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatUInt86 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Communication Fault [264]Main menu for communication fault/warning settings. Forfurther details please see the Fieldbus option manual.Communication Fault Mode [2641]]Selects action if a communication fault is detected.Default:OffOff 0 No communication supervision.Trip 1Warning 2Communication informationRS232/485 selected:The AC drive will trip if there is nocommunication for time set in parameter[2642].Fieldbus selected:The AC drive will trip if:1. The internal communication betweenthe control board and fieldbus option islost for time set in parameter [2642].2. If a serious network error has occurred.RS232/485 selected:The AC drive will give a warning if there isno communication for time set inparameter [2642].Fieldbus selected:The AC drive will give a warning if:1. The internal communication betweenthe control board and fieldbus option islost for time set in parameter [2642].2. If a serious network error has occurred.NOTE: Menu [214] and/or [215] must be set to COM toactivate the communication fault function.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43037Profibus slot/index 168/196EtherCAT index (hex)4bddProfinet IO index 19421Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCommunication Fault Time [2642]]Defines the delay time for the trip/warning.Default:Range:2641 ComFlt ModeStpOff0.5 sA2642 ComFlt TimeStp 0.5sA0.1-15 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43038Profibus slot/index 168/197EtherCAT index (hex)4bdeProfinet IO index 19422Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.1 sModbus formatEIntEthernet [265]Settings for Ethernet module (Modbus/TCP, Profinet IO).For further information, see the Fieldbus option manual.NOTE: The Ethernet module must be re-booted toactivate the below settings. For example by togglingparameter [261]. Non-initialized settings indicated byflashing display text.IP Address [2651]Default: 0.0.0.0Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexEtherCAT index (hex)MAC Address [2652]Communication information42701, 42702, 42703,42704167/115, 167/116,167/117, 167/1184a8d, 4a8e, 4a8f, 4a90Profinet IO index19085, 19086, 19087,19088Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatUIntDefault:Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexEtherCAT index (hex)2651 IP Address000.000.000.0002652 MAC AddressStp 000000000000AAn unique number for the Ethernet module.42705, 42706, 42707,42708, 42709, 42710167/119, 167/120,167/121, 167/122,167/123, 167/1244a91, 4a92, 4a93,4a94, 4a95, 4a96,Profinet IO index19089, 19090, 19091,19092, 19093, 19094Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatUIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 87

Subnet Mask [2653]Default: 0.0.0.0Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexEtherCAT index (hex)Gateway [2654]Communication information42711, 42712, 42713,42714167/125, 167/126,167/127, 167/1284a97, 4a98, 4a99, 4a9aProfinet IO index19095, 19096, 19097,19098Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatUIntDefault: 0.0.0.0Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexEtherCAT index (hex)2653 Subnet Mask0.000.000.0002654 Gateway0.000.000.00042715, 42716, 42717,42718167/129, 167/130,167/131, 167/1324a9b, 4a9c, 4a9e, 4a9fProfinet IO index19099, 19100, 19101,19102Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatPicknikUIntFieldbus Signals [266]Defines modbus mapping for additional process values. Forfurther information, see the Fieldbus option manual.FB Signal 1 - 16 [2661]-[266G]Used to create a block of parameters which are read/writtenvia communication. 1 to 8 read + 1 to 8 write parameterspossible.Default: 0Range: 0-655352661 FB Signal 1Stp 0ACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42801-42816Profibus slot/index 167/215-167/230EtherCAT index (hex)4af1 - 4b00Profinet IO index 19185 - 19200Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatUIntFB Status [269]Sub menus showing status of fieldbus parameters. Please seethe Fieldbus manual for detailed information.269 FB StatusStp ADHCP [2655]2655 DHCPStpAOffDefault:Selection:OffOn/OffCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42719Profibus slot/index 167/133EtherCAT index (hex)4a9fProfinet IO index 19103Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt88 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

11.3 Process and ApplicationParameters [300]These parameters are mainly adjusted to obtain optimumprocess or machine performance.The read-out, references and actual values depends onselected process source, [321}:Table 22Selected processsourceUnit for reference andactual valueSpeed rpm 4 digitsTorque % 3 digitsPT100 C 3 digitsFrequency Hz 3 digitsResolution11.3.1 Set/View Reference Value[310]View reference valueAs default the menu [310] is in view operation. The value ofthe active reference signal is displayed. The value is displayedaccording to selected process source, [321] or the processunit selected in menu [322].Set reference valueIf the function “Reference Control [214]” is set to“Keyboard”, the reference value can be set in menu “Set/View Ref [310]” or as a motor potentiometer with the + and- keys (default) on the control panel. Selection is made withparameter Keyboard Reference Mode in menu [369]. Theramp times used when setting the reference value withMotPot function selected in [369] are according to menus“Acc MotPot [333]” and “Dec MotPot [334]”.The ramp times used for the reference value when Normalfunction is selected in menu [369], are according to “AccTime [331]” and “Dec Time [332]”.Menu [310] displays on-line the actual reference valueaccording to the Mode Settings in Table 22.Default:0 rpmDependent on:Process Source [321] and Process Unit[322]Speed mode 0 - max speed [343]Torque mode 0 - max torque [351]Other modes310 Set/View refStp0rpmAMin according to menu [324] - maxaccording to menu [325]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42991Profibus slot/index 168/150EtherCAT index (hex)4bafProfinet IO index 19375Fieldbus formatModbus formatLong, 1=1 rpm,1 %,1 °C or0.001 if ProcessValue/Process Refusing a [322] unitEIntNOTE: The actual value in menu [310] is not copied, orloaded from the control panel memory when Copy Set[242], Copy to CP [244] or Load from CP [245] isperformed.NOTE: If the MotPot function is used, the reference valueramp times are according to the “Acc MotPot [333]” and“Dec MotPot [334]” settings. Actual speed ramp will belimited according to “Acc Time [331]” and“Dec Time [332]”.NOTE: Write access to this parameter is only allowedwhen menu “Ref Control [214]” is set to Keyboard. WhenReference control is used, see section “10. Serialcommunication” on page 5511.3.2 Process Settings [320]With these functions, the AC drive can be set up to fit theapplication. The menus [110], [120], [310], [362]-[368]and [711] use the process unit selected in [321] and [322]for the application, e.g. rpm, bar or m3/h. This makes itpossible to easily set up the AC drive for the required processrequirements, as well as for copying the range of a feedbacksensor to set up the Process Value Minimum and Maximumin order to establish accurate actual process information.Process Source [321]Select the signal source for the process value that controlsthe motor. The Process Source can be set to act as a functionof the process signal on AnIn F(AnIn), a function of themotor speed F(Speed), a function of the shaft torqueF(Torque) or as a function of a process value from serialcommunication F(Bus). The right function to selectdepends on the characteristics and behaviour of the process.If the selection Speed, Torque or Frequency is set, the ACdrive will use speed, torque or frequency as reference value.ExampleAn axial fan is speed-controlled and there is no feedbacksignal available. The process needs to be controlled withinfixed process values in “m 3 /hr” and a process read-out of theair flow is needed. The characteristic of this fan is that the airflow is linearly related to the actual speed. So by selectingF(Speed) as the Process Source, the process can easily becontrolled.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 89

The selection F(xx) indicates that a process unit and scalingis needed, set in menus [322]-[328]. This makes it possibleto e.g. use pressure sensors to measure flow etc. If F(AnIn) isselected, the source is automatically connected to the AnInwhich has Process Value as selected.Process Unit [322]322 Proc UnitStpArpmDefault:SpeedF(AnIn) 0Function of analogue input. E.g. via PIDcontrol, [380].Speed 1 Speed as process reference 1 .Torque 2 Torque as process reference 2 .PT100 3 Temperature as process reference.F(Speed) 4 Function of speedF(Torque) 5 Function of torque 2F(Bus) 6 Function of communication referenceFrequency 7 Frequency as process reference 1 .1 . Only when Drive mode [213] is set to Speed or V/Hz.2 . Only when Drive mode [213] is set to Torque.NOTE: When PT100 is selected, use PT100 channel 1 onthe PTC/PT100 option board.NOTE: If Speed, Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu“[321] Proc Source”, menus [322] - [328] are hidden.NOTE: The motor control method depends on theselection of drive mode [213], regardless of selectedprocess source, [321].NOTE: If F (Bus) is chosen in menu [321] see section10.5.1 Process value.Communication information321 Proc SourceStpSpeedAModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43302Profibus slot/index 169/206EtherCAT index (hex)4ce6Profinet IO index 19686Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntDefault: rpmOff 0 No unit selection% 1 Percent°C 2 Degrees Centigrade°F 3 Degrees Fahrenheitbar 4 barPa 5 PascalNm 6 TorqueHz 7 Frequencyrpm 8 Revolutions per minutem 3 /h 9 Cubic meters per hourgal/h 10 Gallons per hourft 3 /h 11 Cubic feet per hourUser 12 User defined unitCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43303Profibus slot/index 169/207EtherCAT index (hex)4ce7Profinet IO index 19687Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: In case of conflicting setup between this ProcessSource, [321], selection and drive mode [213] thesoftware will automatically overrule the selection inmenu [321] according to the following:[213]=Torque and [321]=Speed; internally [321]=Torquewill be used.[213]=Speed or V/Hz and [321]=Torque; internally[321]=Speed will be used.90 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

User-defined Unit [323]This menu is only displayed if User is selected in menu[322]. The function enables the user to define a unit with sixsymbols. Use the Prev and Next key to move the cursor torequired position. Then use the + and - keys to scroll downthe character list. Confirm the character by moving thecursor to the next position by pressing the Next key.CharacterNo. for serialcomm.CharacterSpace 0 m 580–9 1–10 n 59A 11 ñ 60B 12 o 61C 13 ó 62D 14 ô 63E 15 p 64F 16 q 65G 17 r 66H 18 s 67I 19 t 68J 20 u 69K 21 ü 70L 22 v 71M 23 w 72N 24 x 73O 25 y 74P 26 z 75Q 27 å 76R 28 ä 77S 29 ö 78T 30 ! 79U 31 ¨ 80Ü 32 # 81V 33 $ 82W 34 % 83X 35 & 84Y 36 · 85Z 37 ( 86Å 38 ) 87Ä 39 * 88Ö 40 + 89a 41 , 90á 42 - 91b 43 . 92c 44 / 93d 45 : 94e 46 ; 95é 47 < 96No. for serialcomm.Characterê 48 = 97ë 49 > 98f 50 ? 99g 51 @ 100h 52 ^ 101i 53 _ 102í 54 103j 55 2 104k 56 3 105l 57Example:Create a user unit named kPa.1. When in the menu [323] press to show the cursor.2. Press NEXT to move the cursor to the right most position.3. Press until the character a is displayed.4. Press .5. Then press the until P is displayed and press .6. Repeat until you have entered kPa, confirm with .Default:No. for serialcomm.No characters shownCommunication informationCharacter323 User UnitStp ANo. for serialcomm.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43304 - 43309Profibus slot/index169/208 -169/213EtherCAT index (hex)4ce8 - 4cedProfinet IO index 19688 - 19693Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntWhen sending a unit name you send one character at a timestarting at the right most position.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 91

Process Min [324]This function sets the minimum process value allowed.Default: 0Range:Communication information0.000-10000 (Speed, Torque, F(Speed),F(Torque))-10000– +10000 (F(AnIn, PT100, F(Bus))Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43310Profibus slot/index 169/214EtherCAT index (hex)4ceeProfinet IO index 19694Fieldbus formatModbus format324 Process MinStp 0ALong, 1=1 rpm,1 %,1 °C or0.001 if ProcessValue/Process Refusing a [322] unitEIntProcess Max [325]This menu is not visible when speed, torque or frequency isselected. The function sets the value of the maximumprocess value allowed.Ratio [326]This menu is not visible when speed, frequency or torque isselected. The function sets the ratio between the actualprocess value and the motor speed so that it has an accurateprocess value when no feedback signal is used. See Fig. 62.Default: LinearLinear 0 Process is linear related to speed/torqueQuadratic 1326 RatioStpCommunication informationProcess is quadratic related to speed/torqueModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43312Profibus slot/index 169/216EtherCAT index (hex)4cf0Profinet IO index 19696Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntProcessunitProcessMax[325]ALinear325 Process MaxStp 0ADefault: 0Range: 0.000-10000Ratio=LinearCommunication informationRatio=QuadraticModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43311Profibus slot/index 169/215EtherCAT index (hex)4cefProfinet IO index 19695Fieldbus formatModbus formatLong, 1=1 rpm,1 %,1 °C or0.001 if ProcessValue/Process Refusing a [322] unitEIntProcessMin[324] MinSpeed[341]Fig. 62 RatioSpeedMaxSpeed[343]92 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

F(Value), Process Min [327]This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used. It offersyou the possibility of increasing the process accuracy byscaling the process values. The process values are scaled bylinking them to known data in the AC drive. With“F(Value) Proc Min [327]” the precise value at which theentered “Process Min [324]“ is valid can be entered.NOTE: If Speed, Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu“[321] Proc Source”, menus [322]- [328] are hidden.Default:Min -1MinCommunication informationAccording to Min Speed setting in[341].According to Max Speed setting inMax -2[343].0.000-10000 0-10000 0.000-10000Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43313Profibus slot/index 169/217EtherCAT index (hex)4cf1Profinet IO index 19697Fieldbus formatModbus format327 F(Val) PrMinStpMinALong, 1=1 rpm,1 %EIntCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43314Profibus slot/index 169/218EtherCAT index (hex)4cf2Profinet IO index 19698Fieldbus formatModbus formatExampleA conveyor belt is used to transport bottles. The requiredbottle speed needs to be within 10 to 100 bottles/s. Processcharacteristics:10 bottles/s = 150 rpm100 bottles/s = 1500 rpmThe amount of bottles is linearly related to the speed of theconveyor belt.Set-up:“Process Min [324]” = 10“Process Max [325]” = 100“Ratio [326]” = linear“F(Value), ProcMin [327]” = 150“F(Value), ProcMax [328]” = 1500With this set-up, the process data is scaled and linked toknown values which results in an accurate control.F(Value)PrMax 1500[328]Long, 1=1 rpm,1 %EIntF(Value), Process Max [328]This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used. It offersyou the possibility of increasing the process accuracy byscaling the process values. The process values are scaled bylinking them to known data in the AC drive. With F(Value),Proc Max the precise value at which the entered “ProcessMax [525]” is valid can be entered.F(ValuePrMin[327]150LinearNOTE: If Speed, Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu“[321] Proc Source”, menus [322]- [328] are hidden.Default:MaxMin -1 MinMax -2 Max0.000-10000328 F(Val) PrMaxStpMaxA0-10000 0.000-10000Fig. 6310Process Min [324]Bottles/s100Process Max [325]CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 93

11.3.3 Start/Stop settings [330]Submenu with all the functions for acceleration,deceleration, starting, stopping, etc.rpmNom. SpeedAcceleration Time [331]The acceleration time is defined as the time it takes for themotor to accelerate from 0 rpm to nominal motor speed.NOTE: If the Acc Time is too short, the motor isaccelerated according to the Torque Limit. The actualAcceleration Time may then be longer than the valueset.(NG_06-F11)Acc Time [331] Dec Time [332]Fig. 65 Acceleration and deceleration timesDefault:331 Acc TimeStp 10.0sA10.0 sDeceleration Time [332]The deceleration time is defined as the time it takes for themotor to decelerate from nominal motor speed to 0 rpm.Range:0–3600 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43101Profibus slot/index 169/5EtherCAT index (hex)4c1dProfinet IO index 19485Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.01 sModbus formatEIntDefault: 10.0 sRange: 0–3600 sCommunication informationFig. 64 shows the relationship between nominal motorEtherCAT index (hex)speed/max speed and the acceleration time. The same isvalid for the deceleration time.Fieldbus formatModbus formatrpmNominalSpeed 100% n MOTMax Speed332 Dec TimeStp 10.0sAModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43102Profibus slot/index 169/64c1eProfinet IO index 19486Long, 1=0.01 sEIntNOTE: If the Dec Time is too short and the generatorenergy cannot be dissipated in a brake resistor, themotor is decelerated according to the overvoltage limit.The actual deceleration time may be longer than thevalue set.(06-F12)8s10stFig. 64 Acceleration time and maximum speedFig. 65 shows the settings of the acceleration anddeceleration times with respect to the nominal motor speed.94 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Acceleration Time Motor Potentiometer[333]It is possible to control the speed of the AC drive using themotor potentiometer function. This function controls thespeed with separate up and down commands, over remotesignals. The MotPot function has separate ramps settingswhich can be set in “Acc MotPot [333]” and “Dec MotPot[334]”.If the MotPot function is selected, this is the accelerationtime for the MotPot up command. The acceleration time isdefined as the time it takes for the motor potentiometervalue to increase from 0 rpm to nominal speed.333 Acc MotPotStp 16.0sAAcceleration Time to Minimum Speed[335]If minimum speed, [341]>0 rpm, is used in an application,the AC drive uses separate ramp times below this level. With“Acc>MinSpeed [335]” and “DecMin SpdStp 10.0sACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43103Profibus slot/index 169/7EtherCAT index (hex)4c1fProfinet IO index 19487Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.01 sModbus formatEIntDeceleration Time Motor Potentiometer[334]If the MotPot function is selected, this is the decelerationtime for the “MotPot” down command. The decelerationtime is defined as the time it takes for the motorpotentiometer value to decrease from nominal speed to 0rpm.334 Dec MotPotStp 16.0sADefault:Range:10.0 s0-3600 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43105Profibus slot/index 169/9EtherCAT index (hex)4c21Profinet IO index 19489Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.01 sModbus formatEIntrpmMotor Speed3000[225]Min speed[341]600Max speed[343]Default:Range:16.0 s0.50–3600 stimeCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43104Profibus slot/index 169/8EtherCAT index (hex)4c20Profinet IO index 19488Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.01 sModbus formatEIntFig. 66 Calculation example of accelerating times(graphics not proportional).Example:“Motor speed [225]”Minimum speed [341]Maximum speed [343]Acceleration time [331]Deceleration time [332]Acc>Min speed[335]Dec

A. The drive will start from 0 rpm and accelerate toMinimum speed [341] = 600 rpm in 8 secondsaccording to ramp time parameterAcc>Min speed [335].Calculated as following:600 rpm is 20% of 3000 rpm => 20% of 40 s = 8 s.B. The acceleration continues from minimum speed level600 rpm to maximum speed level 3000 rpm withacceleration rate according to ramp time Accelerationtime [331].Calculate by following:3000 - 600= 2400 rpm which is 80 % of 3000 rpm =>acceleration tim is 80 % x 10 s = 8 s.This means that the total acceleration time from 0 -3000 rpm will take 8 + 8 = 16 seconds.Deceleration Time from MinimumSpeed [336]If a minimum speed is programmed, this parameter will beused to set the deceleration time from the minimum speedto 0 rpm at a stop command. The ramp time is defined asthe time it takes for the motor to decelerate from thenominal motor speed to 0 rpm.Default:Range:336 Dec

Deceleration Ramp Type [338]Sets the ramp type of all deceleration parameters in aparameter set Fig. 68.Default:338 Dec RmpStpLinearASelection: Same as menu [337]LinearCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43108Profibus slot/index 169/12EtherCAT index (hex)4c24Profinet IO index 19492Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43109Profibus slot/index 169/13EtherCAT index (hex)4c25Profinet IO index 19493Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntSpinstart [33A]The spinstart will smoothly start a motor which is alreadyrotating by catching the motor at the actual speed andcontrol it to the desired speed. If in an application, such asan exhausting fan, the motor shaft is already rotating due toexternal conditions, a smooth start of the application isrequired to prevent excessive wear. With the spinstart=On,the actual control of the motor is delayed due to detectingthe actual speed and rotation direction, which depend onmotor size, running conditions of the motor before theSpinstart, inertia of the application, etc. Depending on themotor electrical time constant and the size of the motor, itcan take maximum a couple of minutes before the motor iscaught.LinearS-curveFig. 68 Shape of deceleration rampStart Mode [339]Sets the way of starting the motor when a run command isgiven.339 Start ModeStp Normal DCAtDefault:Off 0On 1UseEncoder233A SpinstartStpOffAOffNo spinstart. If the motor is already runningthe AC drive can trip or will start with highcurrent.Spinstart will allow the start of a runningmotor without tripping or high inrush currents.If encoder feedback is used, both encoderspeed and current signals are used toperform spinstart function.Only encoder speed used for detectingrotating machine, i.e. no rotating machinedetection via initial motor current.Note: Only active if encoder is present. If noEncoder, functionality is equal to selectionOff.Default:Fast 0Normal DC 1Normal DCThe motor flux increases gradually. Themotor shaft starts rotating immediatelyonce the Run command is given.After a Run command the motor will bemagnetised first and the stator resistanceis measured. Depending on the motor timeconstant and the size of the motor it cantake up to 1.3 s before the motor shaftstarts to rotate. This will provide bettercontrol of the motor when starting.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43110Profibus slot/index 169/14EtherCAT index (hex)4c26Profinet IO index 19494Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 97

Stop Mode [33B]When the AC drive is stopped, different methods to come toa standstill can be selected in order to optimize the stop andprevent unnecessary wear. Stop Mode sets the way ofstopping the motor when a Stop command is given.Default:Decel 033B Stop ModeStpDecelADecelThe motor decelerates to 0 rpm accordingto the set deceleration time.Coast 1 The motor freewheels naturally to 0 rpm.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43111Profibus slot/index 169/15EtherCAT index (hex)4c27Profinet IO index 19495Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt11.3.4 Mechanical brake controlThe four brake-related menus [33C] to [33F] can be used tocontrol mechanical brakes e.g. to handle basic hoistingfunctions. When hoisting a load generally a mechanicalbrake holds the load when the AC drive is not running. Toprevent the load from falling down a holding torque must beinitiated before the mechanical brake is released. On theother hand when stopping hoisting the brake must beactivated before the holding torque is removed.Support is included for a Brake Acknowledge signal via adigital input. It is monitored using a brake fault timeparameter. Additional output and trip/warning signals arealso included. The acknowledge signal is either connectedfrom the brake contactor or from a proximity switch on thebrake.The brake acknowledge signal can also be used to improvesafety by preventing hoist falling load in case the brake is notengaged when stopping.Brake not released - Brake Fault tripDuring start and running the brake acknowledge signal iscompared to the actual brake output signal and if noacknowledge, i.e. brake not released, while brake output ishigh for the Brake Fault time [33H], then a Brake trip isgenerated.Brake not engaged - Brake Warning andcontinued operation (keep torque)The brake acknowledge signal is compared to the actualbrake output signal at stop. If acknowledge is still active, i.e.brake not engaged, while brake output is low for the BrakeEngage time [33E] then a Brake warning is generated andthe torque is kept, i.e. prolonging normal brake engagemode, until brake closes or an emergency action is neededby the operator, such as setting down the load.98 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Brake Release Time [33C]The Brake Release Time sets the time the AC drive delaysbefore ramping up to whatever final reference value isselected. During this time a predefined speed can begenerated to hold the load where after the mechanical brakefinally releases. This speed can be selected at Release Speed,[33D]. Immediate after the brake release time expiration thebrake lift signal is set. The user can set a digital output orrelay to the function Brake. This output or relay can controlthe mechanical brake.33C Brk ReleaseStp 0.00sAFig. 69 shows the relation between the four Brake functions.• Brake Release Time [33C]• Start Speed [33D]• Brake Engage Time [33E]• Brake Wait Time [33F]The correct time setting depends on the maximum load andthe properties of the mechanical brake. During the brakerelease time it is possible to apply extra holding torque bysetting a start speed reference with the function start speed[33D].Default:Range:0.00 s0.00–3.00 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43112Profibus slot/index 169/16EtherCAT index (hex)4c28Profinet IO index 19496Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.01 sModbus formatEIntBrake releasetime [33C]Brake waittime [33F]Brake engagetime [33E]StartRelease Speed [33D]MechanicalBrakeOpenClosedBrake RelayOutputOnOffAction must take place withinthese time intervalsFig. 69 Brake Output functionsCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 99

NOTE: Although this function is designed to operate amechanical brake via the digital outputs or relays (set tobrake function) controlling a mechanical brake, it canalso be used without a mechanical brake and hold theload in a fixed position.Release Speed [33D]The release speed only operates with the brake function:brake release [33C]. The release speed is the initial speedreference during the brake release time. The torque referenceis initialized to 90% of T NOM to ensure that the load is heldin place.Default:Range:Depend on:Communication information33D Release SpdStp0rpmA0 rpm- 4x Sync. Speed to 4x Sync.4xmotor sync speed, 1500 rpm for 1470rpm motor.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43113Profibus slot/index 169/17EtherCAT index (hex)4c29Profinet IO index 19497Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmBrake Engage Time [33E]The brake engage time is the time the load is held while themechanical brake engages. It is also used to get a firm stopwhen transmissions, etc. cause “whiplash” effects. In otherwords, it compensates for the time it takes to engage amechanical brake.33E Brk EngageStp 0.00sAWait Before Brake Time [33F]The brake wait time is the time to keep brake open and tohold the load, either in order to be able to speed upimmediately, or to stop and engage the brake.Default:Range:0.00 s0.00–30.0 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43115Profibus slot/index 169/19EtherCAT index (hex)4c2bProfinet IO index 19499Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.01 sModbus formatEIntVector Brake [33G]Braking by increasing the internal electrical losses in themotor.Default:Off 0On 1OffCommunication information33F Brk WaitStp 0.00sA33G Vector BrakeStpOffAVector brake switched off. AC drive brakesnormal with voltage limit on the DC link.Maximum AC drive current (I CL ) is availablefor braking.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43116Profibus slot/index 169/20EtherCAT index (hex)4c2cProfinet IO index 19500Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntDefault:Range:0.00 s0.00–3.00 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43114Profibus slot/index 169/18EtherCAT index (hex)4c2aProfinet IO index 19498Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.01 sModbus formatEInt100 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Brake Fault trip time [33H]The “Brake Fault trip time” for “Brake not released”function is specified in this menu.33H Brk FaultStp 1.00sANote! Function is deactivated if set to 0%.Note! Release Torque [33I] has priority over torquereference initialization by Release Speed [33D].Default: 1.00sRange 0.00 - 5.00sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43117Profibus slot/index 169/21EtherCAT index (hex)4c2dProfinet IO index 19501Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.01sModbus formatEIntNote: The Brake Fault trip time should be set to longertime than the Brake release time[33C].The “Brake not engaged” warning is using the setting ofparameter “Brake Engaged time [33E]”.Following Figure shows principle of brake operation forfault during run (left) and during stop (right).Release torque [33I]The Brake Release Time [33C] sets the time the AC drivedelays before ramping up to whatever final speed referencevalue is selected, to allow the brake to be fully opened.During this time a holding torque to prevent roll-back of theload can be activated. The parameter Release Torque [33I] isused for this purpose.The release torque initiates the torque reference from thespeed controller during the Brake Release Time [33C]. Therelease torque defines a minimum level of release (holding)torque. The set release torque is internally overruled if theactual required holding torque measured at the previousclosing of brake is higher.The release torque is set with sign in order to define theholding torque direction.33I Release TrqStp 0%ADefault: 0%Range -400% to 400%Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43118Profibus slot/index 169/22EtherCAT index (hex)4c2eProfinet IO index 19502Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 101

Brakerelease time33CBrakerelease time33CBrake waittime33FBrake engagetime33EStart*RunningTorqueSpeed>0Brake relayBrake acknowledgeBrake TripBrake warning

11.3.5 Speed [340]Menu with all parameters for settings regarding to speeds,such as Min/Max speeds, Jog speeds, Skip speeds.Minimum Speed [341]Sets the minimum speed. The minimum speed will operateas an absolute lower limit. Used to ensure the motor doesnot run below a certain speed and to maintain a certainperformance.Default:Range:0 rpm0 - Max SpeedDependent on: Set/View ref [310]NOTE: A lower speed value than the set minimum speedcan be shown in the display due to motor slip.Communication information341 Min SpeedStp0rpmAModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43121Profibus slot/index 169/25EtherCAT index (hex)4c31Profinet IO index 19505Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmStop/Sleep when less than MinimumSpeed [342]With this function it is possible to put the AC drive in “sleepmode” when it is running at minimum speed for the lengthof time set in menu “Stp

Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43123Profibus slot/index 169/27EtherCAT index (hex)4c33Profinet IO index 19507Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmNOTE: It is not possible to set the maximum speed lowerthan the minimum speed.Skip Speed HISkip Speed LOnNote: Maximum speed [343] has priority over Min Speed[341], i.e. if [343] is set below [341] then the drive willrun at [343] Max Speed with acceleration times given by[335] and [336] respectively.Skip Speed 1 Low [344]Within the Skip Speed range High to Low, the speed cannotbe constant in order to avoid mechanical resonance in theAC drive system.When Skip Speed Low Ref Speed Skip Speed High, thenOutput Speed=Skip Speed HI during deceleration andOutput Speed=Skip Speed LO during acceleration. Fig. 72shows the function of skip speed hi and low.Between Skip Speed HI and LO, the speed changes with theset acceleration and deceleration times. Skipspd1 LO setsthe lower value for the 1st skip range.Default:Range:344 SkipSpd 1 LoStp0rpm0 rpmA0 - 4 x Motor Sync SpeedCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43124Profibus slot/index 169/28EtherCAT index (hex)4c34Profinet IO index 19508Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmFig. 72 Skip SpeedNOTE: The two Skip Speed ranges may be overlapped.Skip Speed 1 High [345]Skipspd1 HI sets the higher value for the 1st skip range.Default:Range:(NG_06-F17)0 rpm0 – 4 x Sync SpeedSpeed Reference345 SkipSpd 1 HiStp0rpmACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43125Profibus slot/index 169/29EtherCAT index (hex)4c35Profinet IO index 19509Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpm104 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Skip Speed 2 Low [346]The same function as menu [344] for the 2nd skip range.Default:Range:Communication information346 SkipSpd 2 LoStp0rpmA0 rpm0 – 4 x Motor Sync SpeedModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43126Profibus slot/index 169/30EtherCAT index (hex)4c36Profinet IO index 19510Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmSkip Speed 2 High [347]The same function as menu [345] for the 2nd skip range.347 SkipSpd 2 HiStp0rpmAExampleIf Jog Speed = -10, this will give a Run Left command at10 rpm regardless of RunL or RunR commands. Fig. 73shows the function of the Jog command/function.Default:Range:Dependent on:348 Jog SpeedStpA50 rpmCommunication information50rpm-4 x motor sync speed to +4 x motor syncspeedDefined motor sync speed. Max = 400%,normally max=AC drive I max /motor I nom x100%.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43128Profibus slot/index 169/32EtherCAT index (hex)4c38Profinet IO index 19512Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmDefault: 0 rpmRange: 0 – 4 x Motor Sync SpeedCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43127Profibus slot/index 169/31EtherCAT index (hex)4c37Profinet IO index 19511Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmJogFreqJogcommandftt(NG_06-F18)Jog Speed [348]The Jog Speed function is activated by one of the digitalinputs. The digital input must be set to the Jog function[520]. The Jog command/function will automaticallygenerate a run command as long as the Jog command/function is active. This is valid independent of settings inmenu [215]. The rotation is determined by the polarity ofthe set Jog Speed.Fig. 73 Jog commandCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 105

11.3.6 Torques [350]Menu with all parameters for torque settings.352 IxR CompStpAOffMaximum Torque [351]Sets the maximum motor torque (according to menu group“Motor Data [220]”). This Maximum Torque operates as anupper torque limit. A Speed Reference is always necessary torun the motor.T MOTNmDefault:P MOTkwx9550= ----------------------------------------- = 100%n MOTrpmRange: 0–400%351 Max TorqueStp 120%A120% calculated from the motor dataCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43141Profibus slot/index 169/45EtherCAT index (hex)4c45Profinet IO index 19525Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntDefault:OffOff 0 Function disabledAutomatic 1 Automatic compensationUser Defined 2 User defined value in percent.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43142Profibus slot/index 169/46EtherCAT index (hex)4c46Profinet IO index 19526Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntU%100IxR Comp=25%IxR Com=0%NOTE: The Max Torque parameter will limit the maxmumoutput current of the AC drive following the relation:100% Tmot corresponds to 100% Imot.The maximum possible setting for parameter 351 islimited by Inom/Imot x 120%, but not higher than 400%.25f10 20 30 40 50 HzNOTE: The power loss in the motor will increase by thesquare of the torque when operating above 100%. 400%torque will result in 1600% power loss, which willincrease the motor temperature very quickly.IxR Compensation [352]This function compensates for the drop in voltage overdifferent resistances such as (very) long motor cables, chokesand motor stator by increasing the output voltage at aconstant frequency. IxR Compensation is most important atlow frequencies and is used to obtain a higher startingtorque. The maximum voltage increase is 25% of thenominal output voltage. See Fig. 74.Selecting “Automatic” will use the optimal value accordingto the internal model of motor. “User-Defined” can beselected when the start conditions of the application do notchange and a high starting torque is always required. A fixedIxR Compensation value can be set in the menu [353].Fig. 74 IxR Comp at Linear V/Hz curveIxR Comp_user [353]Only visible if User-Defined is selected in previous menu.Default: 0.0%Range:353 IxR CompUsrStp 0.0%A0-25% x U NOM (0.1% of resolution)Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43143Profibus slot/index 169/47EtherCAT index (hex)4c47Profinet IO index 19527Fieldbus format Long, 1= 0.1 %Modbus formatEIntNOTE: This menu is visible only in V/Hz mode.106 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

NOTE: A too high level of IxR Compensation could causemotor saturation. This can cause a “Power Fault” trip.The effect of IxR Compensation is stronger with higherpower motors.NOTE: The motor may be overheated at low speed.Therefore it is important that the Motor I 2 t Current [232]is set correctly.Flux Optimization [354]Flux Optimization reduces the energy consumption and themotor noise, at low or no load conditions.Flux Optimization automatically decreases the V/Hz ratio,depending on the actual load of the motor when the processis in a steady situation. Fig. 75 shows the area within whichthe Flux Optimization is active.Maximum power [355]Sets maximum power. Can be used for limiting motorpower in field weakening operation. This function operatesas an upper power limit and internally limits the parameter“Max Torque [351]” according to :Tlimit = Plimit[%] / (Actual Speed / Sync Speed)Default:355 Max PowerStpOffAOff 0 Off. No power limitOff1 - 400 1 - 400 1 - 400% of motor nominal powerNOTE: The maximum possible setting for parameter[355] is limited by I NOM /I MOT x 120%, but not higherthan 400%.354 Flux optimStpDefault: OffOff 0 Function disabledOn 1 Function enabledCommunication informationAOffCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43145Profibus slot/index 169/49EtherCAT index (hex)4c49Profinet IO index 19529Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43144Profibus slot/index 169/48EtherCAT index (hex)4c48Profinet IO index 19528Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt%100UFlux optimizingareaf50 HzFig. 75 Flux OptimizingNOTE: Flux optimization works best at stable situationsin slow changing processes.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 107

11.3.7 Preset References [360]Motor Potentiometer [361]Sets the properties of the motor potentiometer function. Seethe parameter “DigIn1 [521]” for the selection of the motorpotentiometer function.361 Motor PotStp Non VolatieAPreset Ref 1 [362] to Preset Ref 7[368]Preset speeds have priority over the analogue inputs. Presetspeeds are activated by the digital inputs. The digital inputsmust be set to the function Pres. Ref 1, Pres. Ref 2 or Pres.Ref 4.Depending on the number of digital inputs used, up to 7preset speeds can be activated per parameter set. Using allthe parameter sets, up to 28 preset speeds are possible.Default:Volatile 0Non volatile 1Non VolatileAfter a stop, trip or power down, the ACdrive will start always from zero speed (orminimum speed, if selected).Non Volatile. After a stop, trip or powerdown of the AC drive, the reference valueat the moment of the stop will bememorized. After a new start commandthe output speed will resume to this savedvalue.Default: Speed, 0 rpmDependent on: Process Source [321] and Process Unit [322]Speed mode 0 - max speed [343]Torque mode 0 - max torque [351]Other modes362 Preset Ref 1Stp0rpmAMin according to menu [324] - max accordingto menu [325]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43131Profibus slot/index 169/35EtherCAT index (hex)4c3bProfinet IO index 19515Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntMotpotUPnttCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43132–43138Profibus slot/index 169/36–169/42EtherCAT index (hex)4c3c - 4c42Profinet IO index 19516 - 19522Fieldbus formatModbus formatThe same settings are valid for the menus:“[363] Preset Ref 2”, with default 250 rpm“[364] Preset Ref 3”, with default 500 rpm“[365] Preset Ref 4”, with default 750 rpm“[366] Preset Ref 5”, with default 1000 rpm“[367] Preset Ref 6”, with default 1250 rpm“[368] Preset Ref 7”, with default 1500 rpmThe selection of the presets is as in Table 23.Long, 1= 1 rpm, 1 %,1°C or0.001 if ProcessValue/Process Refusing a [322] unitEIntMotpotDOWNFig. 76 MotPot functiont108 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Table 23PresetCtrl3PresetCtrl2PresetCtrl1Output Speed0 0 0 Analogue reference0 0 1 1) Preset Ref 10 1 1) 0 Preset Ref 20 1 1 Preset Ref 31 1) 0 0 Preset Ref 41 0 1 Preset Ref 51 1 0 Preset Ref 61 1 1 Preset Ref 71) = selected if only one preset reference is active1 = active input0 = non active input11.3.8 PI Speed Control [370]The AC drive has an internal speed controller, which is usedto keep the shaft speed equal to the set speed reference. Thisinternal speed controller works without an externalfeedback.With the parameters speed P gain [372] and speed I time[373] the controller can be optimized manually.Speed PI Autotune [371]The function speed autotune will perform a torque stepchange, and measures the reaction on shaft speed.It automatically sets the internal speed I time to its optimumvalue. The speed PI autotune must be done duringoperation with the motor load connected and the motorrunning. “Spd PI Auto” will be flashing in the display duringthe autotune operation. When the test is successfullyconcluded, the display will show “Spd PI OK!” for 3 s.NOTE: If only Preset Ctrl3 is active, then the Preset Ref 4can be selected. If Presets Ctrl2 and 3 are active, thenthe Preset Ref 2, 4 and 6 can be selected.Keyboard reference mode [369]This parameter sets how the reference value [310] is edited.Default:Off 0On 1371 Spd PI AutoStpOffAOffDefault:Normal 0MotPot 1369 Key Ref ModeStpMotPotAMotPotThe reference value is edited as a normalparameter (the new reference value isactivated when Enter is pressed after thevalue has been changed). The “Acc Time[331]” and “Dec Time [332]” are used.The reference value is edited using themotor potentiometer function (the newreference value is activated directly whenthe key + or - is pressed). The “Acc MotPot[333]” and “Dec MotPot [334]” are used.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43151Profibus slot/index 169/55EtherCAT index (hex)4c4fProfinet IO index 19535Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: Run the autotune at speed lower than 80% of thenominal motor speed. Otherwise autotune will fail.NOTE: The setting will automatically return to Off whenthe autotuning is finished.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43139Profibus slot/index 169/43EtherCAT index (hex)4c43Profinet IO index 19523Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: This menu is only visible if AC drive Mode = Speedor V/Hz.NOTE: When Key Ref Mode is set to MotPot, thereference value ramp times are according to the “AccMotPot [333]” and “Dec MotPot [334]” settings. Actualspeed ramp will be limited according to “Acc Time[331]” and “Dec Time [332]”.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 109

Speed P Gain [372]For adjusting the P gain of the internal speed controller. Thespeed P gain must be manually tuned for a faster reaction toload changes. The speed P gain can be increased until thereis audible noise from the motor and then decreased until thenoise disappears.Default:See noteRange: 0.0–60.0Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43152Profibus slot/index 169/56EtherCAT index (hex)4c50Profinet IO index 19536Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1Modbus formatEIntSpeed I Time [373]To adjust the time of the internal speed controller seeparameter Speed PI Autotune [371].Default:Range:372 Spd P GainStpA373 Spd I TimeStp ASee note0.05–100 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43153Profibus slot/index 169/57EtherCAT index (hex)4c51Profinet IO index 19537Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.01 sModbus formatEIntNOTE: The default settings are calculated for a standard4-pole motor without load according to the nominalpower of the AC drive.11.3.9 PID Process Control [380]The PID controller is used to control an external process viaa feedback signal. The reference value can be set via analogueinput AnIn1, at the Control Panel [310] by using a PresetReference, or via serial communication. The feedback signal(actual value) must be connected to an analogue input thatis set to the function Process Value.Process PID Control [381]This function enables the PID controller and defines theresponse to a changed feedback signal.Default:OffOff 0 PID control deactivated.On 1Invert 2Communication informationThe speed increases when the feedbackvalue decreases. PID settings according tomenus [381] to [385].The speed decreases when the feedbackvalue decreases. PID settings according tomenus [383] to [385].Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43154Profibus slot/index 169/58EtherCAT index (hex)4c52Profinet IO index 19538Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntPID P Gain [383]Setting the P gain for the PID controller.Default: 1.0Range: 0.0–30.0381 PID ControlStpAOff383 PID P GainStp 1.0ACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43156Profibus slot/index 169/60EtherCAT index (hex)4c54Profinet IO index 19540Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1Modbus formatEInt110 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

+ProcessreferenceProcessfeedback-ProcessPIDFig. 77 Closed loop PID controlAC driveMProcess06-F95PID sleep functionalityThis function is controlled via a wait delay and a separatewake-up margin condition. With this function it is possibleto put the AC drive in “sleep mode” when the process valueis at it’s set point and the motor is running at minimumspeed for the length of the time set in [386]. By going intosleep mode, the by the application consumed energy isreduced to a minimum. When the process feedback valuegoes below the set margin on the process reference as set in[387], the AC drive will wake up automatically and normalPID operation continues, see examples.PID I Time [384]Setting the integration time for the PID controller.NOTE: When the drive is in Sleep mode, this is indicatedwith “slp” in the lower left corner of the display.Default:Range:1.00 s0.01–300 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43157Profibus slot/index 169/61EtherCAT index (hex)4c55Profinet IO index 19541Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.01 sModbus formatEIntProcess PID D Time [385]Setting the differentiation time for the PID controller.Default:Range:384 PID I TimeStp 1.00sA385 PID D TimeStp 0.00sA0.00 s0.00–30 sPID sleep when less than minimumspeed [386]If the PID output is equal to or less than minimum speedfor given delay time, the AC drive will go to sleep.Default:Range:386 PID

PID Activation Margin [387]The PID activation (wake-up) margin is related to theprocess reference and sets the limit when the AC driveshould wake-up/start again.Default: 0Range:0 –10000 in Process unitCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43372Profibus slot/index 170/21EtherCAT index (hex)4d2cProfinet IO index 19756Fieldbus formatModbus format387 PID Act MargStp0rpmANOTE: The margin is always a positive value.Long, 1= 1 rpm, 1%, 1°C or0.001 if ProcessValue/Process Refusing a [322] unitEIntExample 1 PID control = normal (flow orpressure control)[321] = F (AnIn)[322] = Bar[310] = 20 Bar[342] = 2 s (inactive since [386] is activated and have higherpriority)[381]= On[386] = 10 s[387] = 1 BarThe AC drive will stop/sleep when the speed (PID output) isbelow or equal to Min Speed for 10 seconds. The AC drivewill activate/wake up when the “Process value” goes belowthe PID Activation Margin which is related to the processreference, i.e. goes below (20-1) Bar. See Fig. 78.Example 2 PID control = inverted (tank levelcontrol)[321] = F (AnIn)[322] = m[310] = 7 m[342] = 2 s (inactive since [386] is activated and have higherpriority)[381]= Inverted[386] = 30 s[387] = 1 mThe AC drive will stop/sleep when the speed (PID output) isbelow or equal to Min Speed for 30 seconds. The AC drivewill activate/wake up when the “Process value” goes abovethe PID Activation Margin which is related to the processreference, i.e. goes above (7+1) m. See Fig. 79.[711] Process Value[387][310] Process Ref[712] Speed[386]Stop/Sleep[341] Min SpeedFig. 79 PID Stop/sleep with inverted PIDActivate/Wake up[711] Process Value[387][712] Speed[386][341] Min Speed[310] Process RefStop/SleepActivate/Wake upFig. 78 PID Stop/sleep with normal PID112 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

PID Steady State Test [388]In application situations where the feedback can becomeindependent of the motor speed, this PID Steady Testfunction can be used to overrule the PID operation andforce the AC drive to go in sleep mode i.e. the AC driveautomatically reduces the output speed while at the sametime ensures the process value.Example: pressure controlled pump systems with low/noflow operation and where the process pressure has becomeindependent of the pump speed, e.g. due to slowly closedvalves. By going into Sleep mode, heating of the pump andmotor will be avoided and no energy is spilled.PID Steady state test delay.NOTE: It is important that the system has reached astable situation before the Steady State Test is initiated.Default:Range:388 PID Stdy TstStpOffOffAOff, 0.01–3600 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43373Profibus slot/index 170/22EtherCAT index (hex)4d2dProfinet IO index 19757Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.01 sModbus formatEIntPID Steady State Margin [389]PID steady state margin defines a margin band around thereference that defines “steady state operation”. During thesteady state test the PID operation is overruled and the ACdrive is decreasing the speed as long as the PID error iswithin the steady state margin. If the PID error goes outsidethe steady state margin the test failed and normal PIDoperation continues, see example.Default: 0Range:0–10000 in process unitCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43374Profibus slot/index 170/23EtherCAT index (hex)4d2eProfinet IO index 19758Fieldbus formatModbus format389 PID Stdy MarStp 0ALong, 1= 1 rpm, 1%, 1°C or0.001 if ProcessValue/Process Refusing a [322] unitEIntExample: The PID Steady Test starts when the process value[711] is within the margin and Steady State Test Wait Delayhas expired. The PID output will decrease speed with a stepvalue which corresponds to the margin as long as the Processvalue [711] stays within steady state margin. When MinSpeed [341] is reached the steady state test was successfuland stop/sleep is commanded if PID sleep function[386]and [387] is activated. If the Process value [711] goesoutside the set steady state margins then the testfailed and normal PID operation will continue, see Fig. 80.[711] Process Value[310] Process Ref[389][389][387][388]time[712] SpeedStart steadystate testStop steadystate testNormal PIDNormal PIDSteady statetestStop/Sleep[341] Min Speed [386] PID

11.3.10Pump/Fan Control [390]The Pump Control functions are in menu [390]. Thefunction is used to control a number of drives (pumps, fans,etc.) of which one is always driven by the AC drive.Pump enable [391]This function will enable the pump control to set all relevantpump control functions.Default: OffOff 0 Pump control is switched off.On 1Communication informationPump control is on:- Pump control parameters [392] to [39G]appear and are activated according todefault settings.- View functions [39H] to [39M] are addedin the menu structure.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43161Profibus slot/index 169/65EtherCAT index (hex)4c59Profinet IO index 19545Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNumber of Drives [392]Sets the total number of drives which are used, including theMaster AC drive. The setting here depends on the parameter“Select Drive [393]”. After the number of drives is chosen itis important to set the relays for the pump control. If thedigital inputs are also used for status feedback, these must beset for the pump control according to; Pump 1 OK– Pump6OK in menu [520].Default: 11-3 Number of drives if I/O Board is not used.1-61-7391 Pump enableStpAAOff392 No of DrivesStp 1Number of drives if 'Alternating MASTER' isused, see Select Drive [393]. (I/O Board isused.)Number of drives if 'Fixed MASTER' is used,see Select Drive [393].(I/O Board is used.)Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43162Profibus slot/index 169/66EtherCAT index (hex)4c5aFieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntSelect Drive [393]Sets the main operation of the pump system. 'Sequence' and'Runtime' are Fixed MASTER operation. 'All' meansAlternating MASTER operation.Default:Sequence 0Run Time 1All 2SequenceCommunication information393 Select DriveStpSequenceAFixed MASTER operation:- The additional drives will be selected insequence, i.e. first pump 1 then pump 2etc.- A maximum of 7 drives can be used.Fixed MASTER operation:- The additional drives will be selecteddepending on the Run Time. So the drivewith the lowest Run Time will be selectedfirst. The Run Time is monitored in menus[39H] to [39M] in sequence. For each drivethe Run Time can be reset.- When drives are stopped, the drive withthe longest Run Time will be stopped first.- Maximum 7 drives can be used.Alternating MASTER operation:- When the drive is powered up, one drive isselected as the Master drive. The selectioncriteria depends on the Change Condition[394]. The drive will be selected accordingto the Run Time. So the drive with thelowest Run Time will be selected first. TheRun Time is monitored in menus [39H] to[39M] in sequence. For each drive the RunTime can be reset.- A maximum of 6 drives can be used.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43163Profibus slot/index 169/67EtherCAT index (hex)4c5bProfinet IO index 19547Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatUIntNOTE: This menu will NOT be active if less than 3 drivesare selected.NOTE: Used relays must be defined as Slave Pump orMaster Pump. Used digital inputs must be defined asPump Feedback.114 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Change Condition [394]This parameter determines the criteria for changing themaster. This menu only appears if Alternating MASTERoperation is selected. The elapsed run time of each drive ismonitored. The elapsed run time always determines whichdrive will be the 'new' master drive.This function is only active if the parameter “Select Drive[393]”=All.Default:Stop 0Timer 1Both 2BothACommunication information394 Change CondStpBothThe Runtime of the master drivedetermines when a master drive has to bechanged. The change will only take placeafter a:- Power Up- Stop- Standby condition- Trip condition.The master drive will be changed if thetimer setting in Change Timer [395] haselapsed. The change will take placeimmediately. So during operation theadditional pumps will be stoppedtemporarily, the 'new' master will beselected according to the Run Time and theadditional pumps will be started again.It is possible to leave 2 pumps runningduring the change operation. This can beset with Drives on Change [396].The master drive will be changed if thetimer setting in Change Timer [395] haselapsed. The 'new' master will be selectedaccording to the elapsed Run Time. Thechange will only take place after a:- Power Up- Stop- Standby condition.- Trip condition.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43164Profibus slot/index 169/68EtherCAT index (hex)4c5cProfinet IO index 19548Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntChange Timer [395]When the time set here is elapsed, the master drive will bechanged. This function is only active if “Select Drive[393]”=All and “Change Cond [394]”= Timer/ Both.Default:Range:50 h1-3000 hCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43165Profibus slot/index 169/69EtherCAT index (hex)4c5dProfinet IO index 19549Fieldbus formatUInt, 1=1 hModbus formatUInt, 1=1 hDrives on Change [396]If a master drive is changed according to the timer function(Change Condition=Timer/Both [394]), it is possible toleave additional pumps running during the changeoperation. With this function the change operation will beas smooth as possible. The maximum number to beprogrammed in this menu depends on the number of additional drives.Example:If the number of drives is set to 6, the maximum value willbe 4. This function is only active if “Select Drive [393]”=All.Default: 0395 Change TimerStp50hA396 Drives on ChStp 0ARange: 0 to (the number of drives - 2)Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43166Profibus slot/index 169/70EtherCAT index (hex)4c5eProfinet IO index 19550Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: If the Status feedback inputs (DigIn 9 to Digin 14)are used, the master drive will be changed immediatelyif the feedback generates an 'Error'.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 115

Upper Band [397]If the speed of the master drive comes into the upper band,an additional drive will be added after a delay time that is setin “Start delay [399]”.Default: 10%Range:397 Upper BandStp 10%A0-100% of total min speed to max speedCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43167Profibus slot/index 169/71EtherCAT index (hex)4c5fProfinet IO index 19551Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntExample:Max Speed = 1500 rpmMin Speed = 300 rpmUpper Band = 10%Start delay will be activated:Range = Max Speed to Min Speed = 1500–300 = 1200 rpm10% of 1200 rpm = 120 rpmStart level = 1500–120 = 1380 rpmSpeedMaxMinUpper bandnext pump startsCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43168Profibus slot/index 169/72EtherCAT index (hex)4c60Profinet IO index 19552Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntExample:Max Speed = 1500 rpmMin Speed = 300 rpmLower Band = 10%Stop delay will be activated:Range = Max Speed - Min Speed = 1500–300 = 1200 rpm10% of 1200 rpm = 120 rpmStart level = 300 + 120 = 420 rpmSpeedMaxMinFig. 82 Lower band“top” pump stopsStop Delay [39A]Lower bandFlow/Pressure(NG_50-PC-13_1)Start Delay [399]This delay time must have elapsed before the next pump isstarted. A delay time prevents the nervous switching ofpumps.Start Delay [399]Flow/Pressure(NG_50-PC-12_1)399 Start DelayStpA0sFig. 81 Upper bandLower Band [398]If the speed of the master drive comes into the lower bandan additional drive will be stopped after a delay time. Thisdelay time is set in the parameter “Stop Delay [39A]”.398 Lower BandStp 10%ADefault: 0 sRange: 0-999 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43169Profibus slot/index 169/73EtherCAT index (hex)4c61Profinet IO index 19553Fieldbus format Long, 1=1sModbus formatEIntDefault: 10%Range:0-100% of total min speed to max speed116 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Stop Delay [39A]This delay time must have elapsed before the 'top' pump isstopped. A delay time prevents the nervous switching ofpumps.Default:Range:39A Stop DelayStpA0 s0-999 sCommunication information0sModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43170Profibus slot/index 169/74EtherCAT index (hex)4c62Profinet IO index 19554Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntUpper Band Limit [39B]If the speed of the pump reaches the upper band limit, thenext pump is started immediately without delay. If a startdelay is used this delay will be ignored. Range is between0%, equalling max speed, and the set percentage for the“UpperBand [397]”.39B Upp Band LimStp 0%ALower Band Limit [39C]If the speed of the pump reaches the lower band limit, the'top' pump is stopped immediately without delay. If a stopdelay is used this delay will be ignored. Range is from 0%,equalling min speed, to the set percentage for the “LowerBand [398]”.Default: 0%Range:0 to Lower Band level. 0% (=min speed) meansthat he Limit function is switched off.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43172Profibus slot/index 169/76EtherCAT index (hex)4c64Profinet IO index 19556Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntSpeedMax39C Low Band LimStp 0%A“top” pump stopsimmediatelyDefault: 0%Range:0 to Upper Band level. 0% (=max speed) meansthat the Limit function is switched off.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43171Profibus slot/index 169/75EtherCAT index (hex)4c63Profinet IO index 19555Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntLower bandMinStop Delay [39A]Fig. 84 Lower band limitLower bandlimit [39C]Flow/Pressure(NG_50-PC-15_2)SpeedMaxUpper bandnext pump startsimmediatelyUpper bandlimit [39B]MinFig. 83 Upper band limitStart Delay [399]Flow/Pressure(NG_50-PC-14_2)CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 117

Settle Time Start [39D]The settle start allows the process to settle after a pump isswitched on before the pump control continues. If anadditional pump is started D.O.L. (Direct On Line) or Y/, the flow or pressure can still fluctuate due to the 'rough'start/stop method. This could cause unnecessary startingand stopping of additional pumps.During the Settle start:• PID controller is off.• The speed is kept at a fixed level after adding a pump.Default:Range:39D Settle StartStp0 s0-999 sA0sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43173Profibus slot/index 169/77EtherCAT index (hex)4c65Profinet IO index 19557Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntTransition Speed Start [39E]The transition speed start is used to minimize a flow/pressure overshoot when adding another pump. When anadditional pump needs to be switched on, the master pumpwill slow down to the set transition speed start value, beforethe additional pump is started. The setting depends on thedynamics of both the master drive and the additional drives.The transition speed is best set by trial and error.In general:• If the additional pump has 'slow' start/stop dynamics,then a higher transition speed should be used.• If the additional pump has 'fast' start/stop dynamics,then a lower transition speed should be used.39E TransS StartStp 60%ACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43174Profibus slot/index 169/78EtherCAT index (hex)4c66Profinet IO index 19558Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntNOTE: If set to 100 %, the transition speed, whenstarting pumps, is ignored and no speed adaption ismade.I.e. the slave pump is started directly and speed of themaster pump is maintained.ExampleMax Speed = 1500 rpmMin Speed = 200 rpmTransS Start = 60%When an additional pump is needed, the speed will becontrolled down to min speed + (60% x (1500 rpm - 200rpm)) = 200 rpm + 780 rpm = 980 rpm. When this speed isreached, the additional pump with the lowest run timehours will be switched on.SpeedActualTransMinFig. 85 Transition speed startFlow/PressureSwitch onprocedure startsAdditional pumpMaster pumpActual startcommand of nextpump (RELAY)Transition speeddecreases overshootFlow/Pressure(NG_50-PC-16_1)Default: 60%Range:0-100% of total min speed to max speedFig. 86 Effect of transition speedTime118 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Settle Time Stop [39F]The settle stop allows the process to settle after a pump isswitched off before the pump control continues. If anadditional pump is stopped D.O.L. (Direct On Line) or Y/, the flow or pressure can still fluctuate due to the 'rough'start/stop method. This could cause unnecessary startingand stopping of additional pumps.During the Settle stop:• PID controller is off.• the speed is kept at a fixed level after stopping a pump39F Settle StopStpA0sNOTE: If set to 0 %, the transition speed when stoppingpumps, is ignored and no speed adaption is made.I.e. the slave pump is stopped directly and speed of themaster pump is continued.ExampleMax Speed = 1500 rpmMin Speed = 200 rpmTransS Start = 60%When less additional pumps are needed, the speed will becontrolled up to min speed + (60% x (1500 rpm - 200rpm)) = 200 rpm + 780 rpm = 980 rpm. When this speed isreached, the additional pump with the highest run timehours will be switched off.Default:Range:0 s0–999 sSpeedMaxActual shut down of pumpMaster pumpCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43175Profibus slot/index 169/79EtherCAT index (hex)4c67Profinet IO index 19559Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntTransition Speed Stop [39G]The transition speed stop is used to minimize a flow/pressure overshoot when shutting down an additional pump.The setting depends on the dynamics of both the masterdrive and the additional drives.In general:• If the additional pump has 'slow' start/stop dynamics,then a higher transition speed should be used.• If the additional pump has 'fast' start/stop dynamics,then a lower transition speed should be used.TransActualMinAdditional pumpFlow/PressureSwitch off procedure startsFig. 87 Transition speed stopDefault: 60%39G TransS StopStp 60%ARange:0-100% of total min speed to max speedCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43176Profibus slot/index 169/80EtherCAT index (hex)4c68Profinet IO index 19560Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 119

Run Times 1-6 [39H] to [39M]Unit:h:mm:ss (hours:minutes:seconds)Range: 0:00:00–262143:59:59Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexEtherCAT index (hex)Profinet IO indexFieldbus formatModbus format31051 : 31052 : 31053(hr:min:sec)31054 : 31055: 31056(hr:min:sec)31057 : 31058: 31059(hr:min:sec)31060 : 31061: 31062(hr:min:sec)31063 : 31064: 31065(hr:min:sec)31066 : 31067: 31068(hr:min:sec)121/195, 121/196, 121/197,121/198, 121/199, 121/200,121/201, 121/202, 121/203,121/204, 121/205, 121/206,121/207, 121/208, 121/209,121/210, 121/211, 121/212241b : 241c : 241d241e : 241f : 24202421 : 2422 : 24232424 : 2425 : 24262427 : 2428 : 2429242a : 242b : 242c1051:1052:1053- 1068Long, 1=1h/m/sEIntReset Run Times 1-6 [39H1] to [39M1]Default:No 0Yes 139H Run Time 1Stph:mm:ssA39H1 Rst Run Tm1StpNoANoCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 38–43, pump 1 -6Profibus slot/index 0/37–0/42EtherCAT index (hex)2026 - 202bProfinet IO index 38 - 43Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntPump Status [39N]39N Pump 123456StpOCDIndicationCDOEADescriptionControl, master pump, only when alternatingmaster is usedDirect controlPump is offPump errorCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31069Profibus slot/index 121/213EtherCAT index (hex)242dProfinet IO index 1069Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNumber backup/reserve [39P]Sets the number of pumps used for backup/reserve which innormal conditions can not be selected. This function can beused for increasing redundancy in the pump system byhaving pumps in reserve that can be activated when somepumps indicate fault or are shut off for maintenance.Default: 0Range: 0-339P No of BackupStp 0ACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43177Profibus slot/index 169/81EtherCAT index (hex)4c69Profinet IO index 19561Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt120 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

11.3.11 Crane Option [3A0]Settings for the optional Crane board (Crane Remote Input/Output card). See also the Crane option instruction manual.NOTE: This menu is only visible if the crane board isconnected to the AC drive.Crane enable [3A1]When the crane option board is connected, it is possible to(de)activate the crane option board inputs.NOTE: Deviation function is active even if [3A1]=off.Default:OffOff 0 Crane option board deactivatedOn 1 Crane option board activatedCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43181Profibus slot/index 169/85EtherCAT index (hex)4c6dProfinet IO index 19565Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntControl [3A2]To select the type of crane joystick control.Default:3A1 Crane enableStp4-Speeds4-Speeds 0 4-Speed joystick3-Pos 1 3-Position switchAnalogue 2 Analogue joystickCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43182Profibus slot/index 169/86EtherCAT index (hex)4c6eProfinet IO index 19566Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAOn3A2 ControlStp4-SpeedsACrane Relay CR1 [3A3]Crane Relay CR1 on the Crane option board is fixed to theNo Trip function.Default:SelectionsNo TripFixed to No TripCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43183Profibus slot/index 169/87EtherCAT index (hex)4c6fProfinet IO index 19567Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCrane Relay CR2 [3A4]To select the function of Crane Relay CR2 on the Craneoption board. Same selections as for the relays on the controlboard.Default:SelectionsBrakeCommunication informationSame selections as for the relays on thecontrol boardModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43184Profibus slot/index 169/88EtherCAT index (hex)4c70Profinet IO index 19568Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntPre Limit Switch Speed [3A5]To set the speed used when Pre-Limit Switch on the Craneoption board is active.Default:Range:3A3 Crane Relay1StpNo Trip0 rpmA3A4 Crane Relay2StpBrakeA3A5 PreLimSwSpdStpA0 – 4 x Motor Sync speedrpmCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 121

Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43185Profibus slot/index 169/89EtherCAT index (hex)4c71Profinet IO index 19569Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmCrawl speed H/R [3A6]To set the speed used when crawling (min. speed) during ahoisting operation. Activated with input A1, Crawl H/R=Start in positive speed directionDefault: 0Range:0 – 4 x Sync speedCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43189Profibus slot/index 169/93EtherCAT index (hex)4c75Profinet IO index 19573Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmCrawl speed L/L [3A7]To set the speed used when crawling (min. speed) duringlowering operation. Activated with input A2, Crawl L/L=Start in negative speed direction.Default: 0Range: 0 – 4 x Sync speedCommunication information3A6 CrawlSpd H/RStprpmA3A7 CrawlSpd L/LStprpmAModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43190Profibus slot/index 169/94EtherCAT index (hex)4c76Profinet IO index 19574Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmSpeed 2 [3A8]To set the speed used when the input B1, Speed 2 on theCrane option board is active.Default: 0Range: 0 – 4 x Sync speedCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43186Profibus slot/index 169/90EtherCAT index (hex)4c72Profinet IO index 19570Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmSpeed 3 [3A9]To set the speed used when the input B2, Speed 3 on theCrane option board is active.Default: 0Range:0 – 4 x Motor Sync speedCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43187Profibus slot/index 169/91EtherCAT index (hex)4c73Profinet IO index 19571Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmSpeed 4 [3AA]To set the speed used when the input B3, Speed 4 on theCrane option board is active.Default: 0Range:3A8 Speed 2StpA3A9 Speed 3StpA3AA Speed 4StpA0 – 4 x Motor Sync speedrpmrpmrpmCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43188Profibus slot/index 169/92EtherCAT index (hex)4c74Profinet IO index 19572Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpm122 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Deviation Band width [3AB]To define the speed deviation window within which the ACdrive is in control of the motor.LAFS Load [3AD]To set the load below which the VFB/VFX goes into loaddependent field weakening operation.3AB Dev BandwidtStpArpm3AD LAFS LoadStpAOffDefault: 0Range: 0 – 4 x Sync speedCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43191Profibus slot/index 169/95EtherCAT index (hex)4c77Profinet IO index 19575Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmDeviation Time [3AC]To set the time during which the deviation condition mustbe active, before the inverter trips.Default:Range:3AC Dev. TimeStpA0.10 s0.05 – 1 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43192Profibus slot/index 169/96EtherCAT index (hex)4c78Profinet IO index 19576Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.001 sModbus formatEIntsDefault: OffOff 0 Off1–100 1–100 1% – 100%Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43193Profibus slot/index 169/97EtherCAT index (hex)4c79Profinet IO index 19577Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntWhen set to OFF, the load dependent field weakeningfunction is switched off.CRIO N input function [3AG]Sets the function of CRIO/Crane I/O interface N(Null)input.Default: Zero PosOff 0 N input not usedZero Pos 1Brk Ackn 23AG Crane N FuncStpZero PosAN input used for joystick zero positionindication.N input used for Brake Acknowledge.see page 98.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43194Profibus slot/index 169/98EtherCAT index (hex)4c7aProfinet IO index 19578Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNote: Brake Acknowledge via Crane I/O has priority (andoverrules) Brake acknowledge via control board I/O([521 DigIn1] - [528 Dig In8]).CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 123

11.4 Load Monitor and ProcessProtection [400]11.4.1 Load Monitor [410]The monitor functions enable the AC drive to be used as aload monitor. Load monitors are used to protect machinesand processes against mechanical overload and underload,e.g. a conveyer belt or screw conveyer jamming, belt failureon a fan and a pump dry running. See explanation in sectionFig. 44, page 45.Alarm Select [411]Selects the types of alarms that are active.Default:OffOff 0 No alarm functions active.Min 1Max 2Max+Min 3Communication informationMin Alarm active. The alarm outputfunctions as an underload alarm.Max Alarm active. The alarm outputfunctions as an overload alarm.Both Max and Min alarm are active. Thealarm outputs function as overload andunderload alarms.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43321Profibus slot/index 169/225EtherCAT index (hex)4cf9Profinet IO index 19705Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAlarm Trip [412]Selects which alarm must cause a trip to the AC drive.Default:Off411 Alarm SelectStpOffSelection: Same as in menu [411]A412 Alarm tripStpAOffRamp Alarm [413]This function inhibits the (pre) alarm signals duringacceleration/deceleration of the motor to avoid false alarms.Default:Off 0On 1OffCommunication information(Pre) alarms are inhibited duringacceleration/deceleration.(Pre) alarms active during acceleration/deceleration.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43323Profibus slot/index 169/227EtherCAT index (hex)4cfbProfinet IO index 19707Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAlarm Start Delay [414]This parameter is used if, for example, you want to overridean alarm during the start-up procedure.Sets the delay time after a run command, after which thealarm may be given.• If Ramp Alarm=On. The start delay begins after a RUNcommand.• If Ramp Alarm=Off. The start delay begins after theacceleration ramp.Default:Range:413 Ramp AlarmStp2 s0-3600 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43324Profibus slot/index 169/228EtherCAT index (hex)4cfcProfinet IO index 19708Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntA414 Start DelayStpAOff2sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43322Profibus slot/index 169/226EtherCAT index (hex)4cfaProfinet IO index 19706Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt124 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Load Type [415]In this menu you select monitor type according to the loadcharacteristic of your application. By selecting the requiredmonitor type, the overload and underload alarm functioncan be optimized according to the load characteristic.When the application has a constant load over the wholespeed range, i.e. extruder or screw compressor, the load typecan be set to basic. This type uses a single value as a referencefor the nominal load. This value is used for the completespeed range of the AC drive. The value can be set orautomatically measured. See Autoset Alarm [41A] and“Normal Load [41B]” about setting the nominal loadreference.The load curve mode uses an interpolated curve with 9 loadvalues at 8 equal speed intervals. This curve is populated bya test run with a real load. This can be used with any smoothload curve including constant load.LoadFig. 88Default:Basic 0LoadCurve1BasicCommunication informationLoad curve415 Load TypeStpUses a fixed maximum and minimum loadlevel over the full speed range. Can be usedin situations where the torque isindependent of the speed.Uses the measured actual loadcharacteristic of the process over the speedrange.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43325Profibus slot/index 169/229EtherCAT index (hex)4cfdProfinet IO index 19709Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntABasicMax AlarmBasicMin AlarmSpeedMax Alarm [416]Max Alarm Margin [4161]With load type Basic, [415], used the Max Alarm Marginsets the band above the “Normal Load [41B]” menu thatdoes not generate an alarm. With load type Load Curve[415], used the Max Alarm Margin sets the band above theLoad Curve [41C], that does not generate an alarm. TheMax Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal motortorque.Default: 15%Range: 0–400%Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43326Profibus slot/index 169/230EtherCAT index (hex)4cfeProfinet IO index 19710Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEintMax Alarm delay [4162]When the load level without interruption exceeds the alarmlevel longer than set “Max Alarm delay” time, an alarm isactivated.Default:Range:0.1 s0-90 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43330Profibus slot/index 169/234EtherCAT index (hex)4d02Profinet IO index 19714Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.1 sModbus formatEIntMax Pre Alarm [417]4161 MaxAlarmMarStp 15%A4162 MaxAlarmDelStp 0.1sAMax Pre AlarmMargin [4171]With load type Basic [415], used the Max Pre-Alarm Marginsets the band above the Normal Load, [41B], menu thatdoes not generate a pre-alarm. With load type Load Curve,[415], used the Max Pre-Alarm Margin sets the band abovethe Load Curve, [41C], that does not generate a pre-alarm.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 125

The Max Pre-Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominalmotor torque.Default: 10%Range: 0–400%Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43327Profibus slot/index 169/231EtherCAT index (hex)4cffProfinet IO index 19711Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntMax Pre Alarm delay [4172]When the load level without interruption exceeds the alarmlevel longer than set “Max PreAlarm delay” time, a warningis activated.Default:Range:0.1 s0–90 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43331Profibus slot/index 169/235EtherCAT index (hex)4d03Profinet IO index 19715Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.1 sModbus formatEIntMin Pre Alarm [418]Min Pre Alarm Margin [4181]With load type Basic, [415], used the Min Pre-AlarmMargin sets the band under the Normal Load, [41B], menuthat does not generate a pre-alarm. With load type LoadCurve, [415], used the Min Pre-Alarm Margin sets the bandunder the Load Curve, [41C], that does not generate apre-alarm. The Min Pre-Alarm Margin is a percentage ofnominal motor torque.Default: 10%Range: 0-400%4171 MaxPreAlMarStp 10%A4172 MaxPreAlDelStp 0.1sA4181 MinPreAlMarStp 10%ACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43328Profibus slot/index 169/232EtherCAT index (hex)4d00Profinet IO index 19712Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntMin Pre Alarm Response delay [4182]When the load level without interruption is below the alarmlevel longer than set “Min PreAlarm delay” time, a warningis activated.Default:Range:0.1 s0-90 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43332Profibus slot/index 169/236EtherCAT index (hex)4d04Profinet IO index 19716Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.1 sModbus formatEIntMin Alarm [419]Min Alarm Margin [4191]With load type Basic, [415], used the Min Alarm Marginsets the band under the “Normal Load [41B]”, menu thatdoes not generate an alarm. With load type “Load Curve[415]”, used the Min Alarm Margin sets the band under the“Load Curve [41C]”, that does not generate an alarm. TheMax Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal motortorque.Default: 15%Range: 0-400%Communication information4182 MinPreAlDelStp 0.1sA4191 MinAlarmMarStp 15%AModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43329Profibus slot/index 169/233EtherCAT index (hex)4d01Profinet IO index 19713Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEInt126 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Min Alarm Response delay [4192]When the load level without interruption is below the alarmlevel longer than set “Min Alarm delay” time, an alarm isactivated.4192 MinAlarmDelStp 0.1sAThe default set levels for the (pre)alarms are:OverloadMax Alarm menu [4161] + [41B]Max Pre Alarm menu [4171] + [41B]UnderloadMin Pre Alarm menu [41B] - [4181]Min Alarm menu [41B] - [4191]Default:Range:0.1 s0-90 sThese default set levels can be manually changed in menus[416] to [419]. After execution the message “Autoset OK!” isdisplayed for 1s and the selection reverts to “No”.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43333Profibus slot/index 169/237EtherCAT index (hex)4d05Profinet IO index 19717Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.1 sModbus formatEIntAutoset Alarm [41A]The Autoset Alarm function can measure the nominal loadthat is used as reference for the alarm levels. If the selected“Load Type [415]” is Basic it copies the load the motor isrunning with to the menu “Normal Load [41B]”. Themotor must run on the speed that generates the load thatneeds to be recorded. If the selected “Load Type [415]” isLoad Curve it performs a test-run and populates the “LoadCurve [41C]” with the found load values.WARNING!When autoset does a test run the motor andapplication/machine will ramp up tomaximum speed.NOTE: The motor must be running for the Autoset Alarmfunction to succeed. A not running motor generates a“Failed!” message.Default:No 0Yes 141A AutoSet AlrmStpNoCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43334Profibus slot/index 169/238EtherCAT index (hex)4d06Profinet IO index 19718Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntANoNormal Load [41B]Set the level of the normal load. The alarm or pre alarm willbe activated when the load is above/under normal load ±margin.Default: 100%Range:0-400% of max torqueNOTE: 100% Torque means: I NOM = I MOT . The maximumdepends on the motor current and AC drive max currentsettings, but the absolute maximum adjustment is400%.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43335Profibus slot/index 169/239EtherCAT index (hex)4d07Profinet IO index 19719Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntLoad Curve [41C]The load curve function can be used with any smooth loadcurve. The curve can be populated with a test-run or thevalues can be entered or changed manually.Load Curve 1-9 [41C1]-[41C9]The measured load curve is based on 9 stored samples. Thecurve starts at minimum speed and ends at maximum speed,the range in between is divided into 8 equal steps. Themeasured values of each sample are displayed in [41C1] to[41C9] and can be adapted manually. The value of the 1stsampled value on the load curve is displayed.Default: 100%Range:41B Normal LoadStp 100%A41C1 Load Curve1Stp 0rpm 100%A0–400% of max torqueCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 127

Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexEtherCAT index (hex)Profinet IO indexFieldbus formatModbus format43336%, 43337 rpm,43338 %, 43339 rpm,43340 %, 43341 rpm,43342 %, 43343 rpm,43344 %, 43345 rpm,43346 %, 43347 rpm,43348 %, 43349 rpm,43350 %, 43351 rpm,43352 %, 43353 rpm169/240, 169/242, 169/244, 169/246, 169/248,169/250, 169/252, 169/254, 170/14d08 %, 4d09 rpm,4d0a %, 4d0b rpm,4d0c %, 4d0d rpm,4d0e %, 4d0f rpm,4d10 %, 4d11 rpm,4d12 %, 4d13 rpm,4d14 %, 4d15 rpm,4d16 %, 4d17 rpm,4d18 %, 4d19 rpm19720 %, 19721 rpm,19722 %, 19723 rpm,19724 %, 19725 rpm,19726 %, 19727 rpm,19728 %, 19729 rpm,19730 %, 19731 rpm,19732 %, 19733 rpm,19734 %, 19735 rpm,19736 %, 19738 rpm,Long, 1= 1 %,Int 1=1 rpmEIntNOTE: The speed values depend on the Min- and MaxSpeed values. they are read only and cannot bechanged.11.4.2 Process Protection [420]Submenu with settings regarding protection functions forthe AC drive and the motor.Low Voltage Override [421]If a dip in the mains supply occurs and the low voltageoverride function is enabled, the AC drive will automaticallydecrease the motor speed to keep control of the applicationand prevent an under voltage trip until the input voltagerises again. Therefore the rotating energy in the motor/loadis used to keep the DC link voltage level at the override level,for as long as possible or until the motor comes to astandstill. This is dependent on the inertia of the motor/loadcombination and the load of the motor at the time the dipoccurs, see Fig. 90.Default: OnOff 0 At a voltage dip the low voltage trip will protect.On 1421 Low Volt ORStpAAt mains dip, AC drive ramps down untilvoltage rises.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43361Profibus slot/index 170/10EtherCAT index (hex)4d21Profinet IO index 19745Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntOnDC link voltageMin-Max alarm tolerance band graph1Min SpeedMax SpeedOverridelevelLow Volt.level0.5SpeedtFig. 8900 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1SpeedMeasured load samplesMin-max tolerance bandMax alarm limitMin alarm limit(06-F60new)Fig. 90 Low voltage overrideNOTE: During the low voltage override the LED trip/limitblinks.t128 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Rotor locked [422]With the rotor locked function enabled, the AC drive willprotect the motor and application when this is stalled whilstincreasing the motor speed from standstill. This protectionwill coast the motor to stop and indicate a fault when theTorque Limit has been active at very low speed for morethan 5 seconds.Default: OffOff 0 No detectionOn 1Communication information422 Rotor lockedStpOffAC drive will trip when locked rotor isdetected. Trip message “Locked Rotor”.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43362Profibus slot/index 170/11EtherCAT index (hex)4d22Profinet IO index 19746Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAMotor lost [423]With the motor lost function enabled, the AC drive is ableto detect a fault in the motor circuit: motor, motor cable,thermal relay or output filter. Motor lost will cause a trip,and the motor will coast to standstill, when a missing motorphase is detected during a period of 5 s.Overvolt control [424]Used to switch off the overvoltage control function whenonly braking by brake chopper and resistor is required. Theovervoltage control function, limits the braking torque sothat the DC link voltage level is controlled at a high, butsafe, level. This is achieved by limiting the actualdeceleration rate during stopping. In case of a defect at thebrake chopper or the brake resistor the AC drive will trip for“Overvoltage” to avoid a fall of the load e.g. in craneapplications.NOTE: Overvoltage control should not be activated ifbrake chopper is used.Default: OnOn 0 Overvoltage control activatedOff 1 Overvoltage control offCommunication information424 Over Volt CtlStpOnAModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43364Profibus slot/index 170/13EtherCAT index (hex)4d24Profinet IO index 19748Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt423 Motor lostStpAOffDefault:Off 0Trip 1Start 2OffFunction switched off to be used if nomotor or very small motor connected.AC drive will trip when the motor isdisconnected. Trip message “Motor Lost”.Test for disconnected motor will only beperformed during start routine.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43363Profibus slot/index 170/12EtherCAT index (hex)4d23Profinet IO index 19747Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 129

11.5 I/Os and VirtualConnections [500]Main menu with all the settings of the standard inputs andoutputs of the AC drive.11.5.1 Analogue Inputs [510]Submenu with all settings for the analogue inputs.AnIn1 Function [511]Sets the function for Analogue input 1. Scale and range aredefined by AnIn1 Advanced settings [513].Default: Process RefOff 0 Input is not activeMax Speed 1 The input acts as an upper speed limit.Max Torque 2 The input acts as an upper torque limit.Process Val 3Communication information511 AnIn1 FcStp Process RefAThe input value equals the actual processvalue (feedback) and is compared to thereference signal (set point) by the PIDcontroller, or can be used to display andview the actual process value.Reference value is set for control inProcess Ref 4 process units, see Process Source [321]and Process Unit [322].Min Speed 5 The input acts as a lower speed limit.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43201Profibus slot/index 169/105EtherCAT index (hex)4c81Profinet IO index 19585Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: When AnInX Func=Off, the connected signal willstill be available for Comparators [610].Adding analogue inputsIf more than one analogue input is set to the same function,the values of the inputs can be added together. In thefollowing examples we assume that Process Source [321] isset to Speed.Example 1: Add signals with different weight (fine tuning).Signal on AnIn1 = 10 mASignal on AnIn2 = 5 mA[511] AnIn1 Function = Process Ref.[512] AnIn1 Setup = 4-20 mA[5134] AnIn1 Function Min = Min (0 rpm)[5136] AnIn1 Function Max = Max (1500 rpm)[5138] AnIn1 Operation = Add+[514] AnIn2 Function = Process Ref.[515] AnIn2 Setup = 4-20 mA[5164] AnIn2 Function Min = Min (0 rpm)[5166] AnIn2 Function Max = User defined[5167] AnIn2 Value Max = 300 rpm[5168] AnIn2 Operation = Add+Calculation:AnIn1 = (10-4) / (20-4) x (1500-0) + 0 = 562.5 rpmAnIn2 = (5-4) / (20-4) x (300-0) + 0 = 18.75 rpmThe actual process reference will be:+562.5 + 18.75 = 581 rpmAnalogue Input Selection via Digital Inputs:When two different external Reference signals are used,e.g. 4-20mA signal from control centre and a 0-10 V locallymounted potentiometer, it is possible to switch betweenthese two different analogue input signals via a Digital Inputset to “AnIn Select”.AnIn1 is 4-20 mAAnIn2 is 0-10 VDigIn3 is controlling the AnIn selection; HIGH is 4-20 mA,LOW is 0-10 V“[511] AnIn1 Fc” = Process Ref;set AnIn1 as reference signal input“[512] AnIn1 Setup” = 4-20mA;set AnIn1 for a current reference signal“[513A] AnIn1 Enabl” = DigIn;set AnIn1 to be active when DigIn3 is HIGH“[514] AnIn2 Fc” = Process Ref;set AnIn2 as reference signal input“[515] AnIn2 Setup” = 0-10V;set AnIn2 for a voltage reference signal“[516A] AnIn2 Enabl” = !DigIn;set AnIn2 to be active when DigIn3 is LOW“[523] DigIn3=AnIn”;set DIgIn3 as input fot selection of AI referenceSubtracting analogue inputsExample 2: Subtract two signalsSignal on AnIn1 = 8 VSignal on AnIn2 = 4 V[511] AnIn1 Function = Process Ref.[512] AnIn1 Setup = 0-10 V[5134] AnIn1 Function Min = Min (0 rpm)[5136] AnIn1 Function Max = Max (1500 rpm)[5138] AnIn1 Operation = Add+[514] AnIn2 Function = Process Ref.[515] AnIn2 Setup = 0-10 V[5164] AnIn2 Function Min = Min (0 rpm)[5166] AnIn2 Function Max = Max (1500 rpm)[5168] AnIn2 Operation = Sub-130 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Calculation:AnIn1 = (8-0) / (10-0) x (1500-0) + 0 = 1200 rpmAnIn2 = (4-0) / (10-0) x (1500-0) + 0 = 600 rpmThe actual process reference will be:+1200 - 600 = 600 rpmAnIn1 Setup [512]The analogue input setup is used to configure the analogueinput in accordance with the signal used that will beconnected to the analogue input. With this selection theinput can be determined as current (4-20 mA) or voltage(0-10 V) controlled input. Other selections are available forusing a threshold (live zero), a bipolar input function, or auser defined input range. With a bipolar input referencesignal, it is possible to control the motor in two directions.See Fig. 91.NOTE: For bipol function, input RunR and RunL needs tobe active and Rotation, [219] must be set to “R+L”.NOTE: Always check the needed set up when the settingof S1 is changed; selection will not adapt automatically.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43202Profibus slot/index 169/106EtherCAT index (hex)4c82Profinet IO index 19586Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntSpeedn100 %NOTE: The selection of voltage or current input is donewith S1. When the switch is in voltage mode only thevoltage menu items are selectable. With the switch incurrent mode only the current menu items areselectable.512 AnIn1 SetupStp4-20mAA-10 V010 V20 mADefault:Dependent on4–20mA 00–20mA 1User mA 2User BipolmA30–10V 42–10V 5User V 6User BipolV74-20 mASetting of switch S1The current input has a fixed threshold(Live Zero) of 4 mA and controls the fullrange for the input signal. See Fig. 93.Normal full current scale configuration ofthe input that controls the full range for theinput signal. See Fig. 92.The scale of the current controlled input,that controls the full range for the inputsignal. Can be defined by the advancedAnIn Min and AnIn Max menus.Sets the input for a bipolar current input,where the scale controls the range for theinput signal. Scale can be defined inadvanced menu AnIn Bipol.Normal full voltage scale configuration ofthe input that controls the full range for theinput signal. See Fig. 92.The voltage input has a fixed threshold(Live Zero) of 2 V and controls the full rangefor the input signal. See Fig. 93.The scale of the voltage controlled input,that controls the full range for the inputsignal. Can be defined by the advancedAnIn Min and AnIn Max menus.Sets the input for a bipolar voltage input,where the scale controls the range for theinput signal. Scale can be defined inadvanced menu AnIn Bipol.Fig. 91100 %n100 %Fig. 92 Normal full-scale configuration(NG_06-F21)0–10 V0–20 mARef0 10 V20mA(NG_06-F21)CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 131

100 %n2–10 V4–20 mACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43204Profibus slot/index 169/108EtherCAT index (hex)4c84Profinet IO index 19588Fieldbus formatModbus formatLong, 1=0.01 mA,0.01 VEInt0 2 V4mAFig. 93 2–10 V/4–20 mA (Live Zero)10 V2 0mARefSpecial function: Inverted reference signalIf the AnIn minimum value is higher than the AnInmaximum value, the input will act as an inverted referenceinput, see Fig. 94.AnIn1 Advanced [513]nNOTE: The different menus will automatically be set toeither “mA” or “V”, based on the selection in AnIn 1Setup [512].100 %InvertAnIn Min >AnIn MaxAnIn1 Min [5131]Parameter to set the minimum value of the externalreference signal. Only visible if [512] = User mA/V.Default:Range:0 V/4.00 mA0.00–20.00 mA0–10.00 VCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43203Profibus slot/index 169/107EtherCAT index (hex)4c83Profinet IO index 19587Fieldbus formatModbus format513 AnIn1 AdvanStp A5131 AnIn1 MinStp 0V/4.00mAALong, 1=0.01 mA,0.01 VEIntAnIn1 Max [5132]Parameter to set the maximum value of the externalreference signal. Only visible if [512] = User mA/V.5132 AnIn1 MaxStp 10.0V/20.00mAFig. 94 Inverted referenceAnIn1 Bipol [5133]This menu is automatically displayed if AnIn1 Setup is set toUser Bipol mA or User Bipol V. The window willautomatically show mA or V range according to selectedfunction. The range is set by changing the positivemaximum value; the negative value is automatically adaptedaccordingly. Only visible if [512] = User Bipol mA/V. Theinputs RunR and RunL input need to be active, and“Rotation [219]”, must be set to “R+L”, to operate thebipolar function on the analogue input.Default:Range:0 1 0 V10.00 V/20.00 mA0.0–20.0 mA, 0.00–10.00 VCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43205Profibus slot/index 169/109EtherCAT index (hex)4c85Profinet IO index 19589Fieldbus formatModbus formatRef5133 AnIn1 BipolStp 10.00V/20.00mAALong, 1=0.01 mA,0.01 VEInt(NG_06-F25)Default: 10.00 V/20.00 mARange:0.00–20.00 mA0–10.00 V132 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

AnIn1 Function Min [5134]With AnIn1 Function Min the physical minimum value isscaled to selected process unit. The default scaling isdependent of the selected function of AnIn1 [511].Default:MinMin 0 Min valueMax 1 Max valueUserdefined2 Define user value in menu [5135]Table 24 shows corresponding values for the min and maxselections depending on the function of the analogue input[511].Table 24AnIn Function Min MaxSpeed Min Speed [341] Max Speed [343]Torque 0% Max Torque [351]Process Ref Process Min [324] Process Max [325]Process Value Process Min [324] Process Max [325]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43206Profibus slot/index 169/110EtherCAT index (hex)4c86Profinet IO index 19590Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAnIn1 Function Value Min [5135]With AnIn1 Function ValMin you define a user-definedvalue for the signal. Only visible when user-defined isselected in menu [5134].Default: 0.0005134 AnIn1 FcMinStpMinRange: -10000.000 – 10000.000A5135 AnIn1 VaMinStp 0.000ACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43541Profibus slot/index 170/190EtherCAT index (hex)4dd5Profinet IO index 19925Fieldbus formatModbus formatAnIn1 Function Max [5136]With AnIn1 Function Max the physical maximum value isscaled to selected process unit. The default scaling isdependent of the selected function of AnIn1 [511]. SeeTable 24.Communication informationLong, 1=1 rpm, 1 %, 1°or 0.001 if Process Value/Process Ref using a [322]unitEIntDefault:MaxMin 0 Min valueMax 1 Max valueUser-defined 2 Define user value in menu [5137]Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43207Profibus slot/index 169/111EtherCAT index (hex)4c87Profinet IO index 19591Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAnIn1 Function Value Max [5137]With AnIn1 Function VaMax you define a user-definedvalue for the signal. Only visible when user-defined isselected in menu [5136].Default: 0.0005136 AnIn1 FcMaxStpMaxRange: -10000.000 – 10000.000A5137 AnIn1 VaMaxStp 0.000ACG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 133

Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43551Profibus slot/index 170/200EtherCAT index (hex)4ddfProfinet IO index 19935Fieldbus formatModbus formatExample:Process sensor is a sensor with the following specification:Range: 0–3 barOutput: 2–10 mAAnalogue input should be set up according to:[512] AnIn1 Setup = User mA[5131] AnIn1 Min = 2 mA[5132] AnIn1 Max = 10 mA[5134] AnIn1 Function Min = User-defined[5135] AnIn1 VaMin = 0.000 bar[5136] AnIn 1 Function Max = User-defined[5137] AnIn1 VaMax = 3.000 barAnIn1 Operation [5138]Long, 1=1 rpm, 1 %, 1°or 0.001 if Process Value/Process Ref using a [322]unitEIntNOTE: With AnIn Min, AnIn Max, AnIn Function Min andAnIn Function Max settings, loss of feedback signals(e.g. voltage drop due to long sensor wiring) can becompensated to ensure an accurate process control.AnIn1 Filter [5139]If the input signal is unstable (e.g. fluctuation referencevalue), the filter can be used to stabilize the signal. A changeof the input signal will reach 63% on AnIn1 within the setAnIn1 Filter time. After 5 times the set time, AnIn1 willhave reached 100% of the input change. See Fig. 95.Default:Range:Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43209Profibus slot/index 169/113EtherCAT index (hex)4c89Profinet IO index 19593Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.001 sModbus formatEIntAnIn change100%63%5139 AnIn1 FiltStp 0.1sA0.1 s0.001 – 10.0 sOriginal input signalFiltered AnIn signal5138 AnIn1 OperStpAAdd+Default:Add+ 0Sub- 1Add+Communication informationAnalogue signal is added to selectedfunction in menu [511].Analogue signal is subtracted fromselected function in menu [511].Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43208Profibus slot/index 169/112EtherCAT index (hex)4c88Profinet IO index 19592Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntFig. 95AnIn1 Enable [513A]Parameter for enable/disable analogue input selection viadigital inputs (DigIn set to function AnIn Select).Default:OnOn 0 AnIn1 is always activeT5 X T513A AnIn1 EnablStpAOn!DigIn 1 AnIn1 is only active if the digital input is low.DigIn 2 AnIn1 is only active if the digital input is high.134 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43210Profibus slot/index 169/114EtherCAT index (hex)4c8aProfinet IO index 19594Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAnIn2 Function [514]Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2.Same function as “AnIn1 Fc [511]”.514 AnIn2 FcStpDefault: OffSelection: Same as in menu [511]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43211Profibus slot/index 169/115EtherCAT index (hex)4c8bProfinet IO index 19595Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAnIn2 Setup [515]Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2.Same functions as “AnIn1 Setup [512]”.ADefault: 4 – 20 mADependent on Setting of switch S2Selection: Same as in menu [512].Communication informationOff515 AnIn2 SetupStp4-20mAModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43212Profibus slot/index 169/116EtherCAT index (hex)4c8cProfinet IO index 19596Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexEtherCAT index (hex)Profinet IO indexFieldbus formatModbus formatAnIn3 Function [517]Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 3.Same function as “AnIn1 Fc [511]”.Communication informationAnIn3 Setup [518]Same functions as “AnIn1 Setup [512]”.43213–43220,43542,43552169/117–124,170/191,170/2014c8d - 4c94,4dd6,4de0Default: OffSelection: Same as in menu [511]19597-19604,19926,19936See [5131] - [5137].Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43221Profibus slot/index 169/125EtherCAT index (hex)4c95Profinet IO index 19605Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntDefault:517 AnIn3 FcStp4–20 mADependent on Setting of switch S3Selection: Same as in menu [512].AOff518 AnIn3 SetupStp4-20mAAAnIn2 Advanced [516]Same functions and submenus as under “AnIn1 Advan[513]”.516 AnIn2 AdvanStp ACG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 135

Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43222Profibus slot/index 169/126EtherCAT index (hex)4c96Profinet IO index 19606Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAnIn3 Advanced [519]Same functions and submenus as under “AnIn1 Advan[513]”.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexEtherCAT index (hex)Profinet IO indexFieldbus formatModbus format519 AnIn3 AdvanStp AAnIn4 Function [51A]Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 4.Same function as “AnIn1 Fc [511].”51A AnIn4 FcStpDefault: OffSelection: Same as in menu [511]A43223–43230,43543,43553169/127–169/134,170/192,170/2024c97 - 4c9e,4dd7,4de119607-19614,19927,19937See [5131] - [5137].OffAnIn4 Set-up [51B]Same functions as “AnIn1 Setup [512]”.Default:4-20 mADependent on Setting of switch S4Selection: Same as in menu [512].Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43232Profibus slot/index 169/136EtherCAT index (hex)4ca0Profinet IO index 19616Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAnIn4 Advanced [51C]Same functions and submenus as under “AnIn1Advan[513]”.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexEtherCAT index (hex)Profinet IO indexFieldbus formatModbus format51B AnIn4 SetupStp4-20mAA51C AnIn4 AdvanStp A43233–43240,43544,43554169/137–144,170/193,170/2034ca1 - 4ca8,4dd8,4de219617-19624,19928,19938See [5131] - [5137].Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43231Profibus slot/index 169/135EtherCAT index (hex)4c9fProfinet IO index 19615Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt136 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

11.5.2 Digital Inputs [520]Submenu with all the settings for the digital inputs.NOTE: Additional inputs will become available when theI/O option boards are connected.Digital Input 1 [521]To select the function of the digital input.On the standard control board there are eight digital inputs.If the same function is programmed for more than one inputthat function will be activated according to “OR” logic ifnothing else is stated.Default: RunLOff 0 The input is not active.Lim Switch+ 1Lim Switch - 2Ext. Trip 3Stop 4Enable 5RunR 6RunL 7521 DigIn 1StpARunLAC drive ramps to stop and preventsrotation in “R” direction (clockwise), whenthe signal is low!NOTE: The Lim Switch+ is active low.NOTE: Activated according to “AND” logic.AC drive ramps to stop and preventsrotation in “L” direction (counter clockwise)when the signal is low!NOTE: The Lim Switch- is active low.NOTE: Activated according to “AND” logic.Be aware that if there is nothing connectedto the input, the AC drive will trip at“External trip” immediately.NOTE: The External Trip is active low.NOTE: Activated according to “AND” logic.Stop command according to the selectedStop mode in menu [33B].NOTE: The Stop command is active low.NOTE: Activated according to “AND” logic.Enable command. General start conditionto run the AC drive. If made low duringrunning the output of the AC drive is cut offimmediately, causing the motor to coast tozero speed.NOTE: If none of the digital inputs areprogrammed to “Enable”, the internalenable signal is active.NOTE: Activated according to “AND” logic.Run Right command (positive speed). Theoutput of the AC drive will be aclockwise rotary field.Run Left command (negative speed). Theoutput of the AC drive will be acounter-clockwise rotary field.Reset command. To reset a Trip conditionReset 9and to enable the Autoreset function.Preset Ctrl1 10 To select the Preset Reference.Preset Ctrl2 11 To select the Preset Reference.Preset Ctrl3 12 To select the Preset Reference.MotPot Up 13MotPotDownPump1FeedbPump2FeedbPump3FeedbPump4FeedbPump5FeedbPump6FeedbTimer 1Timer 2Set Ctrl 1Set Ctrl 21415161718192021222324Mot PreMag 25Jog 26Ext MotTempLoc/Rem2728AnIn select 29LC Level 30Increases the internal reference valueaccording to the set AccMotPot time [333].Has the same function as a “real” motorpotentiometer, see Fig. 76.Decreases the internal reference valueaccording to the set DecMotPot time[334]. See MotPot Up.Feedback input pump1 for Pump/Fancontrol and informs about the status of theauxiliary connected pump/fan.Feedback input pump 2 for Pump/Fancontrol and informs about the status of theauxiliary connected pump/fan.Feedback input pump3 for Pump/Fancontrol and informs about the status of theauxiliary connected pump/fan.Feedback input pump 4 for Pump/Fancontrol and informs about the status of theauxiliary connected pump/fan.Feedback input pump5 for Pump/Fancontrol and informs about the status of theauxiliary connected pump/fan.Feedback input pump 6 for Pump/Fancontrol and informs about the status of theauxiliary connected pump/fan.Timer 1 Delay [643] will be activated on therising edge of this signal.Timer 2 Delay [653] will be activated on therising edge of this signal.Activates other parameter set. See Table25 for selection possibilities.Activates other parameter set. See Table25 for selection possibilities.Pre-magnetises the motor. Used for fastermotor start.To activate the Jog function. Gives a Runcommand with the set Jog speed andDirection, page 105.Be aware that if there is nothing connectedto the input, the AC drive will trip at“External Motor Temp” immediately.NOTE: The External Motor Temp is activelow.Activate local mode defined in [2171] and[2172].Activate/deactivate analogue inputsdefined in [513A], [516A], [519A] and[51CA]Liquid cooling low level signal.NOTE: The Liquid Cooling Level is activelow.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 137

Brk Ackn 31Communication informationBrake acknowledge input for Brake Faultcontrol. Function is activated via thisselection see menu [33H] page 101NOTE: For bipol function, input RunR and RunL needs tobe active and “Rotation [219]” must be set to “R+L”.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43241Profibus slot/index 169/145EtherCAT index (hex)4ca9Profinet IO index 19625Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAdditional digital inputs [529] to [52H]Additional digital inputs with I/O option board installed,“B1 DigIn 1 [529]” - “B3 DigIn 3 [52H]”. B stands forboard and 1 to 3 is the number of the board which is relatedto the position of the I/O option board on the optionmounting plate. The functions and selections are the same as“DigIn 1 [521]”.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43501–43509Profibus slot/index 170/150–170/158EtherCAT index (hex)4dad - 4db5Profinet IO index 19885 - 19893Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntTable 25Parameter Set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2A 0 0B 1 0C 0 1D 1 1NOTE: To activate the parameter set selection, menu241 must be set to DigIn.Digital Input 2 [522] to Digital Input 8[528]Same function as “DigIn 1[521]”. Default function forDigIn 8 is Reset. For DigIn 3 to 7 the default function isOff.522 DigIn 2StpARunRDefault: RunRSelection: Same as in menu [521]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43242 – 43248Profibus slot/index 169/146 – 169/152EtherCAT index (hex)4caa - 4cb0Profinet IO index 19626 - 19632Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt138 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

11.5.3 Analogue Outputs [530]Submenu with all settings for the analogue outputs.Selections can be made from application and AC drivevalues, in order to visualize actual status. Analogue outputscan also be used as a mirror of the analogue input. Such asignal can be used as:• a reference signal for the next AC drive in a Master/Slaveconfiguration (see Fig. 96).• a feedback acknowledgement of the received analoguereference value.AnOut1 Function [531]Sets the function for the Analogue Output 1. Scale andrange are defined by AnOut1 Advanced settings [533].Default:SpeedProcess Val 0Actual process value according toProcess feedback signal.Speed 1 Actual speed.Torque 2 Actual torque.Process Ref 3 Actual process reference value.Shaft Power 4 Actual shaft power.Frequency 5 Actual frequency.Current 6 Actual current.El power 7 Actual electrical power.Output volt 8 Actual output voltage.DC-voltage 9 Actual DC link voltage.AnIn1 10AnIn2 11AnIn3 12AnIn4 13Speed Ref 14Torque Ref 15531 AnOut1 FcStpASpeedMirror of received signal value onAnIn1.Mirror of received signal value onAnIn2.Mirror of received signal value onAnIn3.Mirror of received signal value onAnIn4.Actual internal speed reference Valueafter ramp and V/Hz.Actual torque reference value(=0 in V/Hz mode)NOTE: When selections AnIn1, AnIn2 …. AnIn4 isselected, the setup of the AnOut (menu [532] or [535])has to be set to 0-10V or 0-20mA. When the AnOut Setupis set to e.g. 4-20mA, the mirroring is not workingcorrect.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43251Profibus slot/index 169/155EtherCAT index (hex)4cb3Profinet IO index 19635Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAnOut 1 Setup [532]Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration.Default:4–20mA 00–20mA 1User mA 2User BipolmA30-10V 42–10V 5User V 6User Bipol V 74-20mACommunication information532 AnOut1 SetupStp4-20mAAThe current output has a fixed threshold(Live Zero) of 4 mA and controls the fullrange for the output signal. See Fig. 93.Normal full current scale configuration ofthe output that controls the full range forthe output signal. See Fig. 92.The scale of the current controlled outputthat controls the full range for the outputsignal. Can be defined by the advancedAnOut Min and AnOut Max menus.Sets the output for a bipolar currentoutput, where the scale controls therange for the output signal. Scale can bedefined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol.Normal full voltage scale configuration ofthe output that controls the full range forthe output signal. See Fig. 92.The voltage output has a fixed threshold(Live Zero) of 2 V and controls the fullrange for the output signal. See Fig. 93.The scale of the voltage controlled outputthat controls the full range for the outputsignal. Can be defined by the advancedAnOut Min and AnOut Max menus.Sets the output for a bipolar voltageoutput, where the scale controls therange for the output signal. Scale can bedefined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43252Profibus slot/index 169/156EtherCAT index (hex)4cb4Profinet IO index 19636Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 139

Ref.AnOutAC drive 1MasterRef.,AC drive 2SlaveAnOut1 Max [5332]This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA orUser V is selected in menu “AnOut1 Setup [532]”. Themenu will automatically adapt to current or voltage setting according to the selected setup. Only visible if [532] = UsermA/V.Fig. 96AnOut1 Advanced [533]With the functions in the AnOut1 Advanced menu, theoutput can be completely defined according to theapplication needs. The menus will automatically be adaptedto “mA” or “V”, according to the selection in “AnOut1Setup [532]”.AnOut1 Min [5331]This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA orUser V is selected in menu “AnOut 1 Setup [532]”. Themenu will automatically adapt to current or voltage settingaccording to the selected setup. Only visible if [532] = UsermA/V.Default:Range:4 mA0.00 – 20.00 mA, 0 – 10.00 VCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43253Profibus slot/index 169/157EtherCAT index (hex)4cb5Profinet IO index 19637Fieldbus formatModbus format533 AnOut 1 AdvStp A5331 AnOut 1 MinStp4mAALong, 1=0.01 V,0.01 mAEIntDefault:Range:20.00 mACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43254Profibus slot/index 169/158EtherCAT index (hex)4cb6Profinet IO index 19638Fieldbus formatModbus formatAnOut1 Bipol [5333]Automatically displayed if User Bipol mA or User Bipol V isselected in menu AnOut1 Setup. The menu willautomatically show mA or V range according to the selectedfunction. The range is set by changing the positivemaximum value; the negative value is automatically adaptedaccordingly. Only visible if [512] = User Bipol mA/V.Default:Range:Communication information0.00–20.00 mA, 0–10.00 VLong, 1=0.01 V,0.01 mAEInt-10.00–10.00 V-10.00–10.00 V, -20.0–20.0 mAModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43255Profibus slot/index 169/159EtherCAT index (hex)4cb7Profinet IO index 19639Fieldbus formatModbus format5332 AnOut 1 MaxStp20.0mAA5333 AnOut1BipolStp -10.00-10.00VALong, 1=0.01 V,0.01 mAEInt140 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

AnOut1 Function Min [5334]With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value isscaled to selected presentation. The default scaling isdependent of the selected function of “AnOut1 [531]”.Default:MinMin 0 Min valueMax 1 Max valueUser-defined 2 Define user value in menu [5335]Table 26 shows corresponding values for the min and maxselections depending on the function of the analogue output[531].Table 26AnOutFunctionMin Value*) Fmin is dependent on the set value in menu“Minimum Speed [341]”.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43256Profibus slot/index 169/160EtherCAT index (hex)4cb8Profinet IO index 19640Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntMax ValueProcess Value Process Min [324] Process Max [325]Speed Min Speed [341] Max Speed [343]Torque 0% Max Torque [351]Process Ref Process Min [324] Process Max [325]Shaft Power 0% Motor Power [223]Frequency Fmin * Motor Frequency [222]Current 0 A Motor Current [224]El Power 0 W Motor Power [223]Output Voltage 0 V Motor Voltage [221]DC voltage 0 V 1000 VAnIn1AnIn2AnIn3AnIn45334 AnOut1FCMinStpMinAAnIn1 Function Min AnIn1 Function MaxAnIn2 Function Min AnIn2 Function MaxAnIn3 Function Min AnIn3 Function MaxAnIn4 Function Min AnIn4 Function MaxExampleSet the AnOut function for Motorfrequency to 0Hz, setAnOut functionMin [5334] to “User-defined” and AnOut1VaMin[5335] = 0.0. This results in an anlogue output signalfrom 0/4 mA to 20mA: 0Hz to Fmot.This principle is valid for all Min to Max settings.AnOut1 Function Value Min [5335]With AnOut1 Function VaMin you define a user-definedvalue for the signal. Only visible when user-defined isselected in menu [5334].Default: 0.000Range: -10000.000–10000.000Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43545Profibus slot/index 170/194EtherCAT index (hex)4dd9Profinet IO index 19929Fieldbus formatModbus formatAnOut1 Function Max [5336]With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value isscaled to selected presentation. The default scaling isdependent on the selected function of AnOut1 [531]. SeeTable 26.Communication information5335 AnOut1VaMinStp 0.000ALong, 1=1 rpm, 1 %, 1W,0.1 Hz, 0.1 V, 0.1 A or0.001 via process value[322]EInt5336 AnOut1FCMaxStpMaxADefault: MaxMin 0 Min valueMax 1 Max valueUser defined 2 Define user value in menu [5337]Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43257Profibus slot/index 169/161EtherCAT index (hex)4cb9Profinet IO index 19641Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: It is possible to set AnOut1 up as an invertedoutput signal by setting AnOut1 Min > AnOut1 Max. SeeFig. 94.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 141

AnOut1 Function Value Max [5337]With AnOut1 Function VaMax you define a user-definedvalue for the signal. Only visible when user-defined isselected in menu [5334].Default: 0.000Range: -10000.000–10000.000Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43555Profibus slot/index 170/204EtherCAT index (hex)4de3Profinet IO index 19939Fieldbus formatModbus format5337 AnOut1VaMaxStp 0.000AAnOut2 Function [534]Sets the function for the Analogue Output 2.Default: TorqueSelection: Same as in menu [531]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43261Profibus slot/index 169/165EtherCAT index (hex)4cbdProfinet IO index 19645Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntLong, 1=1 rpm, 1 %, 1W,0.1 Hz, 0.1 V, 0.1 A or0.001 via process value[322]EInt534 AnOut2 FcStpTorqueAAnOut2 Setup [535]Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration foranalogue output 2.Default: 4-20mASelection: Same as in menu [532]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43262Profibus slot/index 169/166EtherCAT index (hex)4cbeProfinet IO index 19646Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAnOut2 Advanced [536]Same functions and submenus as under AnOut1 Advanced[533].Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexEtherCAT index (hex)Profinet IO indexFieldbus formatModbus format535 AnOut2 SetupStp4-20mAA536 AnOut2 AdvanStp A43263–43267,43546,43556169/167–169/171,170/195,170/2054cbf - 4cc3,4dda,4de419647 - 19651,19930,19940See [533]- [5367].142 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

11.5.4 Digital Outputs [540]Submenu with all the settings for the digital outputs.Digital Out 1 [541]Sets the function for the digital output 1.NOTE: The definitions described here are valid for theactive output condition.Default:Off 0On 1ReadyOutput is not active and constantlylow.Output is made constantly high, i.e.for checking circuits and troubleshooting.Run 2Running. The AC drive output is active= produces current for the motor.Stop 3 The AC drive output is not active.0Hz 4The output frequency=0±0.1Hz whenin Run condition.Acc/Dec 5The speed is increasing or decreasingalong the acc. ramp dec. ramp.At Process 6 The output = Reference.At Max spd 7The frequency is limited by theMaximum Speed.No Trip 8 No Trip condition active.Trip 9 A Trip condition is active.AutoRst Trip 10 Autoreset trip condition active.Limit 11 A Limit condition is active.Warning 12 A Warning condition is active.Ready 13T= T lim 14I>I nom 15Brake 16Sgnl

Standby 58 Standby supply option is activePTC Trip 59 Trip when function is activePT100 Trip 60 Trip when function is activeOvervolt 61 Overvoltage due to high main voltageOvervolt G 62 Overvoltage due to generation modeOvervolt D 63 Overvoltage due to decelerationAcc 64 Acceleration along the acc. rampDec 65 Deceleration along the dec. rampI 2 t 66 I 2 t limit protection activeV-Limit 67 Overvoltage limit function activeC-Limit 68 Overcurrent limit function activeOvertemp 69 Over temperature warningLow voltage 70 Low voltage warningDigIn 1 71 Digital input 1DigIn 2 72 Digital input 2DigIn 3 73 Digital input 3DigIn 4 74 Digital input 4DigIn 5 75 Digital input 5DigIn 6 76 Digital input 6DigIn 7 77 Digital input 7DigIn 8 78 Digital input 8ManRst Trip 79Active trip that needs to be manuallyresetCom Error 80 Serial communication lostExternal Fan 81The AC drive requires external cooling.Internal fans are active.LC Pump 82 Activate liquid cooling pumpLC HE Fan 83Activate liquid cooling heat exchangerfanLC Level 84 Liquid cooling low level signal activeRun Right 85Positive speed (>0.5%), i.e. forward/clockwise direction.Run Left 86Negative speed (

11.5.5 Relays [550]Submenu with all the settings for the relay outputs. Therelay mode selection makes it possible to establish a “failsafe” relay operation by using the normal closed contact tofunction as the normal open contact.NOTE: Additional relays will become available when I/Ooption boards are connected. Maximum 3 boards with 3relays each.Relay 1 [551]Sets the function for the relay output 1. Same function asdigital output 1 [541] can be selected.551 Relay 1StpATripRelay 3 [553]Sets the function for the relay output 3.553 Relay 3StpADefault: OffSelection: Same as in menu [541]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43275Profibus slot/index 169/179EtherCAT index (hex)4ccbProfinet IO index 19659Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntOffDefault: TripSelection: Same as in menu [541]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43273Profibus slot/index 169/177EtherCAT index (hex)4cc9Profinet IO index 19657Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntRelay 2 [552]NOTE: The definitions described here are valid for theactive output condition.Sets the function for the relay output 2.Board Relay [554] to [55C]These additional relays are only visible if an I/O optionboard is fitted in slot 1, 2, or 3. The outputs are named B1Relay 1–3, B2 Relay 1–3 and B3 Relay 1–3. B stands forboard and 1–3 is the number of the board which is related tothe position of the I/O option board on the optionmounting plate.NOTE: Visible only if optional board is detected or if anyinput/output is activated.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43511–43519Profibus slot/index 170/160–170/168EtherCAT index (hex)4db7 - 4dbfProfinet IO index 19895 - 19903Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt552 Relay 2StpARunDefault: RunSelection: Same as in menu [541]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43274Profibus slot/index 169/178EtherCAT index (hex)4ccaProfinet IO index 19658Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 145

Relay Advanced [55D]This function makes it possible to ensure that the relay willalso be closed when the AC drive is malfunctioning orpowered down.ExampleA process always requires a certain minimum flow. Tocontrol the required number of pumps by the relay modeNC, the e.g. the pumps can be controlled normally by thepump control, but are also activated when the AC drive istripped or powered down.Relay 1 Mode [55D1]Default:N.O 0N.C 1N.OCommunication informationRelay Modes [55D2] to [55DC]Same function as for “Relay 1 Mode [55D1]”.Communication informationThe normal open contact of the relay willbe activated when the function is active.The normally closed contact of the relaywill act as a normal open contact. Thecontact will be opened when function isnot active and closed when function isactive.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43276Profibus slot/index 169/180EtherCAT index (hex)4cccProfinet IO index 19660Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexEtherCAT index (hex)Profinet IO indexFieldbus formatModbus format55D Relay AdvStp A55D1 Relay1 ModeStpN.OA43277, 43278,43521–43529169/181, 169/182,170/170–170/1784ccd, 4cce,4dc1 - 4dc919661, 19662,19905 - 19913UIntUInt11.5.6 Virtual Connections [560]Functions to enable eight internal connections ofcomparator, timer and digital signals, without occupyingphysical digital in/outputs. Virtual connections are used towireless connection of a digital output function to a digitalinput function. Available signals and control functions canbe used to create your own specific functions.Example of start delayThe motor will start in RunR 10 seconds after DigIn1 getshigh. DigIn1 has a time delay of 10 s.Menu Parameter Setting[521] DigIn1 Timer 1[561] VIO 1 Dest RunR[562] VIO 1 Source T1Q[641] Timer1 Trig DigIn 1[642] Timer1 Mode Delay[643] Timer1 Delay 0:00:10NOTE: When a digital input and a virtual destination areset to the same function, this function will act as an ORlogic function.Virtual Connection 1 Destination [561]With this function the destination of the virtual connectionis established. When a function can be controlled by severalsources, e.g. VC destination or Digital Input, the functionwill be controlled in conformity with “OR logic”. See DigInfor descriptions of the different selections.Default:Selection:561 VIO 1 DestStpOffACommunication informationSame selections as for Digital Input 1,menu [521].Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43281Profibus slot/index 169/185EtherCAT index (hex)4cd1Profinet IO index 19665Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntOff146 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Virtual Connection 1 Source [562]With this function the source of the virtual connection isdefined. See DigOut 1 for description of the differentselections.Default:OffSelection: Same as for menu [541].Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43282Profibus slot/index 169/186EtherCAT index (hex)4cd2Profinet IO index 19666Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntVirtual Connections 2-8 [563] to [56G]Same function as virtual connection 1 [561] and [562].Communication information for virtual connections 2-8Destination.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexEtherCAT index (hex)Profinet IO indexFieldbus formatModbus format43283, 43285, 43287,43289, 43291, 43293,43295169/ 187, 189, 191, 193,195, 197, 1994cd3, 4cd5, 4cd17, 4cd9,4cdb, 4cdd, 4cdf19667, 19669, 19671,19673, 19675, 19677,19679UIntUIntCommunication information for virtual connections 2-8Source.Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexEtherCAT index (hex)Profinet IO indexFieldbus formatModbus format562 VIO 1 SourceStpOffA43284, 43286, 43288,43290, 43292, 43294,43296169/ 188, 190, 192, 194,196, 198, 2004cd4, 4cd6, 4cd8, 4cda,4cdc, 4cde, 4ce019668, 19670, 19672,19674, 19676, 19678,19680UIntUInt11.6 Logical Functions andTimers [600]With the Comparators, Logic Functions and Timers,conditional signals can be programmed for control orsignalling features. This gives you the ability to comparedifferent signals and values in order to generate monitoring/controlling features.11.6.1 Comparators [610]The comparators available make it possible to monitordifferent internal signals and values, and visualize via digitalrelay outputs, when a specific value or status is reached orestablished.Analogue comparators [611] - [614]There are 4 analogue comparators that compare anyavailable analogue value (including the analogue referenceinputs) with two adjustable levels. The two levels availableare Level HI and Level LO. There are two analoguecomparator types selectable, an analogue comparator withhysteresis and an analogue window comparator.The analogue hysteresis type comparator uses the twoavailable levels to create a hysteresis for the comparatorbetween setting and resetting the output. This function givesa clear difference in switching levels, which lets the processadapt until a certain action is started. With such a hysteresis,even an unstable analogue signal can be monitored withoutgetting a nervous comparator output signal. Another featureis the possibility to get a fixed indication that a certain levelhas been passed. The comparator can latch by setting LevelLO to a higher value than Level HI.The analogue window comparator uses the two availablelevels to define the window in which the analogue valueshould be within for setting the comparator output.The input analogue value of the comparator can also beselected as bipolar, i.e. treated as signed value orunipolar, i.e. treated as absolute value.Refer to Fig. 101, page 152 where these functions areillustrated.Digital comparators [615]There are 4 digital comparators that compare any availabledigital signal.The output signals of these comparators can be logically tiedtogether to yield a logical output signal.All the output signals can be programmed to the digital orrelay outputs or used as a source for the virtual connections[560].CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 147

CA1 Setup [611]Analogue comparator 1, parameter group.Analogue Comparator 1, Value [6111]Selection of the analogue value for Analogue Comparator 1(CA1).Analogue comparator 1 compares the selectable analoguevalue in menu [6111] with the constant Level HI in menu[6112] and constant Level LO in menu [6113]. If Bipolartype[6115] input signal is selected then the comparison ismade with sign otherwise if unipolar selected thencomparison is made with absolute values.For Hysteresis comparator type [6114], when the valueexceeds the upper limit level high, the output signal CA1 isset high and !A1 low, see Fig. 97. When the value decreasesbelow the lower limit, the output signal CA1 is set low and!A1 high.Analogue value:Menu [6111]Adjustable Level HI.Menu [6112]Adjustable Level LO.Menu [6113]01Fig. 97 Analogue comparator type HysteresissSignal:CA1(NG_06-F125)For Window comparator type [6114], when the value isbetween the lower and upper levels, the output signal valueCA1 is set high and !A1 low, see Fig. 100. When the value isoutside the band of lower and upper levels, the output CA1is set low and !A1 high.Level High[6112]The output signal can be programmed as a virtualconnection source and to the digital or relay outputs.Default:Process Val 0SpeedSpeed 1 rpmTorque 2 %Shaft Power 3 kWEl Power 4 kWCurrent 5 AOutput Volt 6 VFrequency 7 HzDC Voltage 8 VHeatsink Tmp 9 °CPT100_1 10 °CPT100_2 11 °CPT100_3 12 °CEnergy 13 kWhRun Time 14 hMains Time 15 hAnIn1 16 %AnIn2 17 %AnIn3 18 %AnIn4 19 %6111 CA1 ValueStpSpeedASet by Process settings [321] and[322]Process Ref 20 Set by Process settings [321] andProcess Err 21 [322]An Value [6111]Level Low [6113]Fig. 98 Analogue comparator type “Window”ANDSignalCA1Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43401Profibus slot/index 170/50EtherCAT index (hex)4d49Profinet IO index 19758Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt148 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

ExampleCreate automatic RUN/STOP signal via the analoguereference signal. Analogue current reference signal, 4-20mA, is connected to Analogue Input 1. “AnIn1 Setup”,menu [512] = 4-20 mA and the threshold is 4 mA. Full scale(100%) input signal on “AnIn 1” = 20 mA. When thereference signal on “AnIn1” increases 80% of the threshold(4 mA x 0.8 = 3.2 mA), the AC drive will be set in RUNmode. When the signal on “AnIn1” goes below 60% of thethreshold (4 mA x 0.6 = 2.4 mA) the AC drive is set toSTOP mode. The output of CA1 is used as a virtualconnection source that controls the virtual connectiondestination RUN.20 mA4 mA3.2 mA2.4 mAReference signal AnIn1Max speedCA1 Level HI = 16%CA1 Level LO = 12%Menu Function Setting511 AnIn1 Function Process reference512 AnIn1 Set-up 4-20 mA, threshold is 4 mA341 Min Speed 0343 Max Speed 15006111 CA1 Value AnIn16112 CA1 Level HI 16% (3.2mA/20mA x 100%)6113 CA1 Level LO 12% (2.4mA/20mA x 100%)6114 CA1 Type Hysteresis561 VIO 1 Dest RunR562 VIO 1 Source CA1215 Run/Stp Ctrl RemoteCA1ModeRUNSTOPFig. 99No.123T456T1 2 3 4 5 6DescriptionThe reference signal passes the Level LO value frombelow (positive edge), the comparator CA1 output stayslow, mode=RUN.The reference signal passes the Level HI value frombelow (positive edge), the comparator CA1 output is sethigh, mode=RUN.The reference signal passes the threshold level of 4 mA,the motor speed will now follow the reference signal.During this period the motor speed will follow thereference signal.The reference signal reaches the threshold level, motorspeed is 0 rpm, mode = RUN.The reference signal passes the Level HI value fromabove (negative edge), the comparator CA1 output stayshigh, mode =RUN.The reference signal passes the Level LO value fromabove (negative edge), the comparator CA1output=STOP.tttCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 149

Analogue Comparator 1,Level High [6112]Sets the analogue comparator high level, with rangeaccording to the selected value in menu [6111].Default:Range:300 rpmSee min/max in table below.Min/Max setting range for menu [6112]Mode Min Max DecimalsProcess ValSet by Process settings[321] and [322]3Speed, rpm 0 Max speed 0Torque, % 0 Max torque 0Shaft Power, kW 0 Motor P n x4 0El Power, kW 0 Motor P n x4 0Current, A 0 Motor I n x4 1Output volt, V 0 1000 1Frequency, Hz 0 400 1DC voltage, V 0 1250 1Heatsink temp, C 0 100 1PT 100_1_2_3, C -100 300 1Energy, kWh 0 1000000 0Run time, h 0 65535 0Mains time, h 0 65535 0AnIn 1-4% 0 100 0Process RefProcess Err6112 CA1 Level HIStp300rpmASet by Process settings[321] and [322]Set by Process settings[321] and [322]NOTE: If Bipolar selected [6115] then Min value is equalto -Max in the table.33ExampleThis example describes, both for hysteresis and window typecomparator, the normal use of the constant level high andlow.Menu Function Setting343 Max Speed 15006111 CA1 Value Speed6112 CA1 Level HI 300 rpm6113 CA1 Level LO 200 rpm6114 CA1 Type Hysteresis561 VC1 Dest Timer 1562 VC1 Source CA1MAXspeed[343]300200OutputCA1HighLowOutputCA1HighLowFig. 100[6114] Hysteresis[6114] Window1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8CA1 Level HI [6112]Hysteresis/WindowbandCA1 Level LO [6113]tttCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43402Profibus slot/index 170/51EtherCAT index (hex)4d4aProfinet IO index 19786Fieldbus formatModbus formatLong,1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H,1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 viaprocess valueEInt150 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Table 27Comments to Fig. 100 regarding Hysteresisselection.Table 28Comments to Fig. 100 regarding Windowselection.No. Description HysteresisNo. Description Window1The reference signal passes the Level LOvalue from below (positive edge), thecomparator CA1 does not change, outputstays low.1The reference signal passes the Level LOvalue from below (signal inside Windowband), the comparator CA1 output is set high.23The reference signal passes the Level HIvalue from below (positive edge), thecomparator CA1 output is set high.The reference signal passes the Level HIvalue from above (negative edge), thecomparator CA1 does not change, outputstays high.23The reference signal passes the Level LOvalue from above (signal outside Windowband), the comparator CA1 is reset, output isset low.The reference signal passes the Level HIvalue from above (signal inside Windowband), the comparator CA1 output is set high.45678The reference signal passes the Level LOvalue from above (negative edge), thecomparator CA1 is reset, output is set low.The reference signal passes the Level LOvalue from below (positive edge), thecomparator CA1 does not change, outputstays low.The reference signal passes the Level HIvalue from below (positive edge), thecomparator CA1 output is set high.The reference signal passes the Level HIvalue from above (negative edge), thecomparator CA1 does not change, outputstays high.The reference signal passes the Level LOvalue from above (negative edge), thecomparator CA1 is reset, output is set low.45678The reference signal passes the Level LOvalue from above (signal outside Windowband), the comparator CA1 is reset, output isset low.The reference signal passes the Level LOvalue from below (signal inside Windowband), the comparator CA1 output is set high.The reference signal passes the Level HIvalue from below (signal outside Windowband),the comparator CA1 is reset, output isset low.The reference signal passes the Level HIvalue from above (signal inside Windowband), the comparator CA1 output is set high.The reference signal passes the Level LOvalue from above (signal outside Windowband), the comparator CA1 is reset, output isset low.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 151

Analogue Comparator 1,Level Low [6113]Sets the analogue comparator low level, with unit and rangeaccording to the selected value in menu [6111].Default:200 rpmRange: Range as [6112].Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43403Profibus slot/index 170/52EtherCAT index (hex)4d4bProfinet IO index 19787Fieldbus formatModbus formatAnalogue Comparator 1, Type [6114]Selects the analogue comparator type, i.e. Hysteresis orWindow type. See Fig. 101 and Fig. 102.Default:6113 CA1 Level LOStp200rpmHysteresisHysteresis 0 Hysteresis type comparatorWindow 1 Window type comparatorCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43481Profibus slot/index 170/130EtherCAT index (hex)4d99Profinet IO index 19865Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntALong,1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H,1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 viaprocess valueEInt6114 CA1 TypeStp HysteresisAAnalogue Comparator 1, Polarity[6115]Selects how the selected value in [6111] should be handledprior to the analogue comparator , i.e. as absolute value orhandled with sign. See Fig. 101Default:6115 CA1 PolarStpUnipolarUnipolarUnipolar 0 Absolute value of [6111] usedBipolar 1 Signed value of [6111] usedCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43486Profibus slot/index 170/135EtherCAT index (hex)4d9eProfinet IO index 19870Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntExampleSee Fig. 101 and Fig. 102 for different principlefunctionality of comparator features 6114 and 6115.Type [6114]= HysteresisCA1[6115] Unipolar[6112] HI > 0[6113] LO > 0[6115] Bipolar[6112] HI > 0[6113] LO > 0[6115] Bipolar[6112] HI > 0[6113] LO < 0[6115] Bipolar[6112] HI < 0[6113] LO < 0ACA1CA1CA1An.Value[6111]An.Value[6111]An.Value[6111]An.Value[6111]Fig. 101 Principle functionality of comparator features for“Type [6114] = Hysteresis ” and “Polar [6115]”.152 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

[6115] Unipolar[6112] HI > 0[6113] LO > 0Type [6114] = WindowCA1An.Value[6111]Analogue Comparator 2,Level High [6122]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,level high [6112].[6115] Bipolar[6112] HI > 0[6113] LO > 0CA1An.Value[6111]6122 CA2 Level HIStp 20%A[6115] Bipolar[6112] HI > 0[6113] LO < 0CA1An.Value[6111]Default: 20%Range:Enter a value for the high level.[6115] BipolarFig. 102 Principle functionality of comparator features for“Type [6114] =Window ” and “Polar [6115]”.NOTE: When “Unipolar “ is selected, absolute value ofsignal is used.NOTE: When “Bipolar” is selected in [6115] then:1. Functionality is not symmetrical and2. Ranges for high/low are bipolarCA2 Setup [612]Analogue comparator 2, parameter group.Analogue Comparator 2, Value [6121]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,value [6111].Default:[6112] HI < 0[6113] LO < 0TorqueCA16121 CA2 ValueStpTorqueSelections: Same as in menu [6111]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43404Profibus slot/index 170/53EtherCAT index (hex)4d4cProfinet IO index 19788Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAAn.Value[6111]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43405Profibus slot/index 170/54EtherCAT index (hex)4d4dProfinet IO index 19789Fieldbus formatModbus formatAnalogue Comparator 2,Level Low [6123]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,level low [6113].Default: 10%Range:Enter a value for the low level.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43406Profibus slot/index 170/55EtherCAT index (hex)4d4eProfinet IO index 19790Fieldbus formatModbus formatLong1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H,1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 viaprocess valueEInt6123 CA2 Level LOStp 10%ALong,1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H,1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 viaprocess valueEIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 153

Analogue Comparator 2, Type [6124]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,Type [6114].Default:HysteresisHysteresis 0 Hysteresis type comparatorWindow 1 Window type comparatorCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43482Profibus slot/index 170/131EtherCAT index (hex)4d9aProfinet IO index 19866Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAnalogue Comparator 2, Polar [6125]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,Polar [6115].Default:6124 CA2 TypeStp HysteresisUnipolarUnipolar 0 Absolute value of [6111] usedBipolar 1 Signed value of [6111] usedCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43487Profibus slot/index 170/136EtherCAT index (hex)4d9fProfinet IO index 19871Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntA6125 CA2 PolarStpUnipolarACA3 Setup [613]Analogue comparators 3, parameter group.Analogue Comparator 3, Value [6131]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,value [6111].Default:Process ValueSelections: Same as in menu [6111]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43471Profibus slot/index 170/120EtherCAT index (hex)4d8fProfinet IO index 19855Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAnalogue Comparator 3,Level High [6132]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,level high [6112].Default:Range:300rpmEnter a value for the high level.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43472Profibus slot/index 170/121EtherCAT index (hex)4d90Profinet IO index 19856Fieldbus formatModbus format6131 CA3 ValueStp Process ValA6132 CA3 Level HIStp300rpmALong1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H,1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 viaprocess valueEInt154 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Analogue Comparator 3,Level Low [6133]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,level low [6113].Default:Range:200 rpmEnter a value for the low level.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43473Profibus slot/index 170/122EtherCAT index (hex)4d91Profinet IO index 19857Fieldbus formatModbus formatAnalogue Comparator, 3 Type [6134]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1, level Type[6114].Default:6133 CA3 Level LOStp200rpmHysteresisHysteresis 0 Hysteresis type comparatorWindow 1 Window type comparatorCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43483Profibus slot/index 170/132EtherCAT index (hex)4d9bProfinet IO index 19867Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntALong,1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H,1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 viaprocess valueEInt6134 CA3 TypeStp HysteresisAAnalogue Comparator 3, Polar [6135]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,Polar [6115].Default:UnipolarUnipolar 0 Absolute value of [6111] usedBipolar 1 Signed value of [6111] usedCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43488Profibus slot/index 170/137EtherCAT index (hex)4da0Profinet IO index 19872Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCA4 Setup [614]Analogue comparators 4, parameter group.Analogue Comparator 4, Value [6141]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,value [6111].Default:6135 CA3 PolarStpUnipolarProcess ErrorSelections: Same as in menu [6111]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43474Profibus slot/index 170/123EtherCAT index (hex)4d92Profinet IO index 19858Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntA6141 CA4 ValueStp Process ErrACG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 155

Analogue Comparator 4, Level High[6142]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level high[6112].Default:Range:100rpmEnter a value for the high level.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43475Profibus slot/index 170/124EtherCAT index (hex)4d93Profinet IO index 19859Fieldbus formatModbus formatAnalogue Comparator 4,Level Low [6143]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1, level low[6113].Default:Range:-100 rpmEnter a value for the low level.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43476Profibus slot/index 170/125EtherCAT index (hex)4d94Profinet IO index 19860Fieldbus formatModbus format6142 CA4 Level HIStp100rpmALong1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H,1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 viaprocess valueEInt6143 CA4 Level LOStp-100rpmALong,1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H,1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 viaprocess valueEIntAnalogue Comparator 4, Type [6144]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1, level Type[6114]Default:WindowHysteresis 0 Hysteresis type comparatorWindow 1 Window type comparatorCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43484Profibus slot/index 170/133EtherCAT index (hex)4d9cProfinet IO index 19868Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAnalogue Comparator 4, Polar [6145]Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,Polar [6115]Default:6144 CA4 TypeStpWindowBipolarUnipolar 0 Absolute value of [6111] usedBipolar 1 Signed value of [6111] usedCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43489Profibus slot/index 170/138EtherCAT index (hex)4da1Profinet IO index 19873Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntA6145 CA4 PolarStpBipolarA156 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Digital comparator Setup [615]Digital comparators, parameter group.Digital Comparator 1 [6151]Selection of the input signal for digital comparator 1 (CD1).The output signal CD1 is set high if the selected inputsignal is active. See Fig. 103.The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relayoutputs or used as a source for the virtual connections[560].Digital signal:Menu [6151]Fig. 103 Digital comparatorDefault:RunSelection: Same selections as for “DigOut 1 [541]”.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43407Profibus slot/index 170/56EtherCAT index (hex)4d4fProfinet IO index 19791Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt+-DComp 16151 CD1StpASignal: CD1(NG_06-F126)RunDigital Comparator 2 [6152]Function is identical to digital comparator 1 [6151].Digital Comparator 3 [6153]Function is identical to digital comparator 1 [6151].Default:TripSelection: Same selections as for “DigOut 1 [541]”.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43477Profibus slot/index 170/126EtherCAT index (hex)4d95Profinet IO index 19861Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntDigital Comparator 4 [6154]Function is identical to digital comparator 1 [6151].Default:6153 CD 3StpReadySelection: Same selections as for “DigOut 1 [541]”.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43478Profibus slot/index 170/127EtherCAT index (hex)4d96Profinet IO index 19862Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntA6154 CD 4StpATripReadyDefault: DigIn 16152 CD 2Stp DigIn 1ASelection: Same selections as for “DigOut 1 [541]”.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43408Profibus slot/index 170/57EtherCAT index (hex)4d50Profinet IO index 19792Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 157

11.6.2 Logic Output Y [620]By means of an expression editor, the comparator signals canbe logically combined into the Logic Y function.The expression editor has the following features:• The following signals can be used:CA1, CA2, CD1, CD2 or LZ (or LY)• The following signals can be inverted:!A1, !A2, !D1, !D2, or !LZ (or !LY)• The following logical operators are available:"+" : OR operator"&" : AND operator"^" : EXOR operatorExpressions according to the following truth table can bemade:Menu [620] now holds the expression for Logic Y:CA1&!A2&CD1which is to be read as:(CA1&!A2)&CD1NOTE: Set menu [624] to "" to finish the expressionwhen only two comparators are required for Logic Y.Y Comp 1 [621]Selects the first comparator for the logic Y function.621 Y Comp 1StpACA1InputThe output signal can be programmed to the digital or relayoutputs or used as a Virtual Connection Source [560].The expression must be programmed by means of themenus [621] to [625].Example:ResultA B & (AND) + (OR) ^(EXOR)0 0 0 0 00 1 0 1 11 0 0 1 11 1 1 1 0620 LOGIC YStp CA1&!A2&CD1Broken belt detection for Logic YThis example describes the programming for a so-called“broken belt detection” for fan applications.The comparator CA1 is set for frequency>10Hz.The comparator !A2 is set for load < 20%.The comparator CD1 is set for Run.The 3 comparators are all AND-ed, given the “broken beltdetection”.In menus [621]-[625] expression entered for Logic Y isvisible.Set menu [621] to CA1Set menu [622] to &Set menu [623] to !A2Set menu [624] to &Set menu [625] to CD1Default:CA1 0!A1 1CA2 2!A2 3CD1 4!D1 5CD2 6!D2 7LZ/LY 8!LZ/!LY 9T1 10!T1 11T2 12!T2 13CA3 14!A3 15CA4 16!A4 17CD3 18!D3 19CD4 20!D4 21C1 22!C1 23C2 24!C2 25CA1158 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43411Profibus slot/index 170/60EtherCAT index (hex)4d53Profinet IO index 19795Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntY Operator 1 [622]Selects the first operator for the logic Y function.Default:Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43412Profibus slot/index 170/61EtherCAT index (hex)4d54Profinet IO index 19796Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntY Comp 2 [623]Selects the second comparator for the logic Y function.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43413Profibus slot/index 170/62EtherCAT index (hex)4d55Profinet IO index 19797Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt&& 1 &=AND+ 2 +=OR^ 3 ^=EXORDefault: !A2622 Y Operator 1StpSelection: Same as menu [621]A623 Y Comp 2Stp !A2A&Y Operator 2 [624]Selects the second operator for the logic Y function.Default:. 0Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43414Profibus slot/index 170/63EtherCAT index (hex)4d56Profinet IO index 19798Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntY Comp 3 [625]Selects the third comparator for the logic Y function.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43415Profibus slot/index 170/64EtherCAT index (hex)4d57Profinet IO index 19799Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt&& 1 &=AND+ 2 +=OR^ 3 ^=EXORDefault:CD1624 Y Operator 2StpSelection: Same as menu [621]AWhen · (dot) is selected, the Logic Yexpression is finished (when only twoexpressions are tied together).625 Y Comp 3StpACD1&CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 159

11.6.3 Logic Output Z [630]630 LOGIC ZStp CA1&!A2&CD1AThe expression must be programmed by means of themenus [631] to [635].Z Comp 1 [631]Selects the first comparator for the logic Z function.Default:CA1Selection: Same as menu [621]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43421Profibus slot/index 170/70EtherCAT index (hex)4d5dProfinet IO index 19805Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntZ Operator 1 [632]Selects the first operator for the logic Z function.Default:631 Z Comp 1Stp&Selection: Same as menu [622]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43422Profibus slot/index 170/71EtherCAT index (hex)4d5eProfinet IO index 19806Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntA632 Z Operator 1StpACA1&Z Comp 2 [633]Selects the second comparator for the logic Z function.Default: !A2Selection: Same as menu [621]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43423Profibus slot/index 170/72EtherCAT index (hex)4d5fProfinet IO index 19807Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntZ Operator 2 [634]Selects the second operator for the logic Z function.Default:&Selection: Same as menu [624]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43424Profibus slot/index 170/73EtherCAT index (hex)4d60Profinet IO index 19808Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntZ Comp 3 [635]Selects the third comparator for the logic Z function.Default:633 Z Comp 2Stp !A2A634 Z Operator 2StpCD1Selection: Same as menu [621]A635 Z Comp 3StpA&CD1160 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43425Profibus slot/index 170/74EtherCAT index (hex)4d61Profinet IO index 19809Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt11.6.4 Timer1 [640]The Timer functions can be used as a delay timer or as aninterval with separate On and Off times (alternate mode). Indelay mode, the output signal T1Q becomes high if the setdelay time is expired. See Fig. 104.Timer1 TrigTimer 1 Trig [641]641 Timer1 TrigStpADefault: OffSelection: Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu [541].Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43431Profibus slot/index 170/80EtherCAT index (hex)4d67Profinet IO index 19815Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntTimer 1 Mode [642]OffT1QFig. 104Timer1 delayIn alternate mode, the output signal T1Q will switchautomatically from high to low etc. according to the setinterval times. See Fig. 105.The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relayoutputs used in logic functions [620] and [630], or as avirtual connection source [560].NOTE: The actual timers are common for all parametersets. If the actual set is changed, the timer functionality[641] to [645] will change according set settings but thetimer value will stay unchanged. So initialization of thetimer might differ for a set change compared to normaltriggering of a timer.642 Timer1 ModeStpADefault:OffOff 0Delay 1Alternate 2Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43432Profibus slot/index 170/81EtherCAT index (hex)4d68Profinet IO index 19816Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntOffTimer1 TrigT1QFig. 105T1 T2 T1 T2CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 161

Timer 1 Delay [643]This menu is only visible when timer mode is set to delay.This menu can only be edited as in alternative 2, see section9.5, page 53.Timer 1 delay sets the time that will be used by the firsttimer after it is activated. Timer 1 can be activated by a highsignal on a DigIn that is set to Timer 1 or via a virtualdestination [560].Timer 1 T2 [645]Timer 1 T2 sets the down time in the alternate mode.Default:645 Timer1 T2Stp 0:00:00A0:00:00, hr:min:secRange: 0:00:00–9:59:59Default:0:00:00 (hr:min:sec)Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Timer 1 T1 [644]When timer mode is set to Alternate and Timer 1 is enabled,this timer will automatically keep on switching according tothe independently programmable up and down times. TheTimer 1 in Alternate mode can be enabled by a digital inputor via a virtual connection. See Fig. 105. Timer 1 T1 sets theup time in the alternate mode.Communication information43433 hours43434 minutes43435 secondsProfibus slot/index170/82, 170/83,170/84EtherCAT index (hex)4d69, 4d6a, 4d6bProfinet IO index 19817, 19818, 19819Fieldbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/sModbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/sDefault:0:00:00 (hr:min:sec)Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:643 Timer1DelayStp 0:00:00A644 Timer 1 T1Stp 0:00:00A43436 hours43437 minutes43438 secondsProfibus slot/index170/85, 170/86,170/87EtherCAT index (hex)4d6c, 4d6d, 4d6eProfinet IO index 19820, 19821, 19822Fieldbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/sModbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Timer 1 Value [649]Timer 1 Value shows actual value of the timer.Communication information43439 hours43440 minutes43441 secondsProfibus slot/index170/88, 170/89,170/90EtherCAT index (hex)4d6f, 4d70, 4d71Profinet IO index 19823, 19824, 19825Fieldbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/sModbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/sNOTE: “Timer 1 T1 [644]” and “Timer 2 T1 [654]” areonly visible when Timer Mode is set to Alternate.Default:0:00:00, hr:min:secRange: 0:00:00–9:59:59Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:649 Timer1 ValueStp 0:00:00A42921 hours42922 minutes42923 secondsProfibus slot/index168/80, 168/81,168/82EtherCAT index (hex)4b69, 4b6a, 4b6bProfinet IO index 19305, 19306, 19307Fieldbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/sModbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/s162 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

11.6.5 Timer2 [650]Refer to the descriptions for Timer1.Timer 2 Trig [651]651 Timer2 TrigStpAOffTimer 2 Delay [653]Default:653 Timer2DelayStp 0:00:00A0:00:00, hr:min:secRange: 0:00:00–9:59:59Default:Selection:OffCommunication informationTimer 2 Mode [652]Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu[541].Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43451Profibus slot/index 170/100EtherCAT index (hex)4d7bProfinet IO index 19835Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntDefault:652 Timer2 ModeStpOffSelection: Same as in menu [642]Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43452Profibus slot/index 170/101EtherCAT index (hex)4d7cProfinet IO index 19836Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntAOffCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Timer 2 T1 [654]Communication information43453 hours43454 minutes43455 secondsProfibus slot/index170/102, 170/103,170/104EtherCAT index (hex)4d7d, 4d7e, 4d7fProfinet IO index 19837, 19838, 19839Fieldbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/sModbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/sDefault:0:00:00, hr:min:secRange: 0:00:00–9:59:59Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:654 Timer 2 T1Stp 0:00:00A43456 hours43457 minutes43458 secondsProfibus slot/index170/105, 170/106,170/107EtherCAT index (hex)4d80, 4d81, 4d82Profinet IO index 19840, 19841, 19842Fieldbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/sModbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/sCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 163

Timer 2 T2 [655]Default:0:00:00, hr:min:secRange: 0:00:00–9:59:59Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:655 Timer 2 T2Stp 0:00:00A43459 hours43460 minutes43461 secondsProfibus slot/index170/108, 170/109,170/110EtherCAT index (hex)4d83, 4d84, 4d85Profinet IO index 19843, 19844, 19845Fieldbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/sModbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/s11.6.6 Counters [660]Counter functions for counting pulses and signalling ondigital output when counter reaches specified high and lowlimit levels.The counter is counting up on positive flanks on thetriggered signal, the counter is cleared as long as the Resetsignal is active.The counter can be automatically decremented withspecified decrement time, if no new trigger signal hasoccurred within the decrement time.The counter value is clamped to the high limit value and thedigital output function (C1Q or C2Q) is active whencounter value equals high limit value.See Fig. 106 for more information of the counters.661366146619Timer 2 Value [659]Timer 2 Value shows actual value of the timer.661166125416615Default:0:00:00, hr:min:secRange: 0:00:00–9:59:59Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:659 Timer2 ValueStp 0:00:00A42924 hours42925 minutes42926 secondsProfibus slot/index168/83, 168/84,168/84EtherCAT index (hex)4b6c, 4b6d, 4b6fProfinet IO index 19308, 19309, 19310Fieldbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/sModbus formatUInt, 1=1 h/m/s541 = Digital Out 1 function6611= Counter 1 trigger6612= Counter 1 reset6613= Counter 1 High value6614= Counter 1 Low value6615= Counter 1 Decrement timer6619= Counter 1 valueFig. 106 Counters, operating principle.Counter 1 [661]Counter 1 parameter group.Counter 1 Trigger [6611]Selection of the digital output signal used as trigger signalfor counter 1. Counter 1 is incremented by 1 on everypositive flank on the trigger signal.NOTE: Maximum counting frequency is 8 Hz.6611 C1 TrigStpAOffDefault:OffSelection: Same selections as “Digital Out 1 [541]”.164 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43571Profibus slot/index 170/220EtherCAT index (hex)4df3Profinet IO index 19955Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCounter 1 Reset [6612]Selection of the digital signal used as reset signal for counter1. Counter 1 is cleared to 0 and held to 0 as long as resetinput is active (high).NOTE: Reset input has top priority.Default:OffSelection: Same selections as “Digital Out 1 [541]”.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43572Profibus slot/index 170/221EtherCAT index (hex)4df4Profinet IO index 19956Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCounter 1 High value [6613]Sets counter 1 high limit value. Counter 1 value is clampedto selected high limit value and the counter 1 output (C1Q)is active (high) when the counter value equals the high value.NOTE: Value 0 means that counter output is alwaystrue (high).Default: 0Range: 0 - 100006612 C1 ResetStpCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43573Profibus slot/index 170/222EtherCAT index (hex)4df5Profinet IO index 19957Fieldbus format Long, 1=1Modbus formatEIntAOff6613 C1 High ValStp 0ACounter 1 Low value [6614]Sets counter 1 low limit value. Counter 1 output (C1Q) isde-activated (low) when the counter value is equal or smallerthan the low value.NOTE: Counter high value has priority so if high and lowvalues are equal then the counter output is de-activatedwhen the value is smaller than the low value.Default: 0Range: 0 - 10000Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43574Profibus slot/index 170/223EtherCAT index (hex)4df6Profinet IO index 19958Fieldbus format Long, 1=1Modbus formatEIntCounter 1 Decrement timer [6615]Sets counter 1 automatic decrement timer value. Thecounter 1 is decremented by 1 after elapsed decrement timeand if no new trigger has happened within the decrementtime. The decrement timer is reset to 0 at every counter 1trig pulseDefault:OffOff 0 Off6614 C1 Low ValStp 0A1 - 3600 1 - 3600 1 - 3600 s6615 C1 DecTimerStpOffACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43575Profibus slot/index 170/224EtherCAT index (hex)4df7Profinet IO index 19959Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEIntCounter 1 Value [6619]Parameter shows the actual value of counter 1.NOTE: Counter 1 value is common for all parameter sets.NOTE: The value is volatile and lost at power down.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 165

Default: 0Range: 0 - 100006619 C1 ValueStp 0ACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42927Profibus slot/index 168/86EtherCAT index (hex)4b6fProfinet IO index 19311Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatUIntCounter 2 [662]Refer to description for Counter 1 [661].Counter 2 Trigger [6621]Function is identical to Counter 1 Trigger [6611].Counter 2 High value [6623]Function is identical to Counter 1 High value [6613].Default: 0Range: 0 - 100006623 C2 High ValStp 0ACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43583Profibus slot/index 170/232EtherCAT index (hex)4dffProfinet IO index 19967Fieldbus format Long, 1=1Modbus formatEIntCounter 2 Low value [6624]Function is identical to Counter 1 Low value [6614].6621 C2 TrigStpAOff6624 C2 Low ValStp 0ADefault:OffSelection: Same selections as Digital Out 1 [541].Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43581Profibus slot/index 170/230EtherCAT index (hex)4dfdProfinet IO index 19965Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntCounter 2 Reset [6622]Function is identical to Counter 1 Reset [6612].Default: 0Range: 0 - 10000Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43584Profibus slot/index 170/233EtherCAT index (hex)4e00Profinet IO index 19968Fieldbus format Long, 1=1Modbus formatEIntCounter 2 Decrement timer [6625]Function is identical to Counter 1 Decrement timer [6615].6622 C2 ResetStpAOff6625 C2 DecTimerStpOffADefault: OffSelection: Same selections as Digital Out 1 [541].Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43582Profibus slot/index 170/231EtherCAT index (hex)4dfeProfinet IO index 19966Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntDefault:OffOff 0 Off1 - 3600 1 - 3600 1 - 3600 sCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43585Profibus slot/index 170/234EtherCAT index (hex)4e01Profinet IO index 19969Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 sModbus formatEInt166 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Counter 2 Value [6629]Parameter shows the actual value of counter 2.NOTE: Counter 2 value is common for all parameter sets.NOTE: The value is volatile and lost at power down.Default: 0Range: 0 - 100006629 C2 ValueStp 0A11.7 View Operation/Status[700]Menu with parameters for viewing all actual operationaldata, such as speed, torque, power, etc.11.7.1 Operation [710]Process Value [711]The process value is showing the process actual value,depending on selection done in chapter, Process Source[321].Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42928Profibus slot/index 168/87EtherCAT index (hex)4b70Profinet IO index 19312Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatUIntUnitResolution711 Process ValStpDepends on selected Pocess source [321]and Process Unit [322].Speed: 1 rpm, 4 digitsOther units: 3 digitsCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31001Profibus slot/index 121/145EtherCAT index (hex)23e9Profinet IO index 1001Fieldbus formatModbus formatLong, 1=1rpm, 1%, 1°C or0.001 if Process Value/Process Ref using a [322]unitEIntSpeed [712]Displays the actual shaft speed.712 SpeedStprpmUnit:Resolution:rpm1 rpm, 4 digitsCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31002Profibus slot/index 121/146EtherCAT index (hex)23eaProfinet IO index 1002Fieldbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmModbus formatInt, 1=1 rpmCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 167

Torque [713]Displays the actual shaft torque.Unit:Resolution:%, Nm1 %, 0.1 NmCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexEtherCAT index (hex)Profinet IO indexFieldbus formatModbus format713 TorqueStpShaft power [714]Displays the actual shaft power.0% 0.0Nm31003 Nm31004 %121/147121/14823eb Nm23ec %1003 Nm1004 %Long, 1=0.1 NmLong, 1=1 %EIntCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31006Profibus slot/index 121/150EtherCAT index (hex)23eeProfinet IO index 1006Fieldbus format Long, 1=1WModbus formatEIntCurrent [716]Displays the actual output current.Unit:Resolution:716 CurrentStpA0.1 ACommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31007Profibus slot/index 121/151EtherCAT index (hex)23efProfinet IO index 1007Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.1 AModbus formatEIntAUnit:714 Shaft PowerStpWWOutput Voltage [717]Displays the actual output voltage.Resolution:1WCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31005Profibus slot/index 121/149EtherCAT index (hex)23edProfinet IO index 1005Fieldbus format Long, 1=1WModbus formatEIntElectrical Power [715]Displays the actual electrical output power.Unit:Resolution:717 Output VoltStpV0.1 VCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31008Profibus slot/index 121/152EtherCAT index (hex)23f0Profinet IO index 1008Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.1 VModbus formatEIntV715 El PowerStpkWUnit:Resolution:kW1 W168 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Frequency [718]Displays the actual output frequency.Unit:Resolution:Hz0.1 HzCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31009Profibus slot/index 121/153EtherCAT index (hex)23f1Profinet IO index 1009Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.1 HzModbus formatEIntDC Link Voltage [719]Displays the actual DC link voltage.Unit:Resolution:718 FrequencyStp719 DC VoltageStpV0.1 VHzCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31010Profibus slot/index 121/154EtherCAT index (hex)23f2Profinet IO index 1010Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.1 VModbus formatEIntVHeatsink Temperature [71A]Displays the actual heatsink temperature, measured. Thesignal is generated by a sensor in the IGBT module.Unit: °CResolution:0.1°CCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31011Profibus slot/index 121/155EtherCAT index (hex)23f3Profinet IO index 1011Fieldbus formatLong, 1=0.1 CModbus formatEIntPT100_1_2_3 Temp [71B]Displays the actual PT100 temperature.Unit: °CResolution: 1°C71A Heatsink TmpStp °C71B PT100 1,2,3Stp °CCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31012, 31013, 31014121/156Profibus slot/index121/157121/158EtherCAT index (hex)23f4, 23f5, 23f6Profinet IO index 1012, 1013, 1014Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 °CModbus formatEIntCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 169

11.7.2 Status [720]VSD Status [721]Indicates the overall status of the AC drive.721 VSD StatusStp 1/222/333/44Description of communication formatInteger values and bits used1 - 04 - 2BitInteger representationActive Parameter set, where0=A, 1=B, 2=C, 3=DSource of Reference control value, where0=Rem, 1=Key, 2=Com, 3=OptionFig. 107 AC drive statusDisplaypositionFunction1 Parameter Set A,B,C,DStatus value7 - 513 - 814Source of Run/Stop/Reset command, where0=Rem, 1=Key, 2=Com, 3=OptionActive limit functions, where0=No limit, 1=VL, 2=SL, 3=CL, 4=TLInverter is in warning (A warning condition isactive)222333Source of referencevalueSource of Run/Stop/Resetcommand44 Limit functionsExample: “A/Key/Rem/TL”This means:A: Parameter Set A is active.Key: Reference value comes from the keyboard (CP).Rem: Run/Stop commands come from terminals 1-22.TL: Torque Limit active.Communication information-Rem (remote)-Key (keyboard)-Com (Serial comm.)-Opt (option)-Rem (remote)-Key (keyboard)-Com (Serial comm.)-Opt (option)- - - -No limit active-VL (Voltage Limit)-SL (Speed Limit)-CL (Current Limit)-TL (Torque Limit)Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31015Profibus slot/index 121/159EtherCAT index (hex)23f7Profinet IO index 1015Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUInt15 Inverter is tripped (A Trip condition is active)Example:Previous example “A/Key/Rem/TL”is interpreted “ 0/1/0/4”In bit format this is presented asBit Interpretation Integer representation0 LSB 01 02 13 04 05 06 07 08 0A(0)Key (1)Rem (0)Parameter setSource of controlSource of command9 010 111 0TL (4) Limit functions12 013 014 0 Warning condition15 MSB 0 Trip conditionIn the example above it is assumed that we have no trip orwarning condition (the alarm LED on the control panel isoff).Warning [722]Display the actual or last warning condition. A warningoccurs if the AC drive is close to a trip condition but still inoperation. During a warning condition the red trip LEDwill start to blink as long as the warning is active.722 WarningsStpwarn.msgThe active warning message is displayed in menu [722]. Ifno warning is active the message “No Error” is displayed.170 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

The following warnings are possible:Fieldbusintegervalue0 No Error1 Motor I²t2 PTC3 Motor lost4 Locked rotor5 Ext trip6 Mon MaxAlarm7 Mon MinAlarm8 Comm error9 PT100Warning messageDeviation #ID,10#ID indicates which board that triggered thetrip I.e. #ID= 1 means CRIO and #ID=2 meansencoder.11 Pump12 Ext Mot Temp13 LC Level14 Brake15 Option16 Over temp17 Over curr FCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31016Profibus slot/index 121/160EtherCAT index (hex)23f8Profinet IO index 1016Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntSee also the Chapter 12. page 179.Digital Input Status [723]Indicates the status of the digital inputs. See Fig. 108.1 DigIn 12 DigIn 23 DigIn 34 DigIn 45 DigIn 56 DigIn 67 DigIn 78 DigIn 8The positions one to eight (read from left to right) indicatethe status of the associated input:1 High0 LowThe example in Fig. 108 indicates that DigIn 1,DigIn 3 and DigIn 6 are active at this moment.723 DigIn StatusStp 1010 010018 Over volt D19 Over volt G20 Over volt M21 Over speed22 Under voltage23 Power fault24 Desat25 DClink error26 Int errorFig. 108 Digital input status exampleCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31017Profibus slot/index 121/161EtherCAT index (hex)23f9Profinet IO index 1017Fieldbus formatUInt, bit 0=DigIn1,Modbus formatbit 8=DigIn827 Ovolt m cut28 Over voltage29 Not used30 Not used31 EncoderCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 171

Digital Output Status [724]Indicates the status of the digital outputs and relays. See Fig.109.RE indicate the status of the relays on position:1 Relay12 Relay23 Relay3DO indicate the status of the digital outputs on position:1 DigOut12 DigOut2The status of the associated output is shown.1 High0 LowThe example in Fig. 109 indicates that DigOut1 is activeand Digital Out 2 is not active. Relay 1 is active, relay 2 and3 are not active.724 DigOutStatusStp RE 100 DO 10Fig. 109 Digital output status exampleCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31018Profibus slot/index 121/162EtherCAT index (hex)23faProfinet IO index 1018Fieldbus formatUInt, bit 0=DigOut1,bit 1=DigOut2Modbus formatbit 8=Relay1bit 9=Relay2bit 10=Relay3Analogue Input Status [725]Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 1 and 2.725 AnIn 1 2Stp -100% 65%Fig. 110 Analogue input statusCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31019, 31020Profibus slot/index 121/163, 121/164EtherCAT index (hex)23fb, 23fcProfinet IO index 1019, 1020Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntThe first row indicates the analogue inputs.1 AnIn 12 AnIn 2Reading downwards from the first row to the second row thestatus of the belonging input is shown in %:-100% AnIn1 has a negative 100% input value65% AnIn2 has a 65% input valueSo the example in Fig. 110 indicates that both the Analogueinputs are active.NOTE: The shown percentages are absolute valuesbased on the full range/scale of the in- or output; sorelated to either 0–10 V or 0–20 mA.Analogue Input Status [726]Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 3 and 4.726 AnIn 3 4Stp -100% 65%Fig. 111 Analogue input statusCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31021, 31022Profibus slot/index 121/165, 121/166EtherCAT index (hex)23fd, 23feProfinet IO index 1021, 1022Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntAnalogue Output Status [727]Indicates the status of the analogue outputs. Fig. 108. E.g. if4-20 mA output is used, the value 20% equals to 4 mA.727 AnOut 1 2Stp -100% 65%Fig. 112 Analogue output statusCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31023, 31024Profibus slot/index 121/167, 121/168EtherCAT index (hex) 23ff, 2400Profinet IO index 1023, 1024Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%Modbus formatEIntThe first row indicates the Analogue outputs.1 AnOut 12 AnOut 2Reading downwards from the first row to the second row thestatus of the belonging output is shown in %:-100%AnOut1 has a negative 100% output value65%AnOut2 has a 65% output value172 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

The example in Fig. 108 indicates that both the Analogueoutputs are active.NOTE: The shown percentages are absolute valuesbased on the full range/scale of the in- or output; sorelated to either 0–10 V or 0–20 mA.I/O board Status [728] - [72A]Indicates the status for the additional I/O on option boards1 (B1), 2 (B2) and 3 (B3).11.7.3 Stored values [730]The shown values are the actual values built up over time.Values are stored at power down and updated again at powerup.Run Time [731]Displays the total time that the AC drive has been in theRun Mode.731 Run TimeStph:mm:ss728 IO B1Stp RE 000 DI100 Unit: h: mm:ss (hours: minutes: seconds)Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31025 - 31027Profibus slot/index 121/170 - 172EtherCAT index (hex) 2401 - 2403Profinet IO index 1025 - 1027Fieldbus formatUInt, bit 0=DigIn1bit 1=DigIn2bit 2=DigIn3Modbus formatbit 8=Relay1bit 9=Relay2bit 10=Relay3Range: 00: 00: 00–262143: 59: 59Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:31028:31029:31030(hr:min:sec)Profibus slot/index121/172:121/173: 121/174EtherCAT index (hex) 2404:2405:2406Profinet IO index 1028:1029:1030Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1h:m:sModbus formatEintReset Run Time [7311]Reset the run time counter. The stored information will beerased and a new registration period will start.7311 Reset RunTmStpANoDefault:No 0Yes 1NoCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 7Profibus slot/index 0/6EtherCAT index (hex) 2007Profinet IO index 7Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: After reset the setting automatically reverts to“No”.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 173

Mains time [732]Displays the total time that the AC drive has been connectedto the mains supply. This timer cannot be reset.Reset Energy [7331]Resets the energy counter. The stored information will beerased and a new registration period will start.732 Mains TimeStph:mm:ss7331 Rst EnergyStpANoUnit:h: mm:ss (hours: minutes: seconds)Range: 00: 00: 00–262143: 59: 59Default:Selection:NoNo, YesCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/index31031:31032:31033(hr:min:sec)121/175:121/176: 121/177EtherCAT index (hex)2407 : 2408 :2409Profinet IO index 1031:1032:1033Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1h:m:sModbus formatEintCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 6Profibus slot/index 0/5EtherCAT index (hex) 2006Profinet IO index 6Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: After reset the setting automatically goes back to“No”.Energy [733]Displays the total energy consumption since the last energyreset [7331] took place.733 EnergyStpkWhUnit:Range:Wh (shows Wh, kWh, MWh or GWh)0.0–999999GWhCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31034Profibus slot/index 121/178EtherCAT index (hex)240aProfinet IO index 1034Fieldbus formatLong, 1=1 WhModbus formatEInt174 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

11.8 View Trip Log [800]Main menu with parameters for viewing all the logged tripdata. In total the AC drive saves the last 10 trips in the tripmemory. The trip memory refreshes on the FIFO principle(First In, First Out). Every trip in the memory is logged onthe time of the “Run Time [731]” counter. At every trip, theactual values of several parameter are stored and available fortroubleshooting.11.8.1 Trip Message log [810]Display the cause of the trip and what time that it occurred.When a trip occurs the status menus are copied to the tripmessage log. There are nine trip message logs [810]–[890].When the tenth trip occurs the oldest trip will disappear.After reset of occurred trip, the trip message will be removedand menu [100] will be indicated.Trip message [811]-[81O]The information from the status menus are copied to thetrip message log when a trip occurs.Trip menu Copied from Description811 711 Process Value812 712 Speed813 712 Torque814 714 Shaft Power815 715 Electrical Power816 716 Current817 717 Output voltage818 718 Frequency819 719 DC Link voltage81A 71A Heatsink TemperatureUnit:Range:8x0 Trip messageStph:mm:ssh: m (hours: minutes)0h: 0m–65355h: 59m810 Ext TripStp 132:12:1481B 71B PT100_1, 2, 381C 721 AC drive Status81D 723 Digital input status81E 724 Digital output status81F 725 Analogue input status 1-281G 726 Analogue input status 3-481H 727 Analogue output status 1-2For fieldbus integer value of trip message, see message tablefor warnings, [722].NOTE: Bits 0–5 used for trip message value. Bits 6–15for internal use.Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31101Profibus slot/index 121/245EtherCAT index (hex)244dProfinet IO index 1101Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatUInt81I 728 I/O status option board 181J 729 I/O status option board 281K 72A I/O status option board 381L 731 Run Time81M 732 Mains Time81N 733 Energy81O 310 Process referenceCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31102 - 31135Profibus slot/index121/246 - 254,122/0 - 24EtherCAT index (hex)244e - 246fProfinet IO index 1102 - 1135Fieldbus formatModbus formatDepends on parameter, seerespective parameter.Depends on parameter, seerespective parameter.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 175

Example:Fig. 109 shows the third trip memory menu [830]: Overtemperature trip occurred after 1396 hours and 13 minutesin Run time.Fig. 113 Trip 3830 Over tempStp 1396h:13m11.8.3 Reset Trip Log [8A0]Resets the content of the 10 trip memories.Default:No 0Yes 18A0 Reset TripStpNoNo11.8.2 Trip Messages [820] - [890]Same information as for menu [810].Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:Profibus slot/indexProfinet IO indexFieldbus formatModbus format31151–3118531201–3123531251–3128531301–3133531351–3138531401–3143531451–3148531501–31535122/40–122/74122/90–122/124122/140–122/174122/190–122/224122/240–123/18123/35 - 123/68123/85–123/118123/135–123/1681151 - 11851201 - 12351251 - 12851301 - 13351351 - 13851401 - 14351451 - 14851501 - 1535See Trip 811 - 81OTrip log list23456789Trip log list23456789Trip log list23456789Communication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 8Profibus slot/index 0/7EtherCAT index (hex) 2008Profinet IO index 8Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntNOTE: After the reset the setting goes automaticallyback to “NO”. The message “OK” is displayed for 2 sec.All nine alarm lists contain the same type of data. Forexample DeviceNet parameter 31101 in alarm list 1contains the same data information as 31151 in alarm list 2.176 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

11.9 System Data [900]Main menu for viewing all the AC drive system data.11.9.1 VSD Data [920]VSD Type [921]Shows the AC drive type according to the type number.The options are indicated on the type plate of the AC drive.NOTE: If the control board is not configured, then typetype shown is VFX40-XXX.921 VFX2.0Stp VFX48-046Example of typeCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31037Profibus slot/index 121/181EtherCAT index (hex)240dProfinet IO index 1037Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1Modbus formatUIntExamples:VFX48-046AC drive-series suited for 380-480 volt mainssupply, and a rated output current of 46 A.Software [922]Shows the software version number of the AC drive.Fig. 114 gives an example of the version number.922 SoftwareStp V 4.32 - 03.07Fig. 114 Example of software versionV 4.32 = Software version- 03.07 = option version, is only visible and valid for specialsoftware, type OEM adapted software.03 = (major) special software variant number07= (minor) revision of this special softwareCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:31038 software version31039 option versionProfibus slot/index 121/182-183EtherCAT index (hex)240e, 240fProfinet IO index 1038, 1039Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntTable 29Information for Modbus and Profibus number,software versionBit Example Description7–0 32 minor13–8 4 major15–14release00: V, release version01: P, pre-releaseversion10: , Beta version11: , Alpha versionTable 30Information for Modbus and Profibus number,option versionBit Example Description7–0 07 minor15–8 03 majorNOTE: It is important that the software version displayedin menu [922] is the same software version number asthe software version number written on the title page ofthis instruction manual. If not, the functionality asdescribed in this manual may differ from thefunctionality of the AC drive.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Functional Description 177

Unit name [923]Option to enter a name of the unit for service use orcustomer identity. The function enables the user to define aname with max 12 characters. Use the Prev and Next key tomove the cursor to the required position. Then use the +and - keys to scroll in the character list. Confirm thecharacter by moving the cursor to the next position bypressing the Next key. See section User-defined Unit [323].ExampleCreate user name USER 15.1. When in the menu [923] press Next to move the cursorto the right most position.2. Press the + key until the character U is displayed.3. Press Next.4. Then press the + key until S is displayed and confirmwith Next.5. Repeat until you have entered USER15.923 USER 15StpDefault:No characters shownCommunication informationModbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42301–42312Profibus slot/index 165/225–236EtherCAT index (hex) 48fd - 4908Profinet IO index 18685 - 18696Fieldbus formatUIntModbus formatUIntWhen sending a unit name you send one character at a timestarting at the right most position.178 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

12. Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance12.1 Trips, warnings and limitsIn order to protect the AC drive the principal operatingvariables are continuously monitored by the system. If oneof these variables exceeds the safety limit an error/warningmessage is displayed. In order to avoid any possiblydangerous situations, the inverter sets itself into a stop Modecalled Trip and the cause of the trip is shown in the display.Trips will always stop the AC drive. Trips can be divided intonormal and soft trips, depending on the setup Trip Type, seemenu “[250] Autoreset”. Normal trips are default. For normaltrips the AC drive stops immediately, i.e. the motorcoasts naturally to a standstill. For soft trips the AC drivestops by ramping down the speed, i.e. the motor deceleratesto a standstill.“Normal Trip”• The AC drive stops immediately, the motor coasts tonaturally to a standstill.• The Trip relay or output is active (if selected).• The Trip LED is on.• The accompanying trip message is displayed.• The “TRP” status indication is displayed (area D of thedisplay).• After reset command, the trip message will disappear andmenu [100] will be indicated.“Soft Trip”• the AC drive stops by decelerating to a standstill.During the deceleration.• The accompanying trip message is displayed, includingan additional soft trip indicator “S” before the trip time.• The Trip LED is flashing.• The Warning relay or output is active (if selected).After standstill is reached.• The Trip LED is on.• The Trip relay or output is active (if selected).• The “TRP” status indication is displayed (area D of thedisplay).• After reset command, the trip message will disappear andmenu [100] will be indicated.Apart from the TRIP indicators there are two moreindicators to show that the inverter is in an “abnormal”situation.“Warning”• The inverter is close to a trip limit.• The Warning relay or output is active (if selected).• The Trip LED is flashing.• The accompanying warning message is displayed inwindow “[722] Warning”.• One of the warning indications is displayed (area F ofthe display).“Limits”• The inverter is limiting torque and/or frequency to avoida trip.• The Limit relay or output is active (if selected).• The Trip LED is flashing.• One of the Limit status indications is displayed (area Dof the display).CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance 179

Table 31Trip/WarningmessagesList of trips and warningsSelectionsTrip(Normal/Soft)Motor I 2 t Trip/Off/Limit Normal/Soft I 2 tPTC Trip/Off Normal/SoftMotor PTC On NormalPT100 Trip/Off Normal/SoftMotor lost Trip/Off NormalLocked rotor Trip/Off NormalExt trip Via DigIn Normal/SoftExt Mot Temp Via DigIn Normal/SoftMon MaxAlarm Trip/Off/Warn Normal/SoftMon MinAlarm Trip/Off/Warn Normal/SoftComm error Trip/Off/Warn Normal/SoftDeviation Via Option NormalEncoder Trip/Off NormalPump Via Option NormalOver temp On Normal OTOver curr F On NormalOver volt D On NormalOver volt G On NormalOver volt On NormalOver speed On NormalUnder voltage On Normal LVLC LevelTrip/Off/WarnVia DigInNormal/Soft LCLDesat ### * On NormalDClink error On NormalPower FaultPF #### *OnNormalOvolt m cut On NormalOver voltage Warning VLSafe stop Warning SSTBrake Trip/Off/Warn NormalOPTION On NormalWarningindicators(Area D)12.2 Trip conditions, causes andremedial actionThe table later on in this section must be seen as a basic aidto find the cause of a system failure and to how to solve anyproblems that arise. An AC drive is mostly just a small partof a complete AC drive system. Sometimes it isdifficult to determine the cause of the failure, although theAC drive gives a certain trip message it is not always easy tofind the right cause of the failure. Good knowledge of thecomplete drive system is thereforenecessary. Contact your supplier if you have any questions.The AC drive is designed in such a way that it tries to avoidtrips by limiting torque, overvolt etc.Failures occurring during commissioning or shortly aftercommissioning are most likely to be caused by incorrectsettings or even bad connections.Failures or problems occurring after a reasonable period offailure-free operation can be caused by changes in the systemor in its environment (e.g. wear).Failures that occur regularly for no obvious reasons aregenerally caused by Electro Magnetic Interference. Be surethat the installation fulfils the demands for installationstipulated in the EMC directives. See chapter 8. page 47.Sometimes the so-called “Trial and error” method is aquicker way to determine the cause of the failure. This canbe done at any level, from changing settings and functions todisconnecting single control cables or replacing entire drives.The Trip Log can be useful for determining whether certaintrips occur at certain moments. The Trip Log also recordsthe time of the trip in relation to the run time counter.WARNING!If it is necessary to open the AC drive or anypart of the system (motor cable housing,conduits, electrical panels, cabinets, etc.) toinspect or take measure-ments as suggested in thisinstruction manual, it is absolutely necessary to readand follow the safety instructions in the manual.*) Refer to table Table 32regarding which Desat orPower Fault is triggered.180 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

12.2.1 Technically qualified personnelInstallation, commissioning, demounting, making measurements,etc., of or at the AC drive may only be carried out bypersonnel technically qualified for the task.12.2.2 Opening the AC driveWARNING!Always switch the mains voltage off if it isnecessary to open the AC drive and wait atleast 7 minutes to allow the capacitors todischarge.WARNING!In case of malfunctioning always check theDC-link voltage, or wait one hour after themains voltage has been switched off, beforedismantling the AC drive for repair.The connections for the control signals and the switches areisolated from the mains voltage. Always take adequateprecautions before opening the AC drive.12.2.3 Precautions to take with aconnected motorIf work must be carried out on a connected motor or on thedriven machine, the mains voltage must always first bedisconnected from the AC drive. Wait at least 7 minutesbefore continuing.12.2.4 Autoreset TripIf the maximum number of Trips during Autoreset has beenreached, the trip message hour counter is marked with an“A”.830 OVERVOLT GTrp A 345:45:12Fig. 115 Autoreset tripFig. 115 shows the 3rd trip memory menu [830]:Overvoltage G trip after the maximum Autoreset attemptstook place after 345 hours, 45 minutes and 12 seconds ofrun time.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance 181

Table 32Trip condition, their possible causes and remedial actionTrip condition Possible Cause Remedy Size**Motor I 2 t“I 2 t”I 2 t value is exceeded.- Overload on the motor according to theprogrammed I 2 t settings.- Check on mechanical overload on themotor or the machinery (bearings,gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)- Change the Motor I 2 t Current setting inmenu group [230]PTCMotor thermistor (PTC) exceeds maximumlevel.NOTE: Only valid if option board PTC/PT100 is used.- Check on mechanical overload on themotor or the machinery (bearings,gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)- Check the motor cooling system.- Self-cooled motor at low speed, too highload.- Set PTC, menu [234] to OFFMotor PTCMotor thermistor (PTC) exceeds maximumlevel.NOTE: Only valid if [237] is enabled.- Check on mechanical overload on themotor or the machinery (bearings,gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)- Check the motor cooling system.- Self-cooled motor at low speed, too highload.- Set PTC, menu [237] to OFFB,C,DPT100Motor PT100 elements exceeds maximumlevel.NOTE: Only valid if option board PTC/PT100 is used.- Check on mechanical overload on themotor or the machinery (bearings,gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)- Check the motor cooling system.- Self-cooled motor at low speed, too highload.- Set PT100 to OFF, menu [234]Motor lostPhase loss or too great imbalance on themotor phases- Check the motor voltage on all phases.- Check for loose or poor motor cableconnections- If all connections are OK, contact yoursupplier- Set motor lost alarm to OFF.Locked rotorTorque limit at motor standstill:- Mechanical blocking of the rotor.- Check for mechanical problems at themotor or the machinery connected to themotor- Set locked rotor alarm to OFF.Ext tripExternal input (DigIn 1-8) active:- active low function on the input.- Check the equipment that initiates theexternal input- Check the programming of the digitalinputs DigIn 1-8Ext Mot TempExternal input (DigIn 1-8) active:- active low function on the input.- Check the equipment that initiates theexternal input- Check the programming of the digitalinputs DigIn 1-8Mon MaxAlarmMax alarm level (overload) has beenreached.- Check the load condition of the machine- Check the monitor setting in section 11.4.1, page124.Mon MinAlarmMin alarm level (underload) has beenreached.- Check the load condition of the machine- Check the monitor setting in section 11.4.1, page124.- Check cables and connection of theserial communication.- Check all settings with regard to theserial communication- Restart the equipment including theAC driveComm errorError on serial communication (option)182 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Table 32Trip condition, their possible causes and remedial actionTrip condition Possible Cause Remedy Size**Deviation1Deviation2EncoderPumpOver tempOver curr FOver voltD(eceleration)Over voltG(eneration)CRANE board detecting deviation in motoroperation.NOTE: Only used in Crane Control.Motor speed deviation in between referenceand measured speed detected.NOTE: Only valid if option board Encoder isused.Lost encoder board, encoder cable orencoder pulses.NOTE: Only valid if option board Encoder isused.No master pump can be selected due toerror in feedback signalling.NOTE: Only used in Pump Control.Heatsink temperature too high:- Too high ambient temperature of theAC drive- Insufficient cooling- Too high current- Blocked or stuffed fansMotor current exceeds the peak AC drivecurrent:- Too short acceleration time.- Too high motor load- Excessive load change- Soft short-circuit between phases orphase to earth- Poor or loose motor cable connections- Too high IxR Compensation levelToo high DC Link voltage:- Too short deceleration time withrespect to motor/machine inertia.- Too small brake resistor malfunctioningBrake chopperOver volt (Mains)Too high DC Link voltage, due to too highO(ver) volt mains voltageM(ains) cutOver speedUnder voltageLC LevelMotor speed measurement exceedsmaximum level. 110% of max speed (allparameter sets).Too low DC Link voltage:- Too low or no supply voltage- Mains voltage dip due to starting othermajor power consuming machines onthe same line.Low liquid cooling level in external reservoir.External input (DigIn 1-8) active:- active low function on the input.NOTE: Only valid for AC drive types with LiquidCooling option.- Check encoder signals- Check Deviation jumper on Crane option board.- Check the settings in menus [3AB] & [3AC]- Check motor operation.- Check speed deviation settings [22G#].- Check speed PI controller settings [37#].- Check torque limit setting [351]- Check encoder board.- Check encoder cable and signals.- Disable encoder, set menu [22B] to OFF.- Check cables and wiring for Pump feedbacksignals- Check settings with regard to the pump feedbackdigital inputs- Check the cooling of the AC drive cabinet.- Check the functionality of the built-in fans. Thefans must switch on automatically if the heatsinktemperature gets too high. At power up the fansare briefly switched on.- Check AC drive and motor rating- Clean fans- Check the acceleration time settings andmake them longer if necessary.- Check the motor load.- Check on bad motor cable connections- Check on bad earth cable connection- Check on water or moisture in the motor housingand cable connections.- Lower the level of IxR Compensation [352]- Check the deceleration time settings and makethem longer if necessary.- Check the dimensions of the brake resistor andthe functionality of the Brake chopper (if used)- Check the main supply voltage- Try to take away the interference cause or useother main supply lines.Check encoder cables, wiring and setupCheck motor data setup [22x]Perform short ID-run- Make sure all three phases are properly connectedand that the terminal screws are tightened.- Check that the mains supply voltage is within thelimits of the AC drive.- Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is causedby other machinery- Use the function low voltage override [421]- Check liquid cooling- Check the equipment and wiring that initiates theexternal input- Check the programming of the digital inputs DigIn1-8OPTION If an Option specific trip occurs Check the description of the specific optionCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance 183

Table 32Trip condition, their possible causes and remedial actionTrip condition Possible Cause Remedy Size**DesatDesat U+ *Desat U- *Desat V+ *Desat V- *Desat W+ *Desat W- *Desat BCC *DC link errorPower FaultFailure in output stage,- desaturation of IGBTs- Hard short circuit between phases orphase to earth- Earth fault- For size B - D also the Brake IGBTDC link voltage ripple exceeds maximumlevelOne of the 10 PF (Power Fault) trips belowhas occured, but could not be determined.* = 2...6 Module number if parallel power units (size 300–1500 A)** = If no size is mentioned in this column, the information is valid for all sizes.- Check on bad motor cable connections- Check on bad earth cable connections- Check on water and moisture in themotor housing and cable connections- Check that the rating plate data of the motor iscorrectly entered.- Check the brake resistor, brake IGBT and wiring.- For size G and up, check the cables from thePEBBs to the motor, that all are in correct order inparallell connection- Make sure all three phases are properly connectedand that the terminal screws are tightened.- Check that the mains supply voltage is within thelimits of the AC drive.- Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is causedby other machinery.- Check the PF errors and try to determine thecause. The trip history can be helpful.B - DE & Up- Check for clogged air inlet filters in panel door andPF Fan Err * Error in fan moduleE & Upblocking material in fan module.PF HCB Err* Error in controlled rectifier module (HCB) - Check mains supply voltage D & UpPF Curr Err *PF Overvolt *Error in current balancing:- between different modules.- between two phases within one module.Error in voltage balancing, overvoltagedetected in one of the power modules(PEBB)- Check motor.- Check fuses and line connections- Check the individual motor current leads with anclamp on amp meter.- Check motor.- Check fuses and line connections.PF Comm Err * Internal communication error Contact servicePF Int Temp * Internal temperature too high Check internal fansPF Temp Err * Malfunction in temperature sensor Contact servicePF DC Err *PF Sup Err *BrakeDC-link error and mains supply faultMains supply faultBrake tripped on brake fault (not released)or Brake not engaged during stop.- Check mains supply voltage- Check fuses and line connections.- Check mains supply voltage- Check fuses and line connections.- Check Brake acknowledge signal wiring to selecteddigital input.- Check programming of digital input DigIn 1-8,[520].- Check circuit breaker feeding mechanical brakecircuit.- Check mechanical brake if acknowledge signal iswired from brake limit switch.- Check brake contactor.- Check settings [33C], [33D], [33E], [33F].G& UpG& UpD & Up184 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

12.3 MaintenanceThe AC drive is designed not to require any servicing ormaintenance. There are however some things which must bechecked regularly.All AC drives have built-in fan which is speed controlledusing heatsink temperature feedback. This means that thefans are only running if the AC drive is running and loaded.The design of the heatsinks is such that the fan does notblow the cooling air through the interior of the AC drive,but only across the outer surface of the heatsink. However,running fans will always attract dust. Depending on theenvironment the fan and the heatsink will collect dust.Check this and clean the heatsink and the fans whennecessary.If AC drives are built into cabinets, also check and clean thedust filters of the cabinets regularly.Check external wiring, connections and control signals.Tighten terminal screws if necessary. For more informationon maintenance, please contact your CG Drives & Automationservice partner.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance 185

186 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

13. OptionsThe standard options available are described here briefly.Some of the options have their own instruction orinstallation manual. For more information please contactyour supplier. See also Emotron VFX/FDU 2.0 Technicalcatalogue for more info.13.2 HandheldControl Panel 2.0Part numberDescription13.1 Options for the controlpanel01-5039-00Handheld Control Panel 2.0 complete forFDU/VFX2.0 or CDU/CDX 2.0Part numberDescription01-3957-00 Panel kit complete including panel01-3957-01 Panel kit complete including blank panelMounting cassette, blank panel and straight RS232-cable areavailable as options for the control panel. These options maybe useful, for example for mounting a control panel in acabinet door.The Handheld Control Panel - HCP 2.0 is a completecontrol panel, easy to connect to the AC drive, fortemporary use when e.g. commissioning, servicing and soon.The HCP has full functionality including memory. It ispossible to set parameters, view signals, actual values, faultlogger information and so on. It is also possible to use thememory to copy all data (such as parameter set data andmotor data) from one AC drive to the HCP and then loadthis data to other AC drivesFig. 116 Control panel in mounting cassette13.3 EmoSoftComEmoSoftCom is an optional software that runs on a personalcomputer. It can also be used to load parameter settingsfrom the AC drive to the PC for backup and printing.Recording can be made in oscilloscope mode. Please contactCG Drives & Automation sales for further information.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Options 187

13.4 Brake chopperAll AC drive sizes can be fitted with an optional built-inbrake chopper. The brake resistor must be mounted outsidethe AC drive. The choice of the resistor depends on theapplication switch-on duration and duty-cycle. This optioncan not be after mounted.t br ED =Table 34 Brake resistor VFX48 V typesRmin [ohm] ifType supply 380–415V ACWARNING!The table gives the minimum values of thebrake resistors. Do not use resistors lowerthan this value. The AC drive can trip or evenbe damaged due to high braking currents.The following formula can be used to define the power ofthe connected brake resistor:P resistor =(Brake level V DC ) 2x EDR minWhere:P resistorrequired power of brakeresistorBrake level VDC DC brake voltage level (see Table 34)Rminminimum allowable brake resistor(see Table 35, Table 36 and Table 37EDeffective braking period. Defined as:120 [s]t brActive braking time at nominal brakingpower during a 2 minute operationcycle.Maximum value of ED = 1, meaning continuous braking.Table 33Supply voltage (V AC )(set in menu [21B]Brake level (V DC )220–240 380380–415 660440–480 780500–525 860550–600 1000660–690 1150Rmin [ohm] ifsupply 440–480V ACVFX48-003 43 50-004 43 50-006 43 50-008 43 50-010 43 50-013 43 50-018 43 50-026 26 30-031 26 30-037 17 20-046 17 20-061 10 12-074 10 12-090 3.8 4.4-109 3.8 4.4-146 3.8 4.4-175 3.8 4.4-210 2.7 3.1-250 2.7 3.1-300 2 x 3.8 2 x 4.4-375 2 x 3.8 2 x 4.4-430 2 x 2.7 2 x 3.1-500 2 x 2.7 2 x 3.1-600 3 x 2.7 3 x 3.1-650 3 x 2.7 3 x 3.1-750 3 x 2.7 3 x 3.1-860 4 x 2.7 4 x 3.1-1K0 4 x 2.7 4 x 3.1-1K15 5 x 2.7 5 x 3.1-1K25 5 x 2.7 5 x 3.1-1K35 6 x 2.7 6 x 3.1-1K5 6 x 2.7 6 x 3.1-1K75 7 x 2.7 7 x 3.1-2K0 8 x 2.7 8 x 3.1-2K25 9 x 2.7 9 x 3.1-2K5 10 x 2.7 10 x 3.1188 Options CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Table 35TypeBrake resistor VFX52 V typesRmin [ohm] ifsupply 440–480V ACRmin [ohm] ifsupply 500–525V ACVFX52-003 50 55-004 50 55-006 50 55-008 50 55-010 50 55-013 50 55-018 50 55-026 30 32-031 30 32-037 20 22-046 20 22-061 12 14-074 12 14Table 36TypeBrake resistor VFX69 V typesRmin [ohm]if supply500–525V ACRmin [ohm]if supply550–600V ACRmin [ohm]if supply660–690V ACVFX69-090 4.9 5.7 6.5-109 4.9 5.7 6.5-146 4.9 5.7 6.5-175 4.9 5.7 6.5-200 4.9 5.7 6.5-250 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5-300 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5-375 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5-400 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5-430 3 x 4.9 3 x 5.7 3 x 6.5-500 3 x 4.9 3 x 5.7 3 x 6.5-595 3 x 4.9 3 x 5.7 3 x 6.5-650 4 x 4.9 4 x 5.7 4 x 6.5-720 4 x 4.9 4 x 5.7 4 x 6.5-800 4 x 4.9 4 x 5.7 4 x 6.5-905 5 x 4.9 5 x 5.7 5 x 6.5-995 5 x 4.9 5 x 5.7 5 x 6.5-1K2 6 x 4.9 6 x 5.7 6 x 6.5-1K4 7 x 4.9 7 x 5.7 7 x 6.5-1K6 8 x 4.9 8 x 5.7 8 x 6.5-1K8 9 x 4.9 9 x 5.7 9 x 6.5-2K0 10 x 4.9 10 x 5.7 10 x 6.5-2K2 11 x 4.9 11 x 5.7 11 x 6.5-2K4 12 x 4.9 12 x 5.7 12 x 6.5-2K6 13 x 4.9 13 x 5.7 13 x 6.5-2K8 14 x 4.9 14 x 5.7 14 x 6.5-3K0 15 x 4.9 15 x 5.7 15 x 6.513.5 I/O BoardPart number01-3876-01 I/O option board 2.0Each I/O option board 2.0 provides three extra relay outputsand three extra isolated digital inputs (24V). The I/O Boardworks in combination with the Pump/Fan Control, but canalso be used as a separate option. Maximum 3 I/O boardspossible. This option is described in a separate manual.13.6 EncoderPart numberThe Encoder 2.0 option board, used for connection offeedback signal of the actual motor speed via an incrementalencoder is described in a separate manual.For Emotron FDU this function is for speed read-out onlyor for spin start function. No speed control.13.7 PTC/PT100DescriptionDescription01-3876-03 Encoder 2.0 option boardPart numberDescription01-3876-08 PTC/PT100 2.0 option boardThe PTC/PT100 2.0 option board for connecting motorthermistors and max 3 PT100 elements to the AC drive isdescribed in a separate manual.13.8 Crane option boardPart numberDescription590059 Crane interface board, 230 V AC590060 Crane interface board, 24 V DCThis option is used in crane applications. The crane optionboard 2.0 is described in a separate manual.NOTE: Although the AC drive will detect a failure in thebrake electronics, the use of resistors with a thermaloverload which will cut off the power at overload isstrongly recommended.The brake chopper option is built-in by the manufacturerand must be specified when the AC drive is ordered.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Options 189

13.9 Serial communicationand fieldbusPart numberDescriptionFrom VFX softwareversion(see menu [922])Z301-3876-04 RS232/485 4.001-3876-05 Profibus DP 4.001-3876-06 DeviceNet 4.0~X1:1 Left terminalX1:2 Right terminal01-3876-0901-3876-10Modbus/TCP, IndustrialEthernetEtherCAT, IndustrialEthernet4.114.32Fig. 117 Connection of standby supply option on size B,C andE-F01-3876-11Profinet IO, one portIndustrial Ethernet4.32X1terminalName Function Specification01-3876-12Profinet IO, two portIndustrial Ethernet4.32For communication with the AC drive there are severaloption boards for communication. There are differentoptions for Fieldbus communication and one serialcommunication option with RS232 or RS485 interfacewhich has galvanic isolation.1 Ext. supply 12 Ext. supply 2External, AC drivemain power independent,supplyvoltage for controland communicationcircuits24 V DC ±10%Double isolated13.10 Standby supply boardoptionPart numberDescriptionConnect thepower supplyboard to thetwo blueterminalsmarkedA- and B+01-3954-00 Standby power supply kit for after mountingThe standby supply board option provides the possibility ofkeeping the communication system up and running withouthaving the 3-phase mains connected. One advantage is thatthe system can be set up without mains power. The optionwill also give backup for communication failure if mainpower is lost.=0V to A-24V to B+The standby supply board option is supplied with external±10% 24 V DC protected by a 2 A slow acting fuse, from adouble isolated transformer. The terminals X1:1, X1:2 (onsize B,C and E to F) are voltage polarity independent.The terminals A- and B+ (on size D) are voltage polaritydependent.Fig. 118 Connection of standby supply option on size DTerminal Name Function SpecificationA -0VB + +24VExternal, AC drivemain powerindependent, supplyvoltage for control andcommunicationcircuits24 V DC ±10%Double isolated190 Options CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

13.11 Safe Stop optionTo realize a Safe Stop configuration in accordance with SafeTorque Off (STO) EN-IEC 62061:2005 SIL 2 & EN-ISO13849-1:2006, the following three parts need to be attendedto:1. Inhibit trigger signals with safety relay K1 (via Safe Stopoption board).2. Enable input and control of AC drive (via normal I/Ocontrol signals of AC drive).3. Power conductor stage (checking status and feedback ofdriver circuits and IGBT’s).To enable the AC drive to operate and run the motor, thefollowing signals should be active:• "Inhibit" input, terminals 1 (DC+) and 2 (DC-) on theSafe Stop option board should be made active by connecting24 V DC to secure the supply voltage for thedriver circuits of the power conductors via safety relayK1. See also Fig. 121.• High signal on the digital input, e.g. terminal 10 in Fig.121, which is set to "Enable". For setting the digitalinput please refer to section 11.5.2, page 137.These two signals need to be combined and used to enablethe output of the AC drive and make it possible to activate aSafe Stop condition.NOTE: The "Safe Stop" condition according to EN-IEC62061:2005 SIL 2 & EN-ISO 13849-1:2006, can only berealized by de-activating both the "Inhibit" and "Enable"inputs.When the "Safe Stop" condition is achieved by using thesetwo different methods, which are independently controlled,this safety circuit ensures that the motor will not startrunning because:• The 24VDC signal is disconnected from the "Inhibit"input, terminals 1 and 2, the safety relay K1 is switchedoff.The supply voltage to the driver circuits of the powerconductors is switched off. This will inhibit the triggerpulses to the power conductors.• The trigger pulses from the control board are shut down.The Enable signal is monitored by the controller circuitwhich will forward the information to the PWM part onthe Control board.To make sure that the safety relay K1 has been switched off,this should be guarded externally to ensure that this relay didnot refuse to act. The Safe Stop option board offers afeedback signal for this via a second forced switched safetyrelay K2 which is switched on when a detection circuit hasconfirmed that the supply voltage to the driver circuits isshut down. See Table 37 for the contacts connections.To monitor the "Enable" function, the selection "RUN" ona digital output can be used. For setting a digital output, e.g.terminal 20 in the example Fig. 121, please refer to section11.5.4, page 143 [540].When the "Inhibit" input is de-activated, the AC drivedisplay will show a flashing "SST" indication in section D(bottom left corner) and the red Trip LED on the Controlpanel will be flashing.To resume normal operation, the following steps have to betaken:• Release "Inhibit" input; 24V DC (High) to terminal 1and 2.• Give a STOP signal to the AC drive, according to the setRun/Stop Control in menu [215].• Give a new Run command, according to the set Run/Stop Control in menu [215].NOTE: The method of generating a STOP command isdependent on the selections made in Start Signal Level/Edge [21A] and the use of a separate Stop input viadigital input.WARNING!The safe stop function can never be used forelectrical maintenance. For electricalmaintenance the AC drive should always bedisconnected from the supply voltage.Fig. 119 Connection of safe stop option in size B - D.654321CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Options 191

Table 37X1pinSpecification of Safe Stop option boardName Function SpecificationFig. 120 Connection of safe stop option in size E and up.12 3 4 561 Inhibit + Inhibit driver circuits of2 Inhibit - power conductors34NO contactrelay K2P contactrelay K2Feedback; confirmationof activated inhibit5 GND Supply ground6 +24 VDCSupply Voltage for operatingInhibit input only.DC 24 V(20–30 V)48 V DC /30 V AC /2 A+24 V DC ,50 mASafe Stop+5VPower boardK1NCK2+24 V DCEnableDigInControllerPWMStopDigOutFig. 121 Safe Stop connection192 Options CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

13.12 Output chokesOutput chokes, which are supplied separately, arerecommended for lengths of screened motor cable longerthan 100 m. Because of the fast switching of the motorvoltage and the capacitance of the motor cable (both line toline and line to earth screen), large switching currents can begenerated with long lengths of motor cable. Output chokesprevent the AC drive from tripping and should be installedas closely as possible to the AC drive.See also Emotron VFX/FDU 2.0 Technical catalogue forfilter selection guide.13.13 AFE - Active Front EndEmotron AC Drives from CG Drives & Automation are alsoavailable as Low harmonic drives and Regenerative drives.You will find more information on www.emotron.com /www.cgglobal.com.CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Options 193

194 Options CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

14. Technical Data14.1 Electrical specifications related to modelTable 38Typical motor power at mains voltage 400 VModelMax. outputcurrent [A]*Normal duty(120%, 1 min every 10 min)Power @400V[kW]Rated current[A]* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature.Heavy duty(150%, 1 min every 10 min) Frame sizePower@400V[kW]Ratedcurrent[A]VFX48-003 3.8 0.75 2.5 0.55 2.0VFX48-004 6.0 1.5 4.0 1.1 3.2VFX48-006 9.0 2.2 6.0 1.5 4.8VFX48-008 11.3 3 7.5 2.2 6.0VFX48-010 14.3 4 9.5 3 7.6VFX48-013 19.5 5.5 13.0 4 10.4VFX48-018 27.0 7.5 18.0 5.5 14.4VFX48-026 39 11 26 7.5 21VFX48-031 46 15 31 11 25VFX48-037 55 18.5 37 15 29.6VFX48-046 69 22 46 18.5 37VFX48-061 92 30 61 22 49VFX48-074 111 37 74 30 59VFX48-090 108 45 90 37 72VFX48-109 131 55 109 45 87VFX48-146 175 75 146 55 117VFX48-175 210 90 175 75 140VFX48-210 252 110 210 90 168VFX48-228 300 110 228 90 182VFX48-250 300 132 250 110 200VFX48-300 360 160 300 132 240VFX48-375 450 200 375 160 300VFX48-430 516 220 430 200 344VFX48-500 600 250 500 220 400VFX48-600 720 315 600 250 480VFX48-650 780 355 650 315 520(Number ofPEBB´s)VFX48-750 900 400 750 355 600VFX48-860 1032 450 860 400 688VFX48-1K0 1200 560 1000 450 800J(4)VFX48-1K15 1380 630 1150 500 920VFX48-1K25 1500 710 1250 560 1000KA(5)VFX48-1K35 1620 710 1350 600 1080VFX48-1K5 1800 800 1500 630 1200K(6)VFX48-1K75 2100 900 1750 800 1400 L(7)VFX48-2K0 2400 1120 2000 900 1600 M(8)VFX48-2K25 2700 1250 2250 1000 1800 N(9)VFX48-2K5 3000 1400 2500 1120 2000 O(10)Larger sizes available on requestBCDEFG(2)H(2)I(3)CG Drives & Automation 01-5326-01r1 Technical Data 195

Table 39Typical motor power at mains voltage 460 VModelMax. outputcurrent [A]*Normal duty(120%, 1 min every 10 min)Power @460V[hp]Rated current[A]* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature.Heavy duty(150%, 1 min every 10 min) Frame sizePower @460V[hp]Rated current[A]VFX48-003 3.8 1 2.5 1 2.0VFX48-004 6.0 2 4.0 1.5 3.2VFX48-006 9.0 3 6.0 2 4.8VFX48-008 11.3 3 7.5 3 6.0VFX48-010 14.3 5 9.5 3 7.6VFX48-013 19.5 7.5 13.0 5 10.4VFX48-018 27.0 10 18.0 7.5 14.4VFX48-026 39 15 26 10 21VFX48-031 46 20 31 15 25VFX48-037 55 25 37 20 29.6VFX48-046 69 30 46 25 37VFX48-061 92 40 61 30 49VFX48-074 111 50 74 40 59VFX48-090 108 60 90 50 72VFX48-109 131 75 109 60 87VFX48-146 175 100 146 75 117VFX48-175 210 125 175 100 140VFX48-210 252 150 210 125 168VFX48-228 300 200 228 150 182VFX48-250 300 200 250 150 200VFX48-300 360 250 300 200 240VFX48-375 450 300 375 250 300VFX48-430 516 350 430 250 344VFX48-500 600 400 500 350 400VFX48-600 720 500 600 400 480VFX48-650 780 550 650 400 520(Number ofPEBB´s)VFX48-750 900 600 750 500 600VFX48-860 1032 700 860 550 688VFX48-1K0 1200 800 1000 650 800J(4)VFX48-1K15 1380 900 1150 750 920VFX48-1K25 1500 1000 1250 800 1000KA(5)VFX48-1K35 1620 1100 1350 900 1080VFX48-1K5 1800 1250 1500 1000 1200K(6)VFX48-1K75 2100 1500 1750 1200 1400 L(7)VFX48-2K0 2400 1700 2000 1300 1600 M(8)VFX48-2K25 2700 1900 2250 1500 1800 N(9)VFX48-2K5 3000 2100 2500 1700 2000 O(10)Larger sizes available on requestBCDEFG(2)H(2)I(3)196 Technical Data CG Drives & Automation 01-5326-01r1

Table 40Typical motor power at mains voltage 525 VModelMax. outputcurrent [A]*Normal duty(120%, 1 min every 10 min)Power @525V[kW]Rated current[A]* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature.Heavy duty(150%, 1 min every 10 min) Frame sizePower @525V[kW]Rated current[A]VFX52-003 3.8 1.1 2.5 1.1 2.0VFX52-004 6.0 2.2 4.0 1.5 3.2VFX52-006 9.0 3 6.0 2.2 4.8VFX52-008 11.3 4 7.5 3 6.0VFX52-010 14.3 5.5 9.5 4 7.6VFX52-013 19.5 7.5 13.0 5.5 10.4VFX52-018 27.0 11 18.0 7.5 14.4VFX52-026 39 15 26 11 21VFX52-031 46 18.5 31 15 25VFX52-037 55 22 37 18.5 29.6VFX52-046 69 30 46 22 37VFX52-061 92 37 61 30 49VFX52-074 111 45 74 37 59VFX69-090 108 55 90 45 72VFX69-109 131 75 109 55 87VFX69-146 175 90 146 75 117VFX69-175 210 110 175 90 140VFX69-200 240 132 200 110 160VFX69-250 300 160 250 132 200VFX69-300 360 200 300 160 240VFX69-375 450 250 375 200 300VFX69-400 480 250 400 220 320VFX69-430 516 300 430 250 344VFX69-500 600 315 500 300 400(Number ofPEBB´s)BCDF69H69 (2)I69 (3)VFX69-595 720 400 600 315 480VFX69-650 780 450 650 355 520VFX69-720 864 500 720 400 576J69 (4)VFX69-800 960 560 800 450 640VFX69-995 1200 630 1000 500 800 KA69 (5)VFX69-1K2 1440 800 1200 630 960 K69 (6)VFX69-1K4 1680 1000 1400 800 1120 L69 (7)VFX69-1K6 1920 1100 1600 900 1280 M69 (8)VFX69-1K8 2160 1300 1800 1000 1440 N69 (9)VFX69-2K0 2400 1400 2000 1100 1600 O69 (10)VFX69-2K2 2640 1600 2200 1200 1760 P69 (11)VFX69-2K4 2880 1700 2400 1400 1920 Q69 (12)VFX69-2K6 3120 1900 2600 1500 2080 R69 (13)VFX69-2K8 3360 2000 2800 1600 2240 S69 (14)VFX69-3K0 3600 2200 3000 1700 2400 T69 (15)CG Drives & Automation 01-5326-01r1 Technical Data 197

Table 41Typical motor power at mains voltage 575 VModelMax.outputcurrent[A]*Normal duty(120%, 1 min every 10 min)Power @575V[hp]Rated current[A]* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature.Heavy duty(150%, 1 min every 10 min) Frame sizePower @575V[hp]Rated current[A]VFX69-090 108 75 90 60 72VFX69-109 131 100 109 75 87VFX69-146 175 125 146 100 117VFX69-175 210 150 175 125 140VFX69-200 240 200 200 150 160VFX69-250 300 250 250 200 200VFX69-300 360 300 300 250 240VFX69-375 450 350 375 300 300VFX69-400 480 400 400 300 320VFX69-430 516 400 430 350 344VFX69-500 600 500 500 400 400VFX69-595 720 600 600 500 480VFX69-650 780 650 650 550 520VFX69-720 864 750 720 600 576(Number ofPEBB´s)F69H69 (2)I69 (3)J69 (4)VFX69-800 960 850 800 650 640VFX69-905 1080 950 900 750 720VFX69-995 1200 1000 1000 850 800KA69 (5)VFX69-1K2 1440 1200 1200 1000 960 K69 (6)VFX69-1K4 1680 1500 1400 1200 1120 L69 (7)VFX69-1K6 1920 1700 1600 1300 1280 M69 (8)VFX69-1K8 2160 1900 1800 1500 1440 N69 (9)VFX69-2K0 2400 2100 2000 1700 1600 O69 (10)VFX69-2K2 2640 2300 2200 1800 1760 P69 (11)VFX69-2K4 2880 2500 2400 2000 1920 Q69 (12)VFX69-2K6 3120 2700 2600 2200 2080 R69 (13)VFX69-2K8 3360 3000 2800 2400 2240 S69 (14)VFX69-3K0 3600 3200 3000 2500 2400 T69 (15)198 Technical Data CG Drives & Automation 01-5326-01r1

Table 42Typical motor power at mains voltage 690 VModelMax. outputcurrent [A]*Normal duty(120%, 1 min every 10 min)Power @690V[kW]Rated current[A]* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature.Heavy duty(150%, 1 min every 10 min) Frame sizePower @690V[kW]Rated current[A]VFX69-090 108 90 90 75 72VFX69-109 131 110 109 90 87VFX69-146 175 132 146 110 117VFX69-175 210 160 175 132 140VFX69-200 240 200 200 160 160VFX69-250 300 250 250 200 200VFX69-300 360 315 300 250 240VFX69-375 450 355 375 315 300VFX69-400 480 400 400 315 320VFX69-430 516 450 430 315 344VFX69-500 600 500 500 355 400VFX69-595 720 600 600 450 480VFX69-650 780 630 650 500 520VFX69-720 864 710 720 560 576(Number ofPEBB´s)F69H69 (2)I69 (3)J69 (4)VFX69-800 960 800 800 630 640VFX69-905 1080 900 900 710 720VFX69-995 1200 1000 1000 800 800KA69 (5)VFX69-1K2 1440 1200 1200 900 960 K69 (6)VFX69-1K4 1680 1400 1400 1120 1120 L69 (7)VFX69-1K6 1920 1600 1600 1250 1280 M69 (8)VFX69-1K8 2160 1800 1800 1400 1440 N69 (9)VFX69-2K0 2400 2000 2000 1600 1600 O69 (10)VFX69-2K2 2640 2200 2200 1700 1760 P69 (11)VFX69-2K4 2880 2400 2400 1900 1920 Q69 (12)VFX69-2K6 3120 2600 2600 2000 2080 R69 (13)VFX69-2K8 3360 2800 2800 2200 2240 S69 (14)VFX69-3K0 3600 3000 3000 2400 2400 T69 (15)CG Drives & Automation 01-5326-01r1 Technical Data 199

14.2 General electrical specificationsTable 43General electrical specificationsGeneralMains voltage:VFX48VFX52VFX69Mains frequency:Input power factor:Output voltage:Output frequency:Output switching frequency:Efficiency at nominal load:Control signal inputs:Analogue (differential)Analogue Voltage/current:Max. input voltage:Input impedance:Resolution:Hardware accuracy:Non-linearityDigital:Input voltage:Max. input voltage:Input impedance:Signal delay:Control signal outputsAnalogueOutput voltage/current:Max. output voltage:Short-circuit current ():Output impedance:Resolution:Maximum load impedance for currentHardware accuracy:Offset:Non-linearity:DigitalOutput voltage:Shortcircuit current():RelaysContactsReferences+10VDC-10VDC+24VDC230-480V +10%/-15% (-10% at 230 V)440-525 V +10 %/-15 %500-690V +10%/-15%45 to 65 Hz0.950–Mains supply voltage:0–400 Hz3 kHz97% for models 003 to 01898% for models 026 to 3K00-±10 V/0-20 mA via switch+30 V/30 mA20 k(voltage)250 (current)11 bits + sign1% type + 1 ½ LSB fsd1½ LSBHigh: >9 VDC, Low: 23 VDC openLow:

14.3 Operation at highertemperaturesMost Emotron AC drives are made for operation atmaximum of 40°C ambient temperature. However, for mostmodels, it is possible to use the AC drive at highertemperatures with little loss in performance. Table 44 showsambient temperatures as well as derating for highertemperatures.Table 44Ambient temperature and derating 400–690 V typesModelIP20IP54Max temp. Derating: possible Max temp. Derating: possibleVFX**-003 to VFX**-074 – – 40°C -2.5%/°C to max +10°CVFX48-090 to VFX48-250VFX69-090 to VFX69-200VFX48-300 to VFX48-2K5VFX69-250 to VFX69-3K0– – 40°C -2.5%/°C to max +5°C40°C -2.5%/°C to max +5°C 40°C -2.5%/°C to max +5°CExampleIn this example we have a motor with the following data thatwe want to run at the ambient temperature of 45°C:Voltage400 VCurrent68 APower37 kWSelect AC driveThe ambient temperature is 5 °C higher than the maximumambient temperature. The following calculation is made toselect the correct AC drive model.Derating is possible with loss in performance of 2.5%/°C.Derating will be: 5 X 2.5% = 12.5%Calculation for model VFX48-07474 A - (12.5% x 74) = 64.8 A; this is not enough.Calculation for model VFX48-09090 A - (12.5% x 90) = 78.8AIn this example we select the VFX48-090.CG Drives & Automation 01-5326-01r1 Technical Data 201

14.4 Dimensions and WeightsThe table below gives an overview of the dimensions andweights. The models 003 to 250 is available in IP54 as wallmounted modules.The models 300 to 3K0 consist of 2, 3, 4 .... 15 paralleledpower electronic building block (PEBB) available in IP20 aswall mounted modules and in IP54 mounted standardcabinet.Protection class IP54 is according to the EN 60529standard.Table 45Mechanical specifications, VFX48, VFX52ModelsFrame sizeDim. H x W x D [mm]IP20Dim. H x W x D [mm]IP54WeightIP20 [kg]Weight IP54[kg]003 to 018 B – 350(416)x 203 x 200 – 12.5026 to 046 C – 440(512)x178x292 – 24061 to 074 D – 545(590) x 220 x 295 – 3290 to 109 E – 950 x 285 x 314 – 56146 to 175 E – 950 x 285 x 314 – 60210 to 250 F – 950 x 345 x 314 – 74300 to 375 G (2xE) 1036 x 500 x 390 2250 x 600 x 600 140 350430 to 500 H (2xF) 1036 x 500 x 450 2250 x 600 x 600 170 380600 to 750 I (3xF) 1036 x 730 x 450 2250x 900 x 600 248 506860 to 1K0 J (2xH) 1036 x 1100 x 450 2250 x 1200 x 600 340 6971K15 to 1K25 KA (H+I) 1036 x 1365 x 450 2250 x 1500 x 600 418 8381K35 to 1K5 K (2xI) 1036 x 1630 x 450 2250 x 1800 x 600 496 9871K75 L (2xH+I) 1036 x 2000 x 450 2250 x 2100 x 600 588 11902K0 M(H+2xI) 1036 x 2230 x 450 2250 x 2400 x 600 666 13232K25 N (3xI) 1036 x 2530 x 450 2250 x 2700 x 600 744 15182K5 O (2xH+2xI) 1036 x 2830 x 450 2250 x 3000 x 600 836 1772Table 46Mechanical specifications, VFX69ModelsFrame sizeDim. H x W x D [mm]IP20Dim. H x W x D [mm]IP54WeightIP20 [kg]Weight IP54[kg]90 to 200 F69 – 1090 x 345 x 314 – 77250 to 375 H69 (2xF69) 1176 x 500 x 450 2250 x 600 x 600 176 399430 to 595 I69 (3xF69) 1176 x 730 x 450 2250 x 900 x 600 257 563650 to 800 J69 (2xH69) 1176 x 1100 x 450 2250 x 1200 x 600 352 773905 to 995 KA69 (H69+I69) 1176 x 1365 x 450 2250 x 1500 x 600 433 937750 to 1K2 K69 (2xI69) 1176 x 1630 x 450 2250 x 1800 x 600 514 11001K4 L69 (2xH69+I69) 1176 x 2000 x 450 2250 x 2100 x 600 609 13111K6 M69 (H69+2xI69) 1176 x 2230 x 450 2250 x 2400 x 600 690 14811K8 N69 (3xI69) 1176 x 2530 x 450 2250 x 2700 x 600 771 16512K0O69(2xH69+2xI69)1176 x 2830 x 450 2250 x 3000 x 600 866 18492K2 P69 (H69+3xI69) 1176 x 3130 x 450 2250 x 3300 x 600 947 20502K4 Q69 (4xI69) 1176 x 3430 x 450 2250 x 3600 x 600 1028 22142K6R69(2xH69+3xI69)1176 x 3730 x 450 2250 x 3900 x 600 1123 24232K8 S69 (H69+4xI69) 1176 x 4030 x 450 2250 x 4200 x 600 1204 26133K0 T69 (5xI69) 1176 x 4330 x 450 2250 x 4500 x 600 1285 2777202 Technical Data CG Drives & Automation 01-5326-01r1

14.5 Environmental conditionsTable 47OperationParameterNormal operationNominal ambient temperatureAtmospheric pressure0C–40C See table, see Table 44 for different conditions86–106 kPaRelative humidity, non-condensing 0–90%Contamination,according to IEC 60721-3-3VibrationsAltitudeNo electrically conductive dust allowed. Cooling air must be clean and free from corrosivematerials. Chemical gases, class 3C2. Solid particles, class 3S2.According to IEC 600068-2-6, Sinusodial vibrations:10

14.6 Fuses, cable crosssectionsand glands14.6.1 According to IEC ratingsUse mains fuses of the type gL/gG conforming to IEC 269or installation cut-outs with similar characteristics. Checkthe equipment first before installing the glands.Max. Fuse = maximum fuse value that still protects the ACdrive and upholds warranty.NOTE: The dimensions of fuse and cable cross-sectionare dependent on the application and must bedetermined in accordance with local regulations.NOTE: The dimensions of the power terminals used in themodels 300 to3K00 can differ depending on customerspecification.Table 49Fuses, cable cross-sections and glandsModelVFX**-003VFX**-004VFX**-006VFX**-008VFX**-010VFX**-013VFX**-018Nominalinputcurrent[A]2.23.55.26.98.711.315.6Maximum valuefuse [A]44610101620VFX**-02622 25VFX**-031 26 35VFX**-037 31 35VFX**-04638 50Cable cross section connector range [mm 2 ] formains/ motor Brake PE0.5–10 0.5–10 1.5–162.5 - 16 stranded wire2.5 - 25 solid wireVFX**-061VFX**-074526563801 - 35 stranded wire1 - 50 solid wireVFX**-78 10009016 - 95 16 - 95VFX**-109 94 100VFX**-146 126 160VFX**-175 152 160VFX**-210 182 200VFX**-228VFX**-216 25025035 - 150 16 - 95VFX48: 35-250VFX69: 35-150VFX48: 35-150VFX69: 16-956 - 3516-95(16-70)¹35-150(16-70)¹VFX48: 35-250(95-185)¹VFX69: 35-150(16-70)¹Cable glands (clampingrange [mm])mains /motorM32 openingM20 +reducer (6–12)M32 (12–20)/M32openingM25+reducer (10-14)M32 (16–25)/M32(13–18)M32 (15–21)M40 (19–28)M50 (27 -35)VFX48: Ø17-42 cableflexibleleadthroughor M50opening.VFX69: Ø23-55 Cableflexibleleadthroughor M63opening.Ø23-55cable flexibleleadthroughor M63opening.BrakeM25 openingM20 +reducer (6–12)M25 (10–14)M25M32M40 (19 -28)FX48: Ø11-32 Cableflexibleleadthroughor M40opening.VFX69: Ø17-42 Cableflexibleleadthroughor M50opening.Ø17-42cable flexibleleadthroughor M50opening.204 Technical Data CG Drives & Automation 01-5326-01r1

Table 49Fuses, cable cross-sections and glandsModelVFX**-260 300300VFX48: (2x)35-240VFX69: (2x)35-150VFX**-375 324 355VFX**-430VFX**-500VFX**-600VFX**-650VFX**-720, 750VFX**-860VFX**-900VFX**-1K0VFX**-1K2VFX**-1K5Nominalinputcurrent[A]Maximum valuefuse [A]372 400432 500520 630562 630648 710744 800795 900864 10001037 12501296 1500Note: For models 003 to 074 cable glands are optional.1. Values are valid when brake chopper electronics are builtin.Cable cross section connector range [mm 2 ] formains/ motor Brake PEVFX48: (2x)35-240VFX69: (3x)35-150VFX48: (3x)35-240VFX69: (4x)35-150VFX48: (3x)35-240VFX69: (4x)35-150Cable glands (clampingrange [mm])mains /motorBrakeframe --- --frame -- --frame -- --frame -- --VFX48: (4x)35-240 frame -- --VFX48: (6x)35-240 frame -- --CG Drives & Automation 01-5326-01r1 Technical Data 205

14.6.2 Fuses and cable dimensionsaccording to NEMA ratingsTable 50Types and fusesModelInputcurrent[Arms]ULClass J TD(A)Mains input fusesFerraz-ShawmuttypeVFX48-003 2,2 6 AJT6VFX48-004 3,5 6 AJT6VFX48-006 5,2 6 AJT6VFX48-008 6,9 10 AJT10VFX48-010 8,7 10 AJT10VFX48-013 11,3 15 AJT15VFX48-018 15,6 20 AJT20VFX48-026 22 25 AJT25VFX48-031 26 30 AJT30VFX48-037 31 35 AJT35VFX48-046 38 45 AJT45VFX48-061 52 60 AJT60VFX48-074 65 80 AJT80VFX48-090 78 100 AJT100VFX48-109 94 110 AJT110VFX48-146 126 150 AJT150VFX48-175 152 175 AJT175VFX48-210 182 200 AJT200VFX48-228 216 250 AJT250VFX48-250 216 250 AJT250VFX48-300 260 300 AJT300VFX48-375 324 350 AJT350VFX48-430 372 400 AJT400VFX48-500 432 500 AJT500VFX48-600 520 600 AJT600VFX48-650 562 600 AJT600VFX48-750 648 700 A4BQ700VFX48-860 744 800 A4BQ800VFX48-1K0 864 1000 A4BQ1000VFX48-1K25 1037 1200 A4BQ1200VFX48-1K5 1296 1500 A4BQ1500206 Technical Data CG Drives & Automation 01-5326-01r1

Table 51Type cables cross-sections and glandsCable cross section connectorModelMains and motor Brake PERangeTighteningtorqueNm/Lb-InRangeTighteningtorqueNm/Lb-In14 / 124 -24 / 212 2 AWG 2- AWG 3/0 14 / 124RangeTighteningtorqueNm/Lb-InVFX48-003VFX48-004AWG 20 - AWG 6AWG 20 - AWG 6AWG 20 - AWG 6VFX48-006AWG 16 - AWG 6 AWG 16 - AWG 6 AWG 16 - AWG 6VFX48-0081.3 / 11.51.3 / 11.52.6/23VFX48-010 AWG 14 - AWG 6 AWG 14 - AWG 6 AWG 14 - AWG 6VFX48-013 AWG 12 - AWG 6 AWG 12 - AWG 6 AWG 12 - AWG 6VFX48-018 AWG 10 - AWG 6 AWG 10 - AWG 6 AWG 10 - AWG 6VFX48-026VFX48-031 AWG 8 - AWG 6AWG 8 - AWG 6AWG 8 - AWG 61.3 / 11.51.3 / 11.5VFX48-0372.6/23VFX48-046 AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG 6VFX48-061 AWG 4 1.6/14 AWG 4 1.6/14 AWG 4 1.6/14VFX48-074 AWG 3 2.8/25 AWG 3 2.8/25 AWG 3 2.8/25VFX48-090 AWG 2- 300 kcmilAWG 2- 300 kcmil14 / 124VFX48-109(10 / 88)¹VFX48-146VFX48-175AWG 1/0- 300kcmilAWG 3/0 - 300kcmilAWG 4/0 - 300kcmilAWG 1/0- 300kcmilAWG 3/0 - 300kcmil 14 / 124AWG 4/0 - 300 (10 / 88)¹kcmilVFX48-210300 kcmil300 kcmil 24 / 212VFX48-22824 / 212 300 kcmil 24 / 212(10 / 88)¹VFX48-250 400 kcmil 400 kcmilVFX48-300VFX48-3752 x AWG 3/0 -2 x 300 kcmil2 x 250 kcmil -2 x 300 kcmil2 x 300 kcmil24 / 2122 x AWG 3/0 -2 x 300 kcmil2 x 250 kcmil -2 x 300 kcmil2 x 300 kcmilVFX48-43024 / 212VFX48-500 2 x 400 kcmil 2 x 400 kcmilVFX48-6003x 300 kcmil3x 300 kcmilVFX48-65024 / 212VFX48-750 3x 400 kcmil 3x 400 kcmilVFX48-860 4 x 300 kcmil4 x 300 kcmil24 / 212VFX48-1k0 4 x 400 kcmil 4 x 400 kcmilVFX48-5 x 300 kcmil5 x 300 kcmil1k2524 / 212VFX48-1k5 6 x 400 kcmil 6 x 400 kcmil24 / 212 frame -24 / 212 frame -24 / 212 frame -24 / 212 frame -24 / 212 frame -Cable typeCopper (Cu)75°C1. Values are valid when brake chopper electronics are builtin.2. AWG 2 - AWG 3/0 = 14 Nm / 124 Lb-InAWG 4/0 - 300kcmil = 24 Nm / 212 Lb-InCG Drives & Automation 01-5326-01r1 Technical Data 207

14.7 Control signalsTable 52Terminal X1 Name: Function (Default): Signal: Type:1 +10 V +10 VDC Supply voltage +10 VDC, max 10 mA output2 AnIn1 Process reference3 AnIn2 Off4 AnIn3 Off0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mAbipolar: -10 - +10 VDC or -20 - +20 mA0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mAbipolar: -10 - +10 VDC or -20 - +20 mA0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mAbipolar: -10 - +10 VDC or -20 - +20 mAanalogue inputanalogue inputanalogue input5 AnIn4 Off0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mAbipolar: -10 - +10 VDC or -20 - +20 mAanalogue input6 -10 V -10VDC Supply voltage -10 VDC, max 10 mA output7 Common Signal ground 0V output8 DigIn 1 RunL 0-8/24 VDC digital input9 DigIn 2 RunR 0-8/24 VDC digital input10 DigIn 3 Off 0-8/24 VDC digital input11 +24 V +24VDC Supply voltage +24 VDC, 100 mA output12 Common Signal ground 0 V output13 AnOut 1 Min speed to max speed 0 ±10 VDC or 0/4– +20 mA analogue output14 AnOut 2 0 to max torque 0 ±10 VDC or 0/4– +20 mA analogue output15 Common Signal ground 0 V output16 DigIn 4 Off 0-8/24 VDC digital input17 DigIn 5 Off 0-8/24 VDC digital input18 DigIn 6 Off 0-8/24 VDC digital input19 DigIn 7 Off 0-8/24 VDC digital input20 DigOut 1 Ready 24 VDC, 100 mA digital output21 DigOut 2 Brake 24 VDC, 100 mA digital output22 DigIn 8 RESET 0-8/24 VDC digital inputTerminal X2313233N/C 1COM 1N/O 1Relay 1 outputTrip, active when theAC drive is in a TRIP conditionN/C is opened when the relay is active(valid for all relays)N/O is closed when the relay is active(valid for all relays)41 N/C 242 COM 243 N/O 2Terminal X3Relay 2 OutputRun, active when theAC drive is started51 COM 3 Relay 3 Output52 N/O 3Offpotential free change over0.1 – 2 A/U max 250 VAC or 42 VDCpotential free change over0.1 – 2 A/U max 250 VAC or 42 VDCpotential free change over0.1 – 2 A/U max 250 VAC or 42 VDCrelay outputrelay outputrelay output208 Technical Data CG Drives & Automation 01-5326-01r1

15. Menu ListOn our home page in the download area, you could find a"Communication information" list and a list to note Parameterset information .Factory setting Customer Page100 Preferred View 59110 1st Line Process Val120 2nd Line Torque200 Main Setup210 Operation 60211 Language English212 Select Motor M1213 Drive Mode Speed214 Ref Control Remote215 Run/Stp Ctrl Remote216 Reset Ctrl Remote217 Local/Rem2171 LocRefCtrl Standard2172 LocRunCtrl Standard218 Lock Code? 0219 Rotation R+L21A Level/Edge Level21B Supply Volts Not Defined220 Motor Data 66221 Motor Volts U NOM V222 Motor Freq 50Hz223 Motor Power (P NOM ) W224 Motor Curr (I MOT ) A225 Motor Speed (n MOT ) rpm226 Motor Poles 4227 Motor Cos Cosφ NOM228 Motor Vent Self229 Motor ID-Run Off22B Encoder Off22C Enc Pulses 102422D Enc Speed 0rpm22F Enc Puls Ctr 0230 Mot Protect 71231 Mot I 2 t Type Trip232 Mot I 2 t Curr 100%233 Mot I 2 t Time 60s234 Thermal Prot Off235 Motor Class F 140C236 PT100 Inputs PT100 1+2+3237 Motor PTC Off240 Set Handling 74241 Select Set A242 Copy Set A>B243 Default>Set A244 Copy to CP No Copy245 Load from CP No Copy250 Autoreset 77251 No of Trips 0252 Overtemp Off253 Overvolt D Off254 Overvolt G Off255 Overvolt Off256 Motor Lost OffFactory setting Customer Page257 Locked Rotor Off258 Power Fault Off259 Undervoltage Off25A Motor I 2 t Off25B Motor I 2 t TT Trip25C PT100 Off25D PT100 TT Trip25E PTC Off25F PTC TT Trip25G Ext Trip Off25H Ext Trip TT Trip25I Com Error Off25J Com Error TT Trip25K Min Alarm Off25L Min Alarm TT Trip25M Max Alarm Off25N Max Alarm TT Trip25O Over curr F Off25Q Over speed Off25R Ext Mot Temp Off25S Ext Mot TT Trip25T LC Level Off25U LC Level TT Trip25V Brk Fault Off25W Encoder Off25X Deviation Off260 Serial Com 85261 Com Type RS232/485262 RS232/485 852621 Baudrate 96002622 Address 1263 Fieldbus 852631 Address 622632 PrData Mode Basic2633 Read/Write RW2634 AddPrValue 0264 Comm Fault 872641 ComFlt Mode Off2642 ComFlt Time 0.5 s265 Ethernet 872651 IP Address 0.0.0.02652 MAC Address 0000000000002653 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.02654 Gateway 0.0.0.02655 DHCP Off266 FB Signal 882661 FB Signal 1 02662 FB Signal 2 02663 FB Signal 3 02664 FB Signal 4 02665 FB Signal 5 02666 FB Signal 6 02667 FB Signal 7 02668 FB Signal 8 02669 FB Signal 9 0266A FB Signal 10 0266B FB Signal 11 0266C FB Signal 12 0CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Menu List 209

Factory setting Customer Page266D FB Signal 13 0266E FB Signal 14 0266F FB Signal 15 0266G FB Signal 16 0269 FB Status300 Process 89310 Set/View ref 0rpm320 Proc Setting 89321 Proc Source Speed322 Proc Unit rpm323 User Unit 0324 Process Min 0325 Process Max 0326 Ratio Linear327 F(Val) PrMin Min328 F(Val) PrMax Max330 Start/Stop 94331 Acc Time 10.00s332 Dec Time 10.00s333 Acc MotPot 16.00s334 Dec MotPot 16.00s335 Acc>Min Spd 10.00s336 Dec

3AA Speed 43AB Dev Bandwidt3AC Dev Time ms3AD LAFS Load OffFactory setting Customer Page3AGCrane N FunctionZero Pos400 Monitor/Prot 124410 Load Monitor411 Alarm Select Off412 Alarm trip Off413 Ramp Alarm Off414 Start Delay 2s415 Load Type Basic416 Max Alarm4161 MaxAlarmMar 15%4162 MaxAlarmDel 0.1s417 Max Pre alarm4171 MaxPreAlMar 10%4172 MaxPreAlDel 0.1s418 Min Pre Alarm4181 MinPreAlMar 10%4182 MinPreAlDel 0.1s419 Min Alarm4191 MinAlarmMar 15%4192 MinAlarmDel 0.1s41A Autoset Alrm No41B Normal Load 100%41C Load Curve41C1 Load Curve 1 100%41C2 Load Curve 2 100%41C3 Load Curve 3 100%41C4 Load Curve 4 100%41C5 Load Curve 5 100%41C6 Load Curve 6 100%41C7 Load Curve 7 100%41C8 Load Curve 8 100%41C9 Load Curve 9 100%420 Process Prot 128421 Low Volt OR On422 Rotor Locked Off423 Motor lost Off424 Overvolt Ctrl On500 I/Os 130510 An Inputs511 AnIn1 Fc Process Ref512 AnIn1 Setup 4-20mA513 AnIn1 Advn5131 AnIn1 Min 4mA5132 AnIn1 Max 10.00V/20.00mA5133 AnIn1 Bipol 10.00V/20.00mA5134 AnIn1 FcMin Min5135 AnIn1 ValMin 05136 AnIn1 FcMax Max5137 AnIn1 ValMax 05138 AnIn1 Oper Add+5139 AnIn1 Filt 0.1s513A AnIn1 Enabl On514 AnIn2 Fc Off 135Factory setting Customer Page515 AnIn2 Setup 4-20mA516 AnIn2 Advan 1435161 AnIn2 Min 4mA5162 AnIn2 Max 20.00mA5163 AnIn2 Bipol 20.00mA5164 AnIn2 FcMin Min5165 AnIn2 ValMin 05166 AnIn2 FcMax Max5167 AnIn2 ValMax 05168 AnIn2 Oper Add+5169 AnIn2 Filt 0.1s516A AnIn2 Enabl On517 AnIn3 Fc Off 143518 AnIn3 Setup 4-20mA519 AnIn3 Advan5191 AnIn3 Min 4mA5192 AnIn3 Max 20.00mA5193 AnIn3 Bipol 20.00mA5194 AnIn3 FcMin Min5195 AnIn3 ValMin 05196 AnIn3 FcMax Max5197 AnIn3 ValMax 05198 AnIn3 Oper Add+5199 AnIn3 Filt 0.1s519A AnIn3 Enabl On51A AnIn4 Fc Off 14451B AnIn4 Setup 4-20mA51C AnIn4 Advan51C1 AnIn4 Min 4mA51C2 AnIn4 Max 20.00mA51C3 AnIn4 Bipol 20.00mA51C4 AnIn4 FcMin Min51C5 AnIn4 ValMin 051C6 AnIn4 FcMax Max51C7 AnIn4 ValMax 051C8 AnIn4 Oper Add+51C9 AnIn4 Filt 0.1s51CA AnIn4 Enabl On520 Dig Inputs 137521 DigIn 1 RunL522 DigIn 2 RunR523 DigIn 3 Off524 DigIn 4 Off525 DigIn 5 Off526 DigIn 6 Off527 DigIn 7 Off528 DigIn 8 Reset529 B(oard)1 DigIn 1 Off52A B(oard)1 DigIn 2 Off52B B(oard)1 DigIn 3 Off52C B(oard)2 DigIn 1 Off52D B(oard)2 DigIn 2 Off52E B(oard)2 DigIn 3 Off52F B(oard)3 DigIn 1 Off52G B(oard)3 DigIn 2 Off52H B(oard)3 DigIn 3 Off530 An Outputs 139531 AnOut1 Fc SpeedCG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Menu List 211

Factory setting Customer Page532 AnOut1 Setup 4-20mA533 AnOut1 Adv5331 AnOut 1 Min 4mA5332 AnOut 1 Max 20.0mA5333 AnOut1Bipol -10.00-10.00 V5334 AnOut1 FcMin Min5335 AnOut1 VlMin 05336 AnOut1 FcMax Max5337 AnOut1 VlMax 0534 AnOut2 FC Torque535 AnOut2 Setup 4-20mA536 AnOut2 Advan5361 AnOut 2 Min 4mA5362 AnOut 2 Max 20.0mA5363 AnOut2Bipol -10.00-10.00 V5364 AnOut2 FcMin Min5365 AnOut2 VlMin 05366 AnOut2 FcMax Max5367 AnOut2 VlMax 0540 Dig Outputs 143541 DigOut 1 Ready542 DigOut 2 Brake550 Relays 145551 Relay 1 Trip552 Relay 2 Run553 Relay 3 Off554B(oard)1 Relay1Off555 B1 Relay 2 Off556 B1 Relay 3 Off557 B2 Relay 1 Off558 B2 Relay 2 Off559 B2 Relay 3 Off55A B3 Relay 1 Off55B B3 Relay 2 Off55C B3 Relay 3 Off55D Relay Adv55D1 Relay 1 Mode N.O55D2 Relay 2 Mode N.O55D3 Relay 3 Mode N.O55D4 B1R1 Mode N.O55D5 B1R2 Mode N.O55D6 B1R3 Mode N.O55D7 B2R1 Mode N.O55D8 B2R2 Mode N.O55D9 B2R3 Mode N.O55DA B3R1 Mode N.O55DB B3R2 Mode N.O55DC B3R3 Mode N.O560 Virtual I/Os 146561 VIO 1 Dest Off562 VIO 1 Source Off563 VIO 2 Dest Off564 VIO 2 Source Off565 VIO 3 Dest Off566 VIO 3 Source Off567 VIO 4 Dest Off568 VIO 4 Source OffFactory setting Customer Page569 VIO 5 Dest Off56A VIO 5 Source Off56B VIO 6 Dest Off56C VIO 6 Source Off56D VIO 7 Dest Off56E VIO 7 Source Off56F VIO 8 Dest Off56G VIO 8 Source Off600 Logical&Timers 147610 Comparators611 CA1 Setup6111 CA1 Value Speed6112 CA1 Level HI 300rpm6113 CA1 Level LO 200rpm6114 CA1 Type Hysteresis6115 CA1 Polar Unipolar612 CA2 Setup 1626121 CA2 Value Torque6122 CA2 Level HI 20%6123 CA2 Level LO 10%6124 CA2 Type Hysteresis6125 CA2 Polar Unipolar613 CA3 Setup 1546131 CA3 Value Process Val6132 CA3 Level HI 300rpm6133 CA3 Level LO 200rpm6134 CA3 Type Hysteresis6135 CA3 Polar Unipolar614 CA4 Setup 1556141 CA4 Value Process Err6142 CA4 Level HI 100 rpm6143 CA4 Level LO - 100 rpm6144 CA4 Type Window6145 CA4 Polar Bipolar615 CD Setup 1576151 CD1 Run6152 CD2 DigIn 16153 CD3 Trip6154 CD4 Ready620 Logic Output Y 158621 Y Comp 1 CA1622 Y Operator 1 &623 Y Comp 2 !A2624 Y Operator 2 &625 Y Comp 3 CD1630 Logic Z 160631 Z Comp 1 CA1632 Z Operator 1 &633 Z Comp2 !A2634 Z Operator 2 &635 Z Comp 3 CD1640 Timer1 161641 Timer1 Trig Off642 Timer1 Mode Off643 Timer1 Delay 0:00:00644 Timer 1 T1 0:00:00645 Timer1 T2 0:00:00649 Timer1 Value 0:00:00212 Menu List CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

Factory setting Customer Page650 Timer2 163651 Timer2 Trig Off652 Timer2 Mode Off653 Timer2 Delay 0:00:00654 Timer 2 T1 0:00:00655 Timer2 T2 0:00:00659 Tmer2 Value 0:00:00660 Counters661 Counter 16611 C1 Trig Off6612 C1 Reset Off6613 C1 High Val 06614 C1 Low Val 06615 C1 DecTimer Off6619 C1 Value 0662 Counter 26621 C2 Trig Off6622 C2 Reset Off6623 C2 High Val 06624 C2 Low Val 06625 C2 DecTimer Off6629 C2 Value 0700 Oper/Status 167710 Operation711 Process Val712 Speed713 Torque714 Shaft Power715 Electrical Power716 Current717 Output volt718 Frequency719 DC Voltage71A Heatsink Tmp71B PT100_1_2_3720 Status 170721 AC drive Status722 Warning723 DigIn Status724 DigOut Status725 AnIn Status 1-2726 AnIn Status 3-4727AnOut Status 1-2728 IO Status B1729 IO Status B272A IO Status B3730 Stored Val 173731 Run Time 00:00:007311 Reset RunTm No732 Mains Time 00:00:00733 Energy kWh7331 Rst Energy No800 View TripLog810 Trip Message (log list 1) 175811 Process Value812 Speed813 TorqueFactory setting Customer Page814 Shaft Power815 Electrical Power816 Current817 Output voltage818 Frequency819 DC Link voltage81A Heatsink Tmp81B PT100_1, 2, 381C AC drive Status81D DigIn status81E DigOut status81F AnIn status 1 281G AnIn status 3 481H AnOut status 1 281I IO Status B181J IO Status B281K IO Status B381L Run Time81M Mains Time81N Energy81O Process reference820 Trip Message 821- 82O (log list 2) 176830 Trip Message 831 - 83O (log list 3)840 Trip Message 841 - 84O (log list 4)850 Trip Message 851 - 85O (log list 5)860 Trip Message 861 - 86O (log list 6)870 Trip Message 871 - 87O (log list 7)880 Trip Message 881 - 88O (log list 8)890 Trip Message 891 - 89O (log list 9)8A0 Reset Trip No 185900 System Data920 AC drive Data 177921 AC drive Type922 Software923 Unit name 0CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 Menu List 213

214 Menu List CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

IndexAAbbreviations ...................................10Acceleration ...............................94, 96Acceleration ramp .....................96Acceleration time ......................94Ramp type ................................96Alarm trip ......................................124Alternating MASTER ....................114Ambient temperature and derating 201Analogue comparators ...................147Analogue input ..............................130AnIn1 .....................................130AnIn2 .............................135, 136Offset .............................131, 139Analogue Output ...........139, 142, 208AnOut 1 .........................139, 142Output configuration .....139, 142AND operator ...............................158AnIn2 ............................................135AnIn3 ............................................135AnIn4 ............................................136Autoreset .......................4, 43, 77, 181Autotune .......................................109BBaudrate ..............................53, 85, 86Brake chopper ................................188Brake function .........................99, 100Bake release time ......................99Brake ......................................100Brake Engage Time ................100Brake wait time ......................100Release speed ..........................100Vector Brake ...........................100Brake functionsFrequency ...............................130Brake resistors ................................188CCable cross-section .........................204Cable specifications ..........................24CE-marking .......................................9Change Condition .........................115Change Timer ...............................115Clockwise rotary field ....................137Com Type .......................................85Comparators ..................................147Connecting control signals ...............30ConnectionsBrake chopper connections .......20Control signal connections .......30Mains supply ......................20, 33Motor earth ........................20, 33Motor output .....................20, 33Safety earth .........................20, 33Control panel ..................................49control panel ..................................187Control Panel memoryCopy all settings to ControlPanel .........................................76Frequency ...............................130Control signal connections ...............30Control signals ...........................28, 31Edge-controlled ..................43, 65Level-controlled ..................43, 65Counter-clockwise rotary field .......137Crane Option ................................121Current ............................................28Current control (0-20mA) ...............32DDC-link residual voltage ....................4Deceleration .....................................94Deceleration time .....................94Ramp type ................................97Declaration of Conformity .................9Default .............................................75Definitions .......................................10Derating .........................................201Digital comparators ........................147Digital inputsBoard Relay ............................145DigIn 1 ...................................137DigIn 2 ...................................138DigIn 3 ...................................138Dismantling and scrapping ................9Display .............................................49Double-ended connection ................31Drive mode ......................................61Frequency ...............................130Drives on Change ..........................115EECP ...............................................187Edge control ...............................43, 65Electrical ........................................168Electrical specification ....................200EMC ................................................20Current control (0-20mA) ........32Double-ended connection .........31RFI mains filter .........................20Single-ended connection ...........31Twisted cables ...........................32Emergency stop ................................47EN60204-1 ........................................9EN61800-3 ........................................9EN61800-5-1 ....................................9Enable ................................42, 50, 137EtherCAT ................................55, 190EXOR operator ..............................158Expression ......................................158External Control Panel ...................187FFactory settings ................................ 75Fans ............................................... 114Fieldbus ............................. 55, 85, 190Fixed MASTER ............................. 114Flux optimization .......................... 107FrequencyFrequency priority .................... 41Jog Frequency ........................ 105Maximum Frequency ............. 103Minimum Frequency ............. 103Preset Frequency .................... 108Skip Frequency ...................... 104Frequency priority ........................... 41Fuses, cable cross-sections andglands ............................................ 204GGeneral electrical specifications ..... 200Global parameters ........................... 74II/O Board ...................................... 189I2t protectionMotor I2t Current ............. 71, 73Motor I2t Type ........................ 71ID run ....................................... 44, 68Identification Run ..................... 44, 68IEC269 ......................................... 204Industrial Ethernet .................. 55, 190Internal speed control .................... 109Internal speed controller ................ 109Speed I Time .......................... 110Speed P Gain ......................... 110Interrupt ................................... 87, 88IT Mains supply ................................ 4IxR Compensation ........................ 106JJog Frequency ............................... 105KKeyboard reference ........................ 109Keys ................................................ 50- Key ........................................ 52+ Key ....................................... 52Control keys ............................. 50ENTER key ............................. 52ESCAPE key ............................ 52Function keys ........................... 52NEXT key ................................ 52PREVIOUS key ....................... 52RUN L ..................................... 50RUN R .................................... 50STOP/RESET ......................... 50Toggle Key ............................... 51CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 215

LLCD display ....................................49Level control ..............................43, 65Load default .....................................75Load monitor ...........................45, 124Local/Remote ..................................63Lock code ........................................64Long motor cables ...........................22Low Voltage Directive .......................9Lower Band ...................................116Lower Band Limit ..........................117MMachine Directive .............................9Main menu ......................................52Mains supply .......................20, 27, 33Maintenance ..................................185Manis cables ....................................19Max Frequency ........................94, 103Memory ...........................................44Menu(110) ........................................59(120) ........................................60(210) ........................................60(211) ........................................60(212) ........................................61(213) ........................................61(214) ........................................62(215) ........................................62(216) ........................................63(217) ........................................63(218) ........................................64(219) ........................................64(21A) ........................................65(21B) ........................................65(220) ........................................66(221) ........................................66(222) ........................................66(223) ........................................66(224) ........................................67(225) ........................................67(226) ........................................67(227) ........................................67(228) ........................................68(229) ........................................68(22B) ........................................69(22C) ........................................69(22D) .......................................69(230) ........................................71(231) ........................................71(232) ........................................71(233) ........................................71(234) ........................................72(235) ........................................73(236) ........................................73(237) ........................................74(240) ........................................74(241) ........................................74(242) ........................................75(243) ........................................75(244) .........................................76(245) .........................................76(250) .........................................77(251) .........................................77(252) .........................................77(253) .........................................78(254) .........................................78(255) .........................................78(256) .........................................78(257) .........................................79(258) .........................................79(259) .........................................79(25A) ........................................79(25B) ........................................80(25C) ........................................80(25D) ........................................80(25E) ........................................80(25F) ........................................80(25G) ........................................81(25H) .......................................81(25I) .........................................81(25J) .........................................81(25K) ........................................82(25L) ........................................82(25M) .......................................82(25N) .................................77, 82(25O) .......................................82(25Q) .......................................83(25R) ........................................83(25S) .........................................83(25T) ........................................83(25U) ........................................83(260) .........................................85(261) .........................................85(262) .........................................85(2621) .......................................85(2622) .......................................85(263) .........................................85(2631) .......................................86(2632) .......................................86(2633) .......................................86(2634) .......................................86(264) .........................................87(265) .........................................87(269) .........................................88(310) .........................................89(320) .........................................89(321) .........................................89(322) .........................................90(323) .........................................91(324) .........................................92(325) .........................................92(326) .........................................92(327) .........................................93(328) .........................................93(331) .........................................94(332) .........................................94(333) .........................................95(334) .........................................95(335) .........................................95(336) ........................................ 96(337) ........................................ 96(338) ........................................ 97(339) ........................................ 97(33A) ....................................... 97(33B) ........................................ 98(33C) ....................................... 99(33D) ..................................... 100(33E) ...................................... 100(33F) ...................................... 100(33G) ..................................... 100(33H1) ................................... 101(341) ...................................... 103(342) ...................................... 103(343) ...................................... 103(344) ...................................... 104(345) ...................................... 104(346) ...................................... 105(347) ...................................... 105(348) ...................................... 105(351) ...................................... 106(354) ...................................... 107(361) ...................................... 108(362) ...................................... 108(363) ...................................... 108(364) ...................................... 108(365) ...................................... 108(366) ...................................... 108(367) ...................................... 108(368) ...................................... 108(369) ...................................... 109(371) ...................................... 109(372) ...................................... 110(373) ...................................... 110(380) ...................................... 110(381) ...................................... 110(383) ...................................... 110(384) ...................................... 111(385) ...................................... 111(386) ...................................... 111(387) ...................................... 112(388) ...................................... 113(389) ...................................... 113(391) ...................................... 114(392) ...................................... 114(393) ...................................... 114(394) ...................................... 115(395) ...................................... 115(396) ...................................... 115(398) ...................................... 116(399) ...................................... 116(39A) ..................................... 117(39B) ...................................... 117(39C) ..................................... 117(39D) ..................................... 118(39E) ...................................... 118(39F) ...................................... 119(39G) ..................................... 119(39H-39M) ............................ 120(410) ...................................... 124216 CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

(411) ......................................124(412) ......................................124(413) ......................................124(414) ......................................124(415) ......................................125(416) ......................................125(4162) ....................................125(417) ......................................125(4171) ....................................125(4172) ....................................126(418) ......................................126(4181) ....................................126(4182) ....................................126(419) ......................................126(4191) ....................................126(4192) ....................................127(41A) ......................................127(41B) ......................................127(41C) ......................................127(421) ......................................128(422) ......................................129(423) ......................................129(424) ......................................129(511) ......................................130(512) ......................................131(513) ......................................132(514) ......................................135(515) ......................................135(516) ......................................135(517) ......................................135(518) ......................................135(519) ......................................136(51A) ......................................136(51B) ......................................136(51C) ......................................136(521) ..............................101, 137(522) ......................................138(529-52H) ..............................138(531) ......................................139(532) ......................................139(533) ......................................140(534) ......................................142(535) ......................................142(536) ......................................142(541) ......................................143(542) ......................................144(551) ......................................145(552) ......................................145(553) ......................................145(55D) .....................................146(561) ......................................146(562) ......................................147(563-56G) ..............................147(610) ......................................147(6111) ....................................148(6112) ....................................150(6113) ....................................152(6114) ....................................152(6115) ....................................152(6121) ....................................153(6122) .....................................153(6123) .....................................153(6124) .....................................154(6125) .....................................154(6131) .....................................154(6132) .....................................154(6133) .....................................155(6134) .....................................155(6135) .....................................155(6141) .....................................155(6142) .....................................156(6143) .....................................156(6144) .....................................156(6145) .....................................156(6151) .....................................157(6152) .....................................157(6153) .....................................157(6154) .....................................157(620) .......................................158(621) .......................................158(622) ...............................158, 159(623) ...............................158, 159(624) .......................................158(625) .......................................158(630) .......................................160(631) .......................................160(632) .......................................160(633) .......................................160(634) .......................................160(635) .......................................160(640) .......................................161(641) .......................................161(642) .......................................161(643) .......................................162(644) .......................................162(645) .......................................162(649) .......................................162(650) .......................................163(651) .......................................163(652) .......................................163(653) .......................................163(654) .......................................163(655) .......................................164(659) .......................................164(711) .......................................167(712) .......................................167(713) .......................................168(714) .......................................168(715) .......................................168(716) .......................................168(717) .......................................168(718) .......................................169(719) .......................................169(71A) ......................................169(71B) ......................................169(720) .......................................170(721) .......................................170(722) .......................................170(723) .......................................171(724) .......................................172(725) ...................................... 172(726) ...................................... 172(727) ...................................... 172(728-72A) .............................. 173(730) ...................................... 173(731) ...................................... 173(7311) .................................... 173(732) ...................................... 174(733) ...................................... 174(7331) .................................... 174(800) ...................................... 175(810) ...................................... 175(811-81N) .............................. 175(820) ...................................... 176(830) ...................................... 176(8A0) ..................................... 176(900) ...................................... 177(920) ...................................... 177(922) ...................................... 17733F ........................................ 100616 ........................................ 153Minimum Frequency ...................... 96Modbus ........................................... 55Modbus/TCP .......................... 55, 190Monitor functionAlarm Select ........................... 127Auto set .................................. 127Delay time ............................. 124Max Alarm ............................. 124Overload .......................... 45, 124Ramp Enable ......................... 124Response delay ............... 125, 127Start delay .............................. 124Motor cables .................................... 20Motor cos phi (power factor) ........... 67Motor data ...................................... 66Motor frequency ............................. 67Motor I2t Current ......................... 182Motor identification run ................. 68Motor Lost ...................................... 78Motor lost ..................................... 129Motor Potentiometer ............ 108, 137Motor potentiometer ..................... 137Motor PTC ......................... 29, 30, 74Motor ventilation ............................ 68Motors .............................................. 7Motors in parallel ............................ 25MotPot ............................................ 95NNominal motor frequency ............. 103Number of drives .......................... 114OOperation ........................................ 60Options ................................... 32, 187Brake chopper ........................ 188External Control Panel (ECP) 187I/O Board .............................. 189OR operator .................................. 158CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1 217

Output chokes ...............................193Output Voltage .............................168Overload ..................................45, 124Overload alarm ................................45PParameter setsLoad default values ...................75Load parameter sets fromControl Panel ...........................76Parameter Set Selection ............39Select a Parameter set ................74PI Autotune ...................................109PID Controller ..............................110Closed loop PID control .........111Feedback signal .......................110PID D Time ...........................111PID I Time ............................111PID P Gain ............................110Priority ............................................41Process Protection ..........................128Process Value .................................167Product standard, EMC .....................8Programming ...................................53PT100 Inputs ............................73, 74PTC input .......................................72Pump/Fan Control ........................114QQuick Setup Card ..............................7RReferenceFrequency ...............................128Motor potentiometer ..............137Reference signal ..................61, 89Set reference value ....................89Torque ...................................129View reference value .................89Reference control .............................62Reference signal ...............................62Relay output ..................................145Relay 1 ...................................145Relay 2 ...................................145Relay 3 ...................................145Release speed .................................100Remote control ................................42Reset command .............................137Reset control ....................................63Resolution .......................................59RFI mains filter ...............................20Rotation ..........................................64RS232/485 ......................................85RUN ...............................................50Run command .................................50Run Left command ........................137Run Right command .....................137Running motor ................................97SSelect Drive ....................................114Settle Time ....................................118Setup menu ......................................52Menu structure .........................52Shaft power ....................................168Signal ground .................................208Single-ended connection ..................31Software .........................................177Speed .............................................167Speed Mode .....................................61Spinstart ...........................................97Standards ...........................................8Standby supply board .....................190Start Delay .....................................116Start/Stop settings ............................94Status indications .............................49Stop categories .................................47Stop command ...............................137Stop Delay .....................................117Stripping lengths ..............................24Switches ...........................................28Switching in motor cables ................22TTechnical Data ...............................195Terminal connections ......................28Test Run ..........................................68Timer .............................................115Torque .....................................59, 106Transition Frequency .....................118Trip .................................................50Trip causes and remedial action .....180Trip Message log ............................175Trips, warnings and limits ..............179Twisted cables ..................................32Type code number .............................7UUnderload ........................................45Underload alarm ............................124Unlock Code ...................................64Upper Band ...................................116Menu(397) 116Upper Band Limit ..........................117VV/Hz Mode .....................................61Vector Brake ..................................100Ventilation .......................................68View reference value .........................89Voltage .............................................28VSD Data ......................................177218 CG Drives & Automation, 01-5326-01r1

CG Drives & Automation Sweden ABMörsaregatan 12Box 222 25SE-250 24 HelsingborgSwedenT +46 42 16 99 00F +46 42 16 99 49www.emotron.com/www.cgglobal.comDocument set: 01-5324-01r1Instruction manual, 01-5326-01r1Quick setup card, 01-5328-01r02012-07-02